Nbs specification (updated for contract)

THE OLD STATIONSTOKESLEYMIDDLESBROUGHTS9 7AB

August 2014

Page 1 of 266 Project Fitzroy

specification for contract



Table of Contents

Title Page

7Brick/ block wallingF10

16Natural stone/ ashlar walling/ dressingsF21

21Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ block/ stone wallingF30

30Precast concrete sills/ lintels/ copings/ featuresF31

34Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixingG20

42Curtain wallingH11

59Structural glass assembliesH13

66Precast concrete and glass lens/ paver rooflights/ floor lights/ pavement lights/ security panels

H14

69Natural slatingH62

76Lead sheet coverings/ flashingsH71

83Aluminium strip/ sheet coverings/ flashingsH72

88Flexible sheet waterproofing/ damp proofingJ40

92Reinforced bitumen membrane roof coveringsJ41

107Single layer polymeric sheet roof coveringsJ42

119Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ ceilingsK10

128Rigid sheet flooring/ sheathing/ decking/ sarking/ linings/ casings

K11

131Panel cubicles/ duct and wall linings/ screensK32

133Demountable suspended ceilingsK40

141Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ LouvresL10

150Doors/ shutters/ hatchesL20

164Stairs/ ladders/ walkways/ handrails/ balustradesL30

168General glazingL40

171Cement based levelling/ wearing screedsM10

182Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast coatingsM20



188Rubber/ plastics/ cork/ lino/ carpet tiling/ sheetingM50

197Painting/clear finishingM60

204Intumescent coatings for fire protection of steelworkM61

209General fixtures/ furnishings/ equipmentN10

214Sanitary appliances and fittingsN13

217Sundry insulation/ proofing workP10

220Fire stopping systemsP12

226Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ sundry itemsP20

229FencingQ40

234Rainwater drainage systemsR10

239Purpose made joineryZ10

242Purpose made metalworkZ11

247Preservative/ fire retardant treatmentZ12

250Fixings and adhesivesZ20

254MortarsZ21

257SealantsZ22

259Powder coatingsZ31

264AnodizingZ33



2SealantsZ22

2Powder coatingsZ31

2AnodizingZ33



F10

Brick/ block walling

F10 Brick/ block walling

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

95 SIMILAR EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS

• Wherever products are specified by proprietary name and the phrase 'or equivalent' is notincluded, it is to be deemed included.

• Demonstration of equivalence is the responsibility of the sub-contractor/supplier.

TYPES OF WALLING

110 CLAY FACING BRICKWORK Red Brick - part of chequerboard details and contrastingbanding in Education courtyards - see design intent document

• Bricks: To BS EN 771-1.- Manufacturer: tbc.Product reference: Ashwell Red Multi handmade.

- Recycled content: manufacturers standard.- Special shapes: As shown on drawings.

• Mortar: As section Z21.- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand (mortar class 4).- Additional requirements: Coloured mortar. Colour reference to be advised .

• Bond: Half lap stretcher generally, patterned brick design as architects details .• Joints: Bucket handle.• Features: special shaped bricks / solid bricks to reveals and snapped header details - see

detail 31-002Chequerboard pattern to main elevation. Engineer to advise on joint ties at verticaljunctions.

110A CLAY FACING BRICKWORK Main Buff brick

• Bricks: To BS EN 771-1.- Manufacturer: tbc .Product reference: tbc.

- Recycled content: Manufacturer's standard.- Special shapes: To window reveals As shown on drawing 31-002. .

• Mortar: As section Z21.- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand (mortar class 4).- Additional requirements: Coloured mortar. Colour reference to be advised .

• Bond: Half lap stretcher generally, patterned brick design as architects details .• Joints: Bucket handle.• Features: special shaped bricks / solid bricks to reveals and snapped header details - see

detail 31-002Chequerboard pattern to main elevation. Engineer to advise on joint ties at vertcialjunctions.

Page 7 of 266 F10 Project Fitzroy


355 CONCRETE COMMON BLOCKWORK BELOW GROUND• Blocks: To BS EN 771-3.

- Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.Product reference: Submit proposals.

- Configuration: solid - Group 1.- Compressive strength:Mean value: 7.3 N/mm2.Characteristic value: Not applicable.Category: II.

- Freeze/ Thaw resistance: Frost resistant.- Thermal properties: Thermal conductivity: 0.41 W/mK.- Recycled content: 100%.- Work sizes (length x width x height): 440mm x 215mm x 140mm.Tolerance category: D1.

- Special shapes: None.- Additional requirements: Reaction to fire class: A1.

• Mortar: As section Z21.- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.- Mix: 1:3 masonry cement:sand 6 N/mm2 (mortar class 6) Strcural engineer to advise onsulphate resisting requirements.

- Additional requirements: None.

• Bond: Half lap stretcher.

355A CONCRETE COMMON BLOCKWORK MEDIUM DENSITY INNER LEAF OF CAVITYWALLS

• Blocks: To BS EN 771-3.- Manufacturer: Plascon or equal approved.Product reference: Multicore solid .

- Configuration: solid - Group 1.- Compressive strength:Mean value: 7.3 N/mm2.

- Min density ; 1475kg/m3Category: II.

- Freeze/ Thaw resistance: Frost resistant.- Thermal properties: Thermal conductivity: 0.41 W/mK.- Recycled content: 100%.- Work sizes (length x width x height): 440mm x 215mm x 140mm.Tolerance category: D1.


• Mortar: As section Z21.- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand 4 N/mm2 (mortar class 4).- Additional requirements: Internal blockwork is utilised in conjunction with plasteredsurfaces to acheive the acoustic reduction required as detailed in the acoustic strategy.Quality of workmanship shall be maintained at a high standrad to ensure that air pathsare avoided. read in conjunction with acoustic strategy prior to blockwork selection .




355B CONCRETE COMMON BLOCKWORK IN LIFT SHAFTS• Blocks: To BS EN 771-3.

- Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.Product reference: Submit proposals.

- Configuration: solid - Group 1.- Compressive strength:Mean value: 10.4 N/mm2.Characteristic value: Not applicable.Category: II.

- Freeze/ Thaw resistance: Not applicable.- Thermal properties: Thermal conductivity: 0.43 W/mK.- Recycled content: 100%.- Work sizes (length x width x height): 440mm x 215mm x 100mm.Tolerance category: D1.


• Mortar: As section Z21.- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand 4 N/mm2 (mortar class 4).- Additional requirements: Lift shaft wall construction to be confirmed by structuralengineer. Either 2 leaves of 100m or block laid on side.


355C CONCRETE COMMON BLOCKWORK MEDIUM DENSITY IN PARTITIONS

• Blocks: To BS EN 771-3.- Manufacturer: Plascon or equal approved.Product reference: Multicore solid.

- Configuration: Group 1 solid.- Compressive strength:Mean value: 7.3 N/mm2.

- Min density 1475kg/m3Category: II.

- Freeze/ Thaw resistance: Not applicable.- Thermal properties: Thermal conductivity: 1.13 W/mK.- Recycled content: 100%.- Work sizes (length x width x height): 440mm x 215mm x 140mm.Tolerance category: D1.

- Special shapes: None.- Additional requirements: Reaction to fire class: A1. .

• Mortar: As section Z21.- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand 4 N/mm2 (mortar class 4).- Additional requirements: Internal blockwork is utilised in conjunction with plasteredsurfaces to acheive the acoustic reduction required as detailed in the acoustic strategy.Quality of workmanship shall be maintained at a high standard to ensure that air pathsare avoided. read in conjunction with acoustic strategy prior to blockwork selection .


TESTING

400 HARD LANDSCAPING MATERIALS SPECIFICATION

• Minimum BRE ?Green Guide to Specification Online? rating: A+.



410 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MORTAR FOR EACH WALLING TYPE• Testing authority: A UKAS Accredited laboratory.• Test method: BS EN 1015-11.• Preliminary tests procedure: As follows:

- Specimens:Number of specimens: 6.Type: 40 x 40 x 100 mm prisms.Preparation: At least six weeks before walling commences.

- Specimen testing: Half of specimens at 7 days. Remainder at 28 days.Retarded mixes: Extend curing periods to include retardation period.

- Response to result: If mean compressive strength at 28 days is not within the rangegiven below repeat tests with more suitable sand or next higher mortar class.

• Site tests procedure: As follows.- Number of specimens: Six per 150m? of walling or per storey whichever the morefrequent.

- Specimen types: As preliminary test, but prepared during construction.- Specimen testing: Half of specimens at 7 days. Remainder at 28 days.Retarded mixes: Extend curing periods to include retardation period.

• Required test mean compressive strength at 28 days (N/mm?): To be within the followingrange:- Walling type: F10/110.Preliminary tests minimum (N/mm?): To be advised by structural engineer .Preliminary tests maximum (N/mm?): To be advised by structural engineer .Site tests minimum (N/mm?): To be advised by structural engineer .Site tests maximum (N/mm?): To be advised by structural engineer.

• Results: Submit.

420 SITE STORAGE• Bricks shall be inspected on delivery, carefully unloaded to minimise damage and set

directly onto a well-drained, puddle free level area, not in contact with soil. Pay specialattention to the storage and handling of Glazed products as the faces are easily damaged.

• All products should be immediately protected from rain and snow.• It is important not to overload floor slabs or scaffolding with bricks.• Store units in stable stacks clear of the ground and clearly identified by type, strength,

grade, etc.• Protect from adverse weather and keep clean and dry.

WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

430 CONDITIONING OF CLAY AND CALCIUM SILICATE BRICKS AND CLAY BLOCKS

• Bricks and blocks delivered warm from manufacturing process: Do not use until cold.

• Absorbent bricks in warm weather: Wet to reduce suction. Do not soak.

440 CONDITIONING OF CONCRETE BRICKS/ BLOCKS

• Autoclaved concrete bricks/ blocks delivered warm from manufacturing process: Do notuse.

• Age of nonautoclaved concrete bricks/ blocks: Do not use until at least four weeks old.• Avoidance of suction in concrete bricks/ blocks: Do not wet.

- Use of water retaining mortar admixture: Submit details.



460A MORTAR GROUPS• Mix proportions: For a specified group select a mix design from the following:

- Group 1:1:0-0.25:3 (Portland cement:lime:sand with or without air entraining additive).1:3 (Portland cement:sand and air entraining additive).

- Group 2:1:0.5:4-5 (Portland cement:lime:sand with or without air entraining additive).1:3 (masonry cement:sand containing Portland cement and lime in approximate ratio 1:1,and an air entraining additive).1:2.5-3.5 (masonry cement:sand containing Portland cement and inorganic materialsother than lime and air entraining additive).1:3-4 (Portland cement:sand and air entraining additive.)

- Group 3:1:1:5-6 (Portland cement:lime:sand with or without air entraining additive).1:3.5-4 (masonry cement:sand containing Portland cement and lime in approximate ratio1:1, and an air entraining additive).1:4-5 (masonry cement:sand containing Portland cement and inorganic materials other than lime and air entraining additive).1:5-6 (Portland cement:sand and air entraining additive).

- Group 4:1:2:8-9 (Portland cement:lime:sand with or without air entraining additive).1:4.5 (masonry cement:sand containing Portland cement and lime in approximate ratio1:1, and an air entraining additive).1:5.5-6.5 (masonry cement:sand containing Portland cement and inorganic materialsother than lime and air entraining additive).1:7-8 (Portland cement:sand and air entraining additive).

• Batching: Mix proportions by volume.

• Mortar type: Continuous throughout any one type of masonry work.

500 LAYING GENERALLY• Mortar joints: Fill vertical joints. Lay bricks, solid and cellular blocks on a full bed.• AAC block thin mortar adhesive and gypsum block adhesive joints: Fill vertical joints. Lay

blocks on a full bed.• Clay block joints:

- Thin layer mortar: Lay blocks on a full bed.- Interlocking perpends: Butted.

• Bond where not specified: Half lap stretcher.• Vertical joints in brick and concrete block facework: Even widths. Plumb at every fifth cross

joint.

520A ACCURACY

• Courses: Level and true to line.

• Faces, angles and features: Plumb.

• Permissible deviations:- Position in plan of any point inrelation to the specified buildingreference line and/ or point atthe same level 10 mm.

- Straightness in any 5 m length 5 mm.- Verticality up to 3 m height 10 mm.- Verticality up to 7 m height 14 mm.- Overall thickness of walls 10 mm.- Level of bed joints up to 5 m(brick masonry) 11 mm.

- Level of bed joints up to 5 m(block masonry) 13 mm.



535 HEIGHT OF LIFTS IN WALLING USING CEMENT GAUGED OR HYDRAULIC LIMEMORTAR

• Quoins and advance work: Rack back.• Lift height (maximum): 1.2 m above any other part of work at any time.• Daily lift height (maximum): 1.5 m for any one leaf.

545 LEVELLING OF SEPARATE LEAVES• Locations for equal levelling of cavity wall leaves: As follows:

- Every course containing vertical twist type ties or other rigid ties.- Every third tie course for double triangle/ butterfly ties.- Courses in which lintels are to be bedded.

560A COURSING BRICKWORK

• Brickwork, to work sizes 215x102x65mm, should be set out horizontally 4 bricks to 900mm(co-ordinating size) in stretcher bond and vertically to gauge 4 courses to 300mm to matchthe appearance of the reference panel.Setting out should also ensure satisfactory junctions and joints with adjoining or built inelements and components.

580 LAYING FROGGED BRICKS• Single frogged bricks: Frog uppermost.• Double frogged bricks: Larger frog uppermost.• Frog cavity: Fill with mortar.

595 LINTELS

• Bearing: Ensure full length masonry units occur immediately under lintel ends.

635 JOINTING

• Profile: Consistent in appearance.

645 ACCESSIBLE JOINTS NOT EXPOSED TO VIEW• Jointing: Struck flush as work proceeds.

665 POINTING brick facework

• Joint preparation: Remove debris. Dampen surface.

• Mortar: As section Z21.- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand 4 N/mm? (mortar class 4).- Additional requirements: Natural / coloured mortar mix to be agreed followingconstruction of sample panel.

• Profile: Bucket handle.

671 FIRE STOPPING• Avoidance of fire and smoke penetration: Fit tightly between cavity barriers and masonry.

Leave no gaps.



690 ADVERSE WEATHER• General: Do not use frozen materials or lay on frozen surfaces.• Air temperature requirements: Do not lay bricks/ blocks:

- In cement gauged mortars when at or below 3?C and falling or unless it is at least 1?Cand rising.

- In hydraulic lime:sand mortars when at or below 5?C and falling or below 3?C and rising.- In thin joint mortar glue when outside the limits set by the mortar manufacturer.

• Temperature of walling during curing: Above freezing until hardened.• Newly erected walling: Protect at all times from:

- Rain and snow.- Drying out too rapidly in hot conditions and in drying winds.

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FACEWORK

710 THE TERM FACEWORK

• Definition: Applicable in this specification to brick/ block walling finished fair.- Painted facework: The only requirement to be waived is that relating to colour.

730 BRICK/ CONCRETE BLOCK SAMPLES• General: Before placing orders with suppliers submit for approval of appearance labelled

samples of the following: Bricks as in clause F10/110 .• Selection of samples: Representative of the range in variation of appearance.

740 FINISHED MASONRY WORK REFERENCE PANELS• General: Before proceeding to construct the following walling types, construct panels as

specified. Give notice when panels are dry.• Selection of masonry units: Reasonably representative of the average quality of the whole

order to be delivered .• Panel types:

- Walling type: F10/110 .Location: On site. Final location to be agreed .Size: 1.5 x 1.5 m .Other requirements: The reference panel should be positioned in a clean, well-lit areaand be available for the duration of the contract. A viewing distance of 3 metres must beallowed .

750 COLOUR CONSISTENCY OF MASONRY UNITS

• Colour range: Submit proposals of methods taken to ensure that units are of consistentand even appearance within deliveries.

• Conformity: Check each delivery for consistency of appearance with previous deliveriesand with approved reference panels; do not use if variation is excessive.

• Finished work: Free from patches, horizontal stripes and racking back marks.

760 APPEARANCE• Brick/ block selection: Do not use units with damaged faces or arrises.• Cut masonry units: Where cut faces or edges are exposed cut with table masonry saw.• Quality control: Lay masonry units to match relevant reference panels.

- Setting out: To produce satisfactory junctions and joints with built-in elements andcomponents.

- Coursing: Evenly spaced using gauge rods.

• Lifts: Complete in one operation.

• Methods of protecting facework: Submit proposals.



780 GROUND LEVEL• Commencement of facework: Not less than 150 mm below finished level of adjoining

ground or external works level.

790 PUTLOG SCAFFOLDING• Use: Not permitted in facework.

800 TOOTHED BOND

• New and existing facework in same plane: Bond together at every course to achievecontinuity.

830 CLEANLINESS• Facework: Keep clean.• Mortar on facework: Allow to dry before removing with stiff bristled brush.• Removal of marks and stains: Rubbing not permitted.



F21

Natural stone/ ashlar walling/ dressings

F21 Natural stone/ ashlar walling/ dressings


TYPES OF WALLING/ DRESSINGS

110 ASHLAR WALLING

• Stone: To BS EN 771-6.- Name (traditional): Stoke ground top bed Bath stone.- Petrological family: Jurassic Limestone.- Colour: Pale cream / Buff.- Origin: tbc.- Finish: Sawn and honed.- Supplier: tbc.- Unit dimension tolerances: Category D2.- Compressive strength:Mean value (minimum): MPa 13.80.Characteristic value (minimum): Not applicable.Category: II.

- Open porosity: 22.95%.- Additional requirements: Apparent density: 1988 kg/m2.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects deleterious tostrength, durability or appearance. Before delivery to site, season thoroughly, dress andwork in accordance with shop drawings prepared by supplier.

• Mortar: As section Z21.- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.- Mix: to be agreed with specialist stone supplier .- Sand: To BS EN 13139; crushed stone with grading to approval .- Additional requirements: FINAL MORTAR MIX to be agreed following sample panel for approval.

• Bond: As shown on drawings.• Joints: Flush.

- Width: 3 mm.- Pointing: Brushed. As clause 390.

• Other requirements: Sizes as indicated on architects drawings - read in conjunction witharchitects drawings and deisgn intent document .



110A ASHLAR DRESSED STONE LINTELS AND CILLS and copings• Stone: To BS EN 771-6.

- Name (traditional): Stoke ground top bed Bath stone.- Petrological family: Jurassic Limestone.- Colour: Pale cream / Buff.- Origin: tbc.- Finish: Sawn and honed.- Supplier: -.- Unit dimension tolerances: Category D2.- Compressive strength:Mean value (minimum): MPa 13.80.Characteristic value (minimum): Not applicable.Category: II.

- Open porosity: 22.95%.- Additional requirements: Apparent density:1988 kg/m?.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects deleterious tostrength, durability or appearance. Before delivery to site, season thoroughly, dress andwork in accordance with shop drawings prepared by supplier.

• Mortar: As section Z21.- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.- Mix: to be advised by specilaist stone supplier .- Sand: To BS EN 13139; crushed stone with grading to approval .- Additional requirements: Final mortar mix to be agreed following sample panel for approval.

• Bond: As shown on drawings.

• Joints: Flush.- Width: to be agreed.- Pointing: Brushed. As clause 390.

• Other requirements: Sizes as indicated on architects drawings and design intent document .

GENERAL PRODUCTION

240 STONE SAMPLES• Submit: Labelled samples of dressed stone or arrange for samples which represent the

range of variation in appearance to be inspected.- Timing: Before placing orders.

250 CUTTING AND DRESSING OF STONE

• Timing: After seasoning but before delivery to site.

• Accuracy:- Exposed and joint surfaces: Square, true planes free from hollow or rough areas.- Dimensions: Maintain specified joint widths.

• Orientation for natural bed of stones: Appropriate to properties of stones and positions inwalling/ dressings.

260 IDENTIFICATION OF STONE UNITS• Marking: Clearly and indelibly on concealed faces to indicate the natural bed and position

in the finished work.

270 INSPECTION OF STONE UNITS• Give notice: Before despatch to site, at appropriate stages of production.

280 SAND SAMPLES

• Submit: Representative samples for approval of colour and grading.- Timing: Before placing orders.



LAYING AND JOINTING

300 REFERENCE PANELS• General: Complete areas of specified walling types and obtain approval of appearance

before proceeding further.• Walling type:

- Location: to be agreed .- Size: at least 3m long .- Features: to include window cill, lintel and reveal .

315 ADVERSE WEATHER

• General: Do not use frozen materials or lay on frozen surfaces.

• Air temperature: Do not lay stones:- In cement gauged mortars: At or below 3?C and falling or below 1?C and rising.- In hydraulic lime:sand mortars: At or below 5?C and falling or below 3?C and rising.

• Temperature of walling during curing: Above freezing until mortar hardened.

• Newly erected walling: Protect at all times from:- Rain and snow.- Drying out too rapidly in hot conditions and in drying winds.

325 LAYING GENERALLY• Stone selection: Do not use units with damaged faces or arrises.• Accuracy:

- Courses: Level and true to line.- Faces, angles and features: Plumb.- Setting out: Achieve satisfactory junctions and joints with adjoining or built-in elementsand components.

• Absorbent stones: Dampen in warm weather to reduce suction. Do not soak.• Mortar joints:

- Laying: Full bed of mortar with all joints and voids filled.- Temporary distance pieces: Lead or stainless steel. Remove when mortar is sufficientlystrong.

- Appearance: Neat and consistent.• Cleanliness: Keep facework clean. Rubbing and other abrasive or chemical cleaning

methods to remove marks and stains not permitted.

330 WALLING BELOW GROUND LEVEL

• Extent of facework below finished level of adjoining ground or external works (minimum):150 mm.

340 PUTLOG SCAFFOLDING• Use: Not permitted.

350 ONE PIECE SILLS/ THRESHOLDS• Bed joints: Leave open except under:

- End bearings.- Masonry mullions.

• Pointing on completion: Mortar to match adjacent work.

360 OPENINGS

• Method of forming: Rigid templates, accurately fabricated to the required size.

370 JOGGLE JOINTS• General: Fill with bedding mortar. Tamp to expel air.



390 POINTING• Joint preparation: Rake out to depth of 7-10 mm as work proceeds. Remove debris.

Dampen surface.• Mortar application: Neat and consistent.

410 SUPPORT OF EXISTING WORK• Joint above inserted lintel or masonry: Fully consolidated with semidry mortar to support

existing structure.



F30

Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ block/ stonewalling

F30 Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ block/ stone walling





CAVITIES

110 CONCRETE FILL TO BASE OF CAVITY• Concrete generally: To BS EN 206-1 and BS 8500-2.

- Designated concrete: GEN 1 .Workability: High.

• Extent: Maintain 75 mm between top of fill and external ground level and a minimum of 225mm between top of fill and ground level dpc.

• Placement: Compact to eliminate voids.

120 CLEANLINESS• Cavity base and faces, ties, insulation and exposed dpcs: Free from mortar and debris.

132A PERPEND JOINT PLASTICS WEEP HOLES

• Manufacturer: Rytons Building Products Ltd.- Web: www.vents.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Rytons Rytweep Clear Ref: RYTWECL.

• Accessories: Rytons Rytweep Tube Ref: RYTWTUBE.

132B PERPEND JOINT PLASTICS WEEP HOLES• Manufacturer: As Clause 132A.

- Product reference: As Clause 132A.• Locations: Through outer leaf immediately above base of cavity, at cavity trays, stepped

dpcs and above external openings. Ensure that weep hole is flush with face of masonryand does not project.75 mm above top of cavity fill at base of cavity.

• Provision: At not greater than 1000 mm centres and not less than two over each opening.



155 PARTIAL FILL CAVITY INSULATION• Insulation: Phenolic foam boards to BS EN 13166: 2001 .

- Product certification: British Board of Agrement (BBA) Certificate number 94/3047.• Manufacturer: Kingspan Insulation Ltd

- Web: www.kingspaninsulation.co.uk- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Kooltherm K8 Cavity Board or equal approved .

• Recycled content: Not applicable.• Face size (length x width): 1200 x 450 mm.• Thickness (nominal): 95mm.• Thermal conductivity: 0.020 W/(m.K).• Reaction to fire class: Class 1 to BS476-7: 1997.• Additional requirements: None.• Placement: Secure against face of inner leaf.

- Residual cavity: Clear and unobstructed.• Joints between boards, at closures and penetrations: No gaps and free from mortar and

debris.

160A RYTONS PERISCOPE® UNDERFLOOR VENTILATOR

• Manufacturer: Rytons Building Products Ltd.- Web: www.vents.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Rytons Periscope Underfloor Ventilator Ref: PUFV

• Accessories: Rytons Vertical Extension Ref: PUFVVEXT.

160B AIR BRICKS IN CROSS WALLING• Standard: To BS 493, class 1.• Manufacturer: Rytons Building Products Ltd

- Web: www.vents.co.uk- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Rytons Multifix Air Brick.

• Apertures: Rectangular hole.• Work sizes: 215 x 65 mm.• Material/ Colour: tbc.• Placement: Built in with no gaps at joints.

160C AIR BRICKS IN EXTERNAL WALLING

• Standard: To BS 493, class 1.

• Manufacturer: Hanson Redbank.- Product reference: square hole clay air bricks.

• Apertures: Rectangular hole.

• Work sizes: 215 x 65 mm.

• Material/ Colour: red / buff.

• Placement: Built in with no gaps at joints.

180A CAVITY CLOSERS AROUND OPENINGS IN EXTERNAL CAVITY WALLS• Manufacturer: As clause 180B.

- Cavity width: 75 / 120mm.• Thermal conductivity: 0.022 W/m.K.• Fire performance: 60 minutes.• Testing method: UKAS Accredited fire resistance test utilising the general principles of BS

476 Part 20: 1987 (Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method for determination of the fire resistance of elements of construction (general principles) .



180B CAVITY CLOSERS• Manufacturer: Kingspan Insulation Ltd.

- Web: www.kingspaninsulation.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Kingspan Kooltherm Cavity Closer 125 .

• Accessories: Jointing Clip and Fixing Tie.

REINFORCING/ FIXING ACCESSORIES

210A CAVITY WALL TIES FOR UNINSULATED CAVITY WALLS WITH BLOCKWORK INNERLEAF

• Standard: PD 6697: 2010.- Type: 1 (Masonry heavy duty) .

• Material/ finish: Stainless steel .

• Manufacturer: As clause 210B .

210B CAVITY WALL TIES

• Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.- Web: www.ancon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: ST1 Wall tie

• Length: 250 mm.• Material: Stainless steel grade 1.4301 (304) .

211A CAVITY WALL TIES USED WITH PARTIAL FILL INSULATION FOR ALL CAVITY WALLSUSING PARTIAL FILL INSULATION

• Standard: PD 6697: 2010.- Type: 1 (Masonry heavy duty) .

• Material/ finish: Stainless steel.

• Manufacturer: As clause 211B.

• Tie mounted insulation retaining clips: As recommended by the manufacturer.

211B CAVITY WALL TIES USED WITH PARTIAL FILL INSULATION

• Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.- Web: www.ancon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: ST1 Wall tie


220A WALL TIES• Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.

- Web: www.ancon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: SDV Frame Cramp Tie.

• Length: as indicated on drawings.• Accessories: Ancon ISO-TW Washer and Ancon Gauge Tape.

220B WALL TIES

• Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.- Web: www.ancon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: PPV Frame Cramp Tie with debonding sleeve.

• Length: as indicated on drawings.

• Accessories: Ancon ISO-TW Washer and Ancon Gauge Tape.



220C WALL TIE - FLAT BAR• Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.

- Web: www.ancon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: PPS Flat Bar Wall Tie with debonding sleeve .


225 FIXING TIES IN MASONRY CAVITY WALLS• Embedment in mortar beds (minimum): 50 mm.

• Placement: Sloping slightly downwards towards outer leaf, without bending. Drip centred inthe cavity and pointing downwards.

• Spacing: Staggered in alternate courses.- Horizontal centres: 600 mm .- Vertical centres: 450 mm .

• Additional ties: Provide within 225 mm of reveals of unbonded openings.- Spacing: At not more than 300 mm centres vertically .

233 FIXING TIES IN MASONRY CAVITY WALLS WITH PARTIAL FILL CAVITY INSULATION• Embedment in mortar beds (minimum): 50 mm.• Placement: Sloping slightly downwards towards outer leaf, without bending. Drip centred in

the cavity and pointing downwards.• Spacing: Evenly space in non staggered horizontal and vertical rows.

- Horizontal centres: 600 mm.- Vertical centres: 450 mm.

• Spacing centres of top (eaves) row of ties: Not more than 450 mm.• Provision of additional ties: Within 225 mm of reveals of unbonded openings.

- Spacing: At not more than 300 mm centres vertically.

241A WALL STARTERS/ CONNECTORS

• Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.- Web: www.ancon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Staifix Universal Wall Starter System.

• Material:- Universal Wall Starter: Stainless steel grade 1.4301.- QuickStart Wall Starter: Not applicable.

250A SLIDING ANCHOR RESTRAINT SLIP TIES• Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.

- Web: www.ancon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: SAH Sliding Anchors

• Stem: SAH-UO.- Offset: 35 mm.- Length: 450mm.

• Wall ties: SPI.• Length: 150 mm.• Slot position: Not required.



251A WALL HEAD RESTRAINT SLIP TIES• Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.

- Web: www.ancon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: IHR-V Head Restraint.

• Length: Standard.• Material: Stainless steel grade 1.4401 (316) .

251B WALL HEAD RESTRAINT SLIP TIES• Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.

- Web: www.ancon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: FHR Head Restraint.

• Length: to suit 140mm blockwork.

• Material: Stainless steel grade 1.4401 (316) .

270 MESHWORK JOINT REINFORCEMENT WHERE REQUIRED

• Standard: Not applicable.

• Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.- Web: www.ancon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Meshwork Joint Reinforcement.

• Type: Welded wire ladder type.• Material: Stainless steel grade 1.4401 (316) .• Width: Approximately 40-50 mm less in width than wall or leaf.• Placement: Lay on an even bed of mortar in a continuous strip with full laps at angles.

Keep back 20 mm from face of external work, 12 mm back from face of internal work andfinish joint to normal thickness.- Lap length (minimum): in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

281A LATERAL RESTRAINT PROPRIETARY SLIP TIES FOR MOVEMENT JOINTS

• Manufacturer: Ancon Building Products.- Web: www.ancon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Lateral Restraint Slip Ties

• Type: Ancon PPS wall tie with debonding sleeve .

• Length: 200mm.

• Material: Stainless steel grade 1.4401 (316) .

FLEXIBLE DAMP PROOF COURSES/ CAVITY TRAYS

330A DAMP PROOF COURSE• Manufacturer: Visqueen Building Products.

- Web: www.visqueenbuilding.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Zedex CPT High Performance DPC

• Width: 100 or 140mm to suit internal/external leaf .• Accessories: Detailing Strip and DPC Jointing Tape.

345A SITE FORMED FLEXIBLE SHEET CAVITY TRAYS

• Manufacturer: Visqueen Building Products.- Web: www.visqueenbuilding.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Zedex CPT High Performance DPC

• Width: refer to architect's drawings.

• Accessories: Detailing Strip and DPC Jointing Tape.



385 PREFORMED DPC/ CAVITY TRAY JUNCTION CLOAKS/ STOP ENDS• Manufacturer: Visqueen Building Products.

- Web: www.visqueenbuilding.co.uk.- Email: [email protected]. .- Product references and locations: Zedex CPT High Performance DPC.

• Placement: Seal laps with dpcs and/ or cavity trays.

390 SITE FORMED DPC/ CAVITY TRAY JUNCTIONS/ STOP ENDS• Three dimensional changes in shape: Form to provide a free draining and watertight

installation. Seal laps.

• Alternative use of preformed junction cloaks/ stop ends: Submit proposals.

INSTALLATION OF DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS

415 HORIZONTAL DPCS

• Placement: In continuous lengths on full even bed of fresh mortar, with 100 mm laps atjoints and full laps at angles.

• Width: At least full width of leaf unless otherwise specified. Edges of dpc not covered withmortar or projecting into cavity.

• Overlying construction: Immediately cover with full even bed of mortar to receive nextmasonry course.

• Overall finished joint thickness: As close to normal as practicable.

425 GROUND LEVEL DPCS• Joint with damp proof membrane: Continuous and effectively sealed.

435 STEPPED DPCS IN EXTERNAL WALLS

• External walls on sloping ground: Install dpcs not less than 150 mm above adjoiningfinished ground level.

445 SILL DPCS• Form and placement: In one piece and turned up at back when sill is in contact with inner

leaf.

455 COPING/ CAPPING DPCS• Placement: Bed in one operation to ensure maximum bond between masonry units, mortar

and dpc.• Dpcs crossing cavity: Provide rigid support to prevent sagging.

465 SEALING DPCS GENERALLY

• Overlaps and junctions: Seal with Adhesive recommended by dpc manufacturer .

475 SITE FORMED CAVITY TRAYS• Requirements to prevent downward ingress of water:

- Profiles: To match those shown on drawings. Firmly secured.- Joint treatment: Use unjointed wherever possible, otherwise lap at least 100 mm andseal to produce a free draining and watertight installation.

- Horizontal cavity trays: Support using cavity closer.- Sloping cavity trays: Prevent sagging.- Cleanliness: Free from debris and mortar droppings.

485 CAVITY TRAYS OVER OPENINGS AND OTHER CAVITY BRIDGINGS

• Length: To extend not less than 150 mm beyond ends of lintels/ bridgings.



525 DPC/ CAVITY TRAY LEADING EDGE IN FACEWORK - SET BACK• Treatment at face of masonry: Set back 5 mm from face of wall with recessed mortar joint

to expose edge at the following locations: At window and door heads .

535 DPC/ CAVITY TRAY LEADING EDGE IN FACEWORK - PROJECTING• Treatment at face of masonry: Projecting 5 mm from face of wall at the following locations: A

t ground level .

560 VERTICAL DPCS GENERALLY

• Form: In one piece wherever possible.- Joints: Upper part overlapping lower not less than 100 mm.

570 JAMB DPCS AT OPENINGS• Joint with cavity tray/ lintel at head: Full underlap.• Joint with sill/ horizontal dpc at base: Full overlap.• Projection into cavity: Not less than 25 mm.• Relationship with frame: In full contact.

JOINTS

610A MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH SEALANT TO EXTERNAL FACING BRICKWORK• Joint preparation and sealant application: As section Z22.

• Filler: Closed cell polyethylene foam .- Thickness: To match design width of joint.- Manufacturer: As Clause 610 B.- Placement: Build in as work proceeds with no projections into cavities and to correctdepth to receive sealant system.

• Sealant: As clause 610C.

610B JOINT FILLER

• Manufacturer: Fosroc Ltd.- Web: www.fosroc.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Expandafoam

610C SEALANT• Manufacturer: contractor choice

sealent to external walls to be anti-pick. Contractor to submit amples for testing prior toinstallation.Colour: to approval.

• Accessories: Expandafoam polyethylene cord backing.

630 UNEXPOSED CONTRACTION JOINTS

• Formation: Close butt as work proceeds.

650 POINTING IN FLASHINGS• Joint preparation: Free of debris and lightly wetted.• Pointing mortar: As for adjacent walling.• Placement: Fill joint and finish flush.



PROPRIETARY SILLS/ LINTELS/ COPINGS/ DRESSINGS

745 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE LINTELS• Standard: To BS EN 845-2.• Manufacturer: Naylor Concrete Products Ltd.

- Tel: +44 (0)1924 267286- Fax: +44 (0)1924 265674- Email: [email protected] Web: www.naylor.co.uk.- Product reference: Hi-Spec Range.

• Types: Single.• Sizes: As schedule.• Additional requirements: none.• Placement: Bed on mortar used for adjacent work. Prop at not more than 1.2 m centres to

prevent displacement during construction. Retain props in position for not less than 14days or until mortar has matured, whichever is longer.- Bearing length (minimum): 150 mm.

755A PREFABRICATED STEEL LINTELS USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH BLOCKWORK INNER LEAF

• Standard: To BS EN 845-2.

• Manufacturer: Birtley Building Products Ltd or equal approved .- Product reference: CB 110/130 or HS 110/130 depending on span. Refer to schedule .

• Types: Combined.

• Material/ finish: Zinc coated steel to BS EN ISO 1461 with minimum coating mass of 460g/m?, coating minimum thickness of 65 micrometres.

• Sizes: As schedule.• Additional requirements: Fully insulated using CFC, HCFC and HFA freeexpanded

polystyrene insulation .• Placement: Bed on mortar used for adjacent work.

- Bearing length (minimum): 150 mm.

755B PREFABRICATED STEEL LINTELS USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONCRETELINTEL TO FORM SCOTTISH REVEAL

• Standard: To BS EN 845-2.• Manufacturer: Birtley Building Products Ltd or equal approved .

- Product reference: LA or EV 100 depending on span. Refer to schedule .

• Types: Combined.

• Material/ finish: Zinc coated steel to BS EN ISO 1461 with minimum coating mass of 460g/m?, coating minimum thickness of 65 micrometres.

• Sizes: As schedule.

• Additional requirements: Fully insulated using CFC, HCFC and HFA freeexpandedpolystyrene insulation .

• Placement: Bed on mortar used for adjacent work.- Bearing length (minimum): 150 mm.

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

840 OPENINGS FOR FRAMES• Formation: Use accurate, rigid templates to required size.

850 WALL PLATES• Placement: On full bed of mortar to correct horizontal level.



F31

Precast concrete sills/ lintels/ copings/ features

F31 Precast concrete sills/ lintels/ copings/ features





TYPES OF COMPONENT

112A DESIGNATED CONCRETE PRECAST PRESTRESSED LINTELS• Manufacturer: As clause 112A.• Other requirements: None .

112B PRESTRESSED CONCRETE LINTELS• Standard: To BS EN 845-2.

Manufacturer: Naylor Concrete Products Ltd.or equal approved to be confirmed bystructiural engineer - Tel: +44 (0)1924 267286- Fax: +44 (0)1924 265674- Email: [email protected] Web: www.naylor.co.uk.- Product reference: Hi-Spec Range.

• Additional requirements: none.

• Placement: Bed on mortar used for adjacent work. Prop at not more than 1.2 m centres toprevent displacement during construction. Retain props in position for not less than 14days or until mortar has matured, whichever is longer.- Bearing length (minimum): 150 mm.

125 SUBSTITUTION OF PROPRIETARY CONCRETE FOR DESIGNATED CONCRETE• Concrete: Component manufacturer's 'proprietary' concrete.• Substitution: Submit proposals for each substitution, including:

- Identity of concrete: Manufacturer's mix reference .- Performance: Limiting values for w/c ratio, cement/ combination content or, alternativelythe Exposure class to BS 8500, to which concrete conforms.

- Reinforcement: Type and cover.- Evidence of performance: Third party certification by bodyfrom a UKAS accredited laboratory.

130 CONCEALED PRECAST LINTELS

• Standard: To BS EN 845-2.- Verification of performance: Submit calculations or test certificates.



140 CONCEALED PRECAST LINTELS• Concrete: Designated to BS 8500-2: Minimum RC30.

- Aggregate size (maximum): 20 mm.• Configuration:

- Clear span up to 900 mm:Section: 140 mm deep x width of wall.Bearing: 150 mm at both ends.Reinforcement: One 12 mm carbon steel bar for each 105 mm of wall thickness.

- Clear span 900 mm to 1800 mm:Section: 215 mm deep x width of wall.Bearing: 225 mm at both ends.Reinforcement: One 16 mm carbon steel bar for each 105 mm of wall thickness.

• Cover to reinforcement (nominal): 20 mm minimum.

150 CONCEALED PRECAST PADSTONES .

• Concrete: Designated to BS 8500-2: Minimum RC30.- Aggregate size (maximum): 20 mm.

• Other requirements: none .

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

210 MOULDS• Permissible fabrication and operating tolerances: Length 0 to +6 mm, other dimensions ?3

mm.

220 CONCRETE GENERALLY• Specification: To BS 8500-2 and BS EN 206-1.• Producer: Currently certified by a body accredited by UKAS to BS EN 45011 for product

conformity certification of ready-mixed concrete.

• Chloride class of concrete:- Excluding SRPC: C1 0.40.- Using SRPC: C1 0.20.- Reinforced and heat cured: C1 0.10.- Prestressed: C1 0.10.

• Admixtures containing calcium chloride: Not allowed.

250 REINFORCEMENT

• Carbon steel reinforcement: As appropriate to BS 4449, BS 4482 and BS 4483.- Cutting and bending: To BS 8666.

• Galvanized reinforcement: Galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 after cutting. Chromate treated.• Stainless steel reinforcement: To BS 6744.

- Designation 1.4301.- Cutting and bending: To BS 8666.

• Non structural reinforcement: Include to resist shrinkage and handling stresses.• Bimetallic corrosion and staining: Prevent by appropriate selection and use of materials.• Condition at time of placement: Clean, free of corrosive pitting, loose materials and

substances that adversely affect reinforcement, concrete, or bond between the two.• Fixing: Accurate and secure.

- Method: Wire tying, approved steel clips or tack welding if permitted.- Concrete cover: Maintain free of all tying wire or clips.

255 QUALITY ASSURANCE OF REINFORCEMENTReinforcement to BS 4449, BS 4483, BS 6744: Obtain validcertificates of approval for product conformity issued by theUK Certification Authority for Reinforcing Steels.



260 CASTING AND CURING• Placing of concrete: Thoroughly compact.• Protection against drying out: Methods and duration to

BS EN 13369 clause 4.2.1.3.• Immature components: Avoid movement, vibration, overloading, physical shock, rapid

cooling and thermal shock.• Delivery to site: Minimum 14 days after casting.

261 CUTTING• Cutting of precast concrete components: Not permitted.

262 RECORDS

• Records for each type of component: Maintain details including:- Unique identification number.- Identification of the producer.- Identification of the place of production.- Correlation with records of mixes, including batch numbers.- Date of each stage of manufacture.- Dates and results of all tests, checks and inspections.- Dimensions related to specified levels of accuracy.- Specific location in the finished work.- Weight of the unit.- Damage and making good.- Any other pertinent data, e.g. if unit is a production control unit.

• Availability of records for inspection: On request.

INSTALLATION

420 LAYING

• Mortar for bedding and jointing: As section Z21.- Type: Site batched and mixed.- Mix: 1:1:6 cement: lime:sand.- Packing: If required use slate.

• Bedding components: On full bed of mortar.

• Removal of marks, stains and extraneous mortar on visible faces: Rubbing not permitted.

440 ONE PIECE SILLS/ THRESHOLDS

• Bed joints: Leave clear of mortar except at end bearings and beneath masonry mullions.- On completion: Point with mortar to match adjacent work.



G20

Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing

G20 Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing


GENERAL

105 TIMBER PROCUREMENT

• Timber (including timber for wood based products): Obtained from well managed forests/plantations in accordance with:- The laws governing forest management in the producer country or countries.- International agreements such as the Convention on International Trade in EndangeredSpecies of wild fauna and flora (CITES).

• Documentation: Provide either:- Documentary evidence (which has been or can be independently verified) regarding theprovenance of all timber supplied, or

- Evidence that suppliers have adopted and are implementing a formal environmentalpurchasing policy for timber and wood based products.

115 CONTRACTOR'S STRUCTURAL DESIGN• Design responsibility: Design and detail trussed rafters to main roof.• Requirement:

- Generally: As section B50/B51.Modifications: see structural engineers specification.

- Design: Complete the design in accordance with the designated code of practice tosatisfy specified performance criteria.

- Service class: 1.- Additional requirements: None.

• Design and production information:- Drawings: Showing service void and route required, roof covering - see sections and roof layouts.

- Other requirements: in accordance with structural engineers design load criteria .

• Timing of submissions: submit full drawings for comment prior to manufacture.

150 STRENGTH GRADING OF TIMBER

• Grader: A company currently registered under a third party quality assurance schemeoperated by a certification body approved by the UK Timber Grading Committee.

160 GRADING AND MARKING OF SOFTWOOD• Timber of a target/ finished thickness less than 100 mm and not specified for wet exposure:

Graded at an average moisture content not exceeding 20% with no reading being inexcess of 24% and clearly marked as 'DRY' or 'KD' (kiln dried).

• Timber graded undried (green) and specified for installation at higher moisture contents:Clearly marked as 'WET' or 'GRN'.

• Structural timber members cut from large graded sections: Regraded to approval andmarked accordingly.

Page 34 of 266 G20 Project Fitzroy


PRODUCTS

210 STRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD (GRADED DIRECT TO STRENGTH CLASS) FORSTRUCTURAL USE GENERALLY

• Grading standard: To BS 4978, BS EN 14081-1, or other national equivalent and somarked.

• Strength class to BS EN 338: SEE STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION.• Treatment:

- Preservative treatment: Organic solvent impregnation to NBS section Z12 and WoodProtection Association Commodity Specification C8 .Design service life: 40 years.

- Fire retardant treatment: Fire retardant impregnation to NBS section Z12 and WoodProtection Association Commodity Specification FR5, Type D for external cladding tocafeI.

270 UNGRADED SOFTWOOD FOR INTERNAL NON-STRUCTURAL USE

• Quality of timber: Free from decay, insect attack (except pinhole borers) and with no knotswider than half the width of the section.

• Surface finish: Regularized.

• Treatment:- Preservative treatment: Organic solvent impregnation to NBS section Z12 and WoodProtection Association Commodity Specification C8 where specified .

- Design service life: 40 years.- Fire retardant treatment: None required.

275 WOOD TRIM FOR EAVES FASCIA• Species: Contractor's choice.• Standard: To BS 1186-3.

- Class: 2.• Treatment: Organic solvent impregnation to NBS section Z12 and Wood protection

Association Commodity Specification C5 .- Design service life: 40 years.

• Fixing: as details.• Other requirements: Undercut bottom edge of boards to form drip.

311 NON-STRUCTURAL PLYWOOD cladding to cafe

• Standard: To an approved national standard.

• Thickness: 18mm.

• Appearance class to BS EN 635: I.

• Bond quality to BS EN 314-2: Class 3.

• Finish: Sanded.

• Treatment:- Preservative treatment: Organic solvent impregnation to NBS section Z12 and WoodProtection Association Commodity Specification C8 .Design service life: 40 years.

- Fire retardant treatment: Fire retardant impregnation to NBS section Z12 and WoodProtection Association Commodity Specification FR5 for external use .

350 TRUSSED RAFTERS• Design and fabrication: To BS 5268-3 and BS EN 14250.• Manufacturer: A firm currently registered under a third party quality assurance scheme.• Truss system: Agrement certified.• Ancillary components to be supplied by the truss fabricator: all items to complete roof

system.• Treatment: Organic solvent type as section Z12 and BWPDA Commodity Specification C8 .



WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

401 CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF STRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD AND HARDWOOD• Dimensions: Dimensions in this specification and shown on drawings are target sizes as

defined in BS EN 336.• Tolerances: The tolerance indicators (T1) and (T2) specify the maximum permitted

deviations from target sizes as stated in BS EN 336, clause 4.3:- Tolerance class 1 (T1) for sawn surfaces.- Tolerance class 2 (T2) for further processed surfaces.

420 WARPING OF TIMBER

• Bow, spring, twist and cup: Not greater than the limits set down in BS 4978 or BS EN14081-1 for softwood, or BS 5756 for hardwood.

430 SELECTION AND USE OF TIMBER

• Timber members damaged, crushed or split beyond the limits permitted by their grading:Do not use.

435 NOTCHES, HOLES AND JOINTS IN TIMBER• Notches and holes: Position in relation to knots or other defects such that the strength of

members will not be reduced.• Scarf joints, finger joints and splice plates: Do not use without approval.

440 PROCESSING TREATED TIMBER

• Cutting and machining: Carry out as much as possible before treatment.

• Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways, thicknessed, planed,ploughed, etc.

• Surfaces exposed by minor cutting/ drilling: Treat with two flood coats of a solutionrecommended by main treatment solution manufacturer.

450 MOISTURE CONTENT• Moisture content of wood and wood based products at time of installation: Not more than:

- Covered in generally unheated spaces: 24%.- Covered in generally heated spaces: 20%.- Internal in continuously heated spaces: 20%.

451 MOISTURE CONTENT TESTING• Procedure: When instructed, test timber sections with an approved electrical moisture

meter.• Test sample: Test 5% but not less than 10 lengths of each cross-section in the centre of

the length.

• Test results: 90% of values obtained to be within the specified range. Provide records of alltests.

460 PROTOTYPES

• Components: Prepare one of each of the following and arrange for inspection beforestarting repetitive fabrication:cafe cladding panels.



510 PROTECTION• Generally: Keep timber dry and do not overstress, distort or disfigure sections or

components during transit, storage, lifting, erection or fixing.• Timber and components: Store under cover, clear of the ground and with good ventilation.

Support on regularly spaced, level bearers on a dry, firm base. Open pile to ensure freemovement of air through the stack.

• Trussed rafters: Keep vertical during handling and storage.

520 EXPOSED END GRAIN• Components: Seal exposed end grain of the following before delivery to site:

all exposed.

• Sealer: Clear end grain sealer.

550 EXPOSED TIMBER

• Planed structural timber exposed to view in completed work: Prevent damage to andmarking of surfaces and arrises.

JOINTING TIMBER

570 JOINTING/FIXING GENERALLY• Generally: Where not specified precisely, select methods of jointing and fixing and types,

sizes and spacings of fasteners in compliance with section Z20.

580A FRAMING ANCHORS

• Manufacturer: contractor choice.

• Material/ finish: Galvanized low carbon steel or as recommended by truss manufacturer .

• Fasteners: Galvanized or sherardized square twist nails.- Size: Not less than size recommended by anchor manufacturer.

• Fixing: Secure using not less than the number of nails recommended by anchor manufacturer.

630 BOLTED JOINTS• Bolt spacings (minimum): To BS 5268-2, table 81.• Holes for bolts: Located accurately and drilled to diameters as close as practical to the

nominal bolt diameter and not more than 2 mm larger.• Washers: Placed under bolt heads and nuts that would otherwise bear directly on timber.

Use spring washers in locations which will be hidden or inaccessible in the completedbuilding.

• Bolt tightening: So that washers just bite the surface of the timber. Ensure that at least onecomplete thread protrudes from the nut.- Checking: At agreed regular intervals up to Completion. Tighten as necessary.

650A GLUED JOINTSCompatibility: Where relevant, obtain manufacturer's confirmation that adhesive iscompatible with preservative/ fire retardant treatment.

• Glued structural components: Fabricated to BS 6446 in clean, controlled workshopconditions.

670 ANTI-CORROSION FINISHES FOR FASTENERS

• Galvanizing: To BS 7371-6, with internal threads tapped and lightly oiled followingtreatment.

• Sherardizing: To BS 7371-8, Class 1.• Zinc plating: To BS EN ISO 4042 and passivated.



ERECTION AND INSTALLATION

710 PROPOSALS FOR ERECTING STRUCTURAL TIMBER• Proposals: Submit details of:

- Method and sequence of erection.- Type of craneage.- Temporary guys and bracing proposed for use during erection.

• Latest date for submission: 10 days before erection commences.

740 PRE-ERECTION CHECKING

• Timing: Not less than 10 days before proposed erection start date.

• Checklist:- Foundations and other structures to which timber structure will be attached: Check for accuracy of setting out.

- Holding down bolts: Check for position, protruding length, condition and slackness.

• Inaccuracies and defects: Report without delay.

• Erection: Obtain permission to commence.

750 MODIFICATIONS/REPAIRS• Defects due to detailing or fabrication errors: Report without delay.• Methods of rectification: Obtain approval of proposals before starting modification or

remedial work.• Defective/damaged components: Timber members/ components may be rejected if the

nature and/or number of defects would result in an excessive amount of site repair.

760 TEMPORARY BRACING• Provision: As necessary to maintain structural timber components in position and to ensure

complete stability during construction.

770 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS

• Provision: Position and fix additional studs, noggings and/ or battens to support edges of sheets materials, and wall/ floor/ ceiling mounted appliances, fixtures, etc. shown ondrawings

• Material properties: Additional studs, noggings and battens to be of adequate size andhave the same treatment, if any, as adjacent timber supports.

775 BEARINGS• Timber surfaces which are to transmit loads: Finished to ensure close contact over the

whole of the designed bearing area. • Packings: Where provided, to cover the whole of the designed bearing area.

- Crushing strength: Not less than timber being supported.- In external or inaccessible locations: Rot and corrosion proof.

780 WALL PLATES

• Position and alignment: To give the correct span and level for trusses, joists, etc.

• Bedding: Fully in fresh mortar.

• Joints: At corners and elsewhere where joints are unavoidable use nailed half lap joints. Donot use short lengths of timber.

784 JOISTS GENERALLY• Centres: Equal, and not exceeding designed spacing.• Bowed joists: Installed with positive camber.• End joists: Positioned approximately 50 mm from masonry walls.



786 JOISTS ON HANGERS• Hangers: Bedded directly on and hard against supporting construction. Do not use packs

or bed on mortar.• Joists: Cut to leave not more than 6 mm gap between ends of joists and back of hanger.

Rebated to lie flush with underside of hangers.• Fixing to hangers: A nail in every hole.

790 STANDARD JOIST HANGERS -.• Standard: To BS EN 845-1.• Size and type: To suit joist, design load and crushing strength of supporting construction.

• Material/ finish: Galvanized low carbon steel .

795 TRIMMING OPENINGS

• Trimmers and trimming joists: When not specified otherwise, not less than 25 mm wider than general joists.

800A TRUSSED RAFTER INSTALLATION• Erection: To BS 5268-3, clause 9.3 and TRA site installation guide.• Trusses generally: Do not modify without approval.• Damaged trusses: Do not use.• For fixing details to concrete slab and steel structure see structural engineers details

810A PERMANENT BRACING OF TRUSSED RAFTERS

• Bracing and binders: to specialists deisgn- Method of fixing: To every rafter, strut or tie with not less than two fasteners.Fasteners: 75 x 3.35 mm galvanized round wire nails.

• Lap joints: Extended over and nailed to at least two truss members.

820A VERTICAL RESTRAINT STRAPS to roofs

• - To timber members with not less than 30 x 3.5 mm galvanized square twist .- To masonry with not less than five 50 mm x 12 gauge sherardized screws evenlyspaced, with at least one screw located within 150 mm of the bottom end of each strap.All in accordance with structural engineers design

830A LATERAL RESTRAINT STRAPS to roofs• Manufacturer: contractor choice.

Material/ finish: Galvanized steel.• Size: to structural engineers design.• Fixing: To top of joists/ rafters/ ties at not more than 1.2 m centres and as shown on

drawings.- Ensure that cranked end is in tight contact with cavity face of wall inner leaf and is notpointing upwards.

• Straps spanning joists/ rafter/ ties running parallel to wall: Fix noggings and packs tightlybeneath straps.- Size of noggings and packs: Not less than three quarters of joist/ rafter/ tie depth and notless than 38 mm thick.

- Notching: Notch joists so that straps fit flush with surface. Do not notch rafters/ ties.

• Fasteners: to engineers design.

850 INSPECTION GENERALLY• Structural timber-work: Give reasonable notice before covering up.

860 BOLTED JOINTS INSPECTION• Timing: Inspect all accessible bolts at the end of the Defects Liability Period and tighten if

necessary.



870A ANCHOR TESTING• Standard: To BS 5080-1 and -2.

as required in structural engineers specification• Test reports: Submit as soon as available.



H11

Curtain walling

H11 Curtain walling


TENDERING

10A INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH TENDER

• Submit the following curtain walling particulars:- Typical plan, section and elevation drawings at suitable scales.- Typical detailed drawings at large scales, including typical head and sill sections .- Technical information and certification demonstrating compliance with specification of proposed incorporated products and finishes, including insulating glass units, automaticopening vents .

- Certification, reports and calculations demonstrating compliance with specification of proposed curtain walling.

- Proposals for connections to and support from the building structure and buildingcomponents.

- Proposals for amendments to primary supporting structure and for secondary supportingstructure additional to that shown on preliminary design drawings.

- Schedule of builder's work, special provisions and special attendance by others.- Examples of standard documentation from which project quality plan will be prepared.- Preliminary fabrication and installation method statements and programme.- Schedule of products and finishes with a design life expectancy less than that specifiedin clause 440, with proposals for frequencies and methods of replacement.

- Proposals for replacing damaged or failed products.- Areas of non-compliance with the specification.- PROPOSALS FOR COMPONENT TESTING IN ACCORDANCE WITH CLAUSE 550B




TYPES OF CURTAIN WALLING

110A CURTAIN WALLING TO CORRIDORS

• Supporting structure: Steel frame .• Curtain walling system:

- Manufacturer: As clause 110B .• Glazing system: Gaskets, cover plate fixed .• Panel/ facing type: secure glazing and pasivent panels .

Accessories: None .• Incorporated components:

Double access doors- Glazed-in ventilation louvres as clause 140A .

• Other requirements: To include all products, fixings and interfaces necessary to completethe fabrication and installation. Performance criteria to comply with Design/PerformanceRequirements and Testing subsections INC 550b .

Page 42 of 266 H11 Project Fitzroy


110B CURTAIN WALLING SYSTEM• Manufacturer: contractor choice

- Product reference: MX62 SYSTEM OR EQUAL APPROVED.• Internal framing member:

- Material: Aluminium Alloy 6063T6 to BS1474. Steel core to mullions dependant ontesting criteria - see below.

- Finish: Stoved polyester powder coated, Colour Ref: To be confirmed.Minimum film thickness: 60 micrometres.

• External cover cap:- Material: Aluminium Alloy 6063T6 to BS1474 .- Finish: Stoved polyester powder coated, Colour Ref: To be confirmed.Minimum film thickness: 60 micrometres.

• Glazing: Double glazed sealed units comprising: Proprietory secure galazing system toboth sides - 14.5mm ESG secure P7BT glass, supplied by ESG secure or equal approvedspecialist.ESG Ltd1-3 Moss RoadWitham, EssexCM8 3UQTel: 01376 520061Email: [email protected] .

• Glazing system: Gaskets, cover plate fixed. Note due to secure environment, cappings tobe screw fixed at 150mm centres and internal gaskets cut to short lengths.Other requirements: To be installed using screws and fixings manufactured from stainlesssteel or other corrosion resistant materials;Fixings to be resin anchored into masonry or bolted to steelwork at 150mm centres.The curtain walling configuration will be capable of withstanding attack as detailed in DoHEnvironmental design guide for adult secure servcies test levels 1,2 & 3, SE CLAUSE550B .

135 DOORS• Manufacturer: contractor choice .

- Product reference: CD commercial door .• Material: Aluminium Alloy 6063T6 to BS1474 .• Finish: Polyester powder coating .

- Colour/ texture: to be confirmed .- Minimum film thickness: 60 micrometres .

• Fixing: Contractor to submit proposals .• Other requirements: Performance criteria as clause 436. Ironmongery anti-ligature, .

137 OPENING LIGHTS (WINDOWS)

• Manufacturer: contractor choice.- Product reference: FXi 65 Aluminium casement windows.

• Material: Aluminium Alloy 6063T6 to BS1474 .

• Finish: Polyester powder coating.- Colour/ texture: to be confirmed.- Minimum film thickness: 60 micometers.

• Size: Refer to schedule.

• Other requirements: Performance criteria as clause 435.



140A PASSIVENT LOUVRES• Manufacturer: Passivent system to specialist design. Units to comprise louvre externally ,

internal thermally broken baffle system and bespoke flat perforated plate internally, plate toanti-ligature design to client approval. .

• Material: aluminium .• Finish: Powder coating .

- Colour/ texture: tbc .Fixing: glazed into curtan walling .

• Other requirements: see architects design intent documentand ventilation strategyprovided by M&E designer. Passivent to be provided with interface unit for automatedaction. .

150 MATERIALS SPECIFICATION

• Minimum 'BRE Green Guide to Specification Online' rating: B.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK

210 DESIGN

• Curtain walling and associated features: Complete the detailed design. Submit beforecommencement of fabrication.

• Related works: Coordinate in the detailed design.

220 SPECIFICATION• Compliance standard: The Centre for Window and Cladding Technology (CWCT)

'Standard for systemised building envelopes'.• Reference information: For the duration of the contract, keep available at the design office,

workshop and on site copies of: - The CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes'.- Publications invoked by the CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes'.

230 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN STAGE

• Submit the following curtain walling particulars:- A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from the curtain walling to the structure.- Proposed fixing anchor details relevant to structural design and construction.- A detailed testing programme in compliance with the Main Contract master programme.- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with the Main Contractmaster programme.

- Proposals to support outstanding applications for Building Regulation consents or relaxations.



232 QUALITY PLAN• Requirement: Submit during detailed design.• Content: In accordance with BS 5750, BS EN ISO 9001 and including the following:

- Name of the quality manager.- Quality assessment procedures.- Inspection procedures to be adopted in checking the work.- Stages at which check lists will be used and samples of the lists.- List of work procedures on the correct use of materials or components, both off site andon site.

- List of product information with latest revisions.- Subcontractors involved in the work.- Subcontractors' quality plans.- Storage, handling, transport and protection procedures.- Procedure for registering and reporting non compliances.- Maintenance procedures and calibration records.- Certification that completed work complies with specification.- Check list register to ensure all items have been inspected and non compliancesdischarged.

232A QUALITY PLAN

• Requirement: Submit during detailed design.

• Content: In accordance with BS 5750, BS EN ISO 9001 and including the following:- Name of the quality manager.- Quality assessment procedures.- Inspection procedures to be adopted in checking the work.- Stages at which check lists will be used and samples of the lists.- List of work procedures on the correct use of materials or components, both off site andon site.

- List of product information with latest revisions.- Subcontractors involved in the work.- Subcontractors' quality plans.- Storage, handling, transport and protection procedures.- Procedure for registering and reporting non compliances.- Maintenance procedures and calibration records.- Certification that completed work complies with specification.- Check list register to ensure all items have been inspected and non compliancesdischarged.

- details of testing proposals

235 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT TESTING ORFABRICATION OF CURTAIN WALLING

• Submit the following curtain walling particulars:- Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation.- Detailed calculations to prove compliance with design/ performance requirements.- Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.- Certification for incorporated components manufactured by others confirming their suitability for proposed locations in the curtain walling.

- Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.

• Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of products.



235A INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT TESTING ORFABRICATION OF CURTAIN WALLING

• Submit the following curtain walling particulars:- Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation.- Detailed calculations to prove compliance with design/ performance requirements.- Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.- Certification for incorporated components manufactured by others confirming their suitability for proposed locations in the curtain walling.

- Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.• Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of products.

250 PRODUCT SAMPLES

• General: Before commencing detailed design, submit labelled samples of: Mullion/transomcruciform connection of correct RAL colour and finish .

260 SAMPLES OF FIXINGS

• General: During detailed design, submit labelled samples of each type of fixing anchor,including casting-in restraints and shims, together with manufacturers' recommendedtorque figures.

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

305 CWCT 'STANDARD FOR SYSTEMISED BUILDING ENVELOPES'• General: Unless specified or agreed otherwise comply with:

Part 2 - Loads, fixings and movement.Part 3 - Air, water and wind resistance.Part 4 - Operable components, additional elements and means of access.Part 5 - Thermal, moisture and acoustic performance.Part 6 - Fire performancePart 7 - Robustness, durability, tolerances and workmanship.

• Project performance requirements specified in this subsection: Read in conjunction withCWCT performance criteria.

313 INTEGRITY

• Requirement: The curtain walling must resist wind loads, dead loads and design live loads,and accommodate deflections and movements without damage.

• Design wind pressure: Calculate in accordance with BS 6399-2.

• Hard body impact loads: To BS 8200:- Location and category: Areas within 1.5m of ground level; category B. Areas abobe 1.5mof ground level; category E.

• Soft body impact loads - curtain walling to BS EN 14019:- Location and classification: Areas within 1.5m of floor level; Class E5.

• Soft body impact loads - glass to BS EN 12600:- Location and classification: Areas within 1.5m of floor level; Class 1 (B) 1.

• Permanent imposed loads: -.• Temporary imposed loads: None.

320 DEFLECTION UNDER DEAD LOADS

• Requirement: Framing members parallel to the curtain walling plane must not:- Reduce glass bite to less than 75% of design dimension.- Reduce edge clearance to less than 3 mm between members and immediately adjacentglazing units, panel/ facing units or other fixed units.

- Reduce clearance to less than 2 mm between members and movable components suchas doors and windows.



325 DEFLECTION UNDER WIND LOAD• Requirement: To CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes' clause 3.5 2 and the

following additional requirements: None.• Additional stiffness to CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes' clause 3.5 4.2:Not allowed.

330 GENERAL MOVEMENT• Requirement: Curtain walling must accommodate anticipated building movements as

follows: to be advised by the structural engineer .

332 APPEARANCE AND FIT

• Requirement: Design curtain walling system:- To ensure position and alignment of all parts and features as shown on preliminarydesign drawings.

- To accommodate deviations in the primary support structure.

• Primary support structure: Before commencing installation of curtain walling system, carryout survey sufficient to verify that required accuracy of erection can be achieved.- Give notice: If the structure will not allow the required accuracy or security of erection.- Design tolerances: As sections G10 and F10..

• Curtain wall envelope zone tolerances:- Width: 5mm.Critical reference location: steekwork.

• Maximum permitted component and installation tolerances: in accordance with CWCTStandard, clause 7.4.2.

340 AIR PERMEABILITY• Requirement: Permissible air leakage rates of 1.5m?/hr/m? for fixed lights and 2.0

m?/hr/lin.m for opening lights must not be exceeded when the curtain walling is subjectedto the peak test pressure.

• Permeability class to BS EN 12152: A4.- Peak test pressure: 600 Pa.

345 AIR PERMEABILITY EXFILTRATION

• Requirement: The maximum permissible air exfiltration rate through the curtain wallingsystem must not exceed: All external walls: 5 m?/(h.m?) at a test pressure of 50 Pa. .

350 WATER PENETRATION• Watertightness class to BS EN 12154: R7.

- Peak test pressure: 600 Pa.• Additional requirements: Internal surfaces or cavities must not be wetted when the curtain

walling is subjected to a peak positive test pressure .

370 THERMAL PROPERTIES

• Method of calculating the thermal transmittance (U-value) of curtain walling/ each zone of curtain walling: Weighted U-value.

• Average U-value of curtain walling: 1.8 W/m?K.

• Curtain wall zone interfaces: Co-ordinate to achieve required average U-value.

• Method for assessing thermal transmittance (U-value) of assemblies: By calculation.



380 SOLAR AND LIGHT CONTROL• Total solar energy transmission:

- Maximum g-value - glazing only: 0.3.- Maximum effective g-value - glazing with shading devices: Not applicable.

• Visible light transmission: - Minimum light transmission - glazing only: 60%.- Minimum effective light transmission - glazing with shading devices: Not applicable.

385 THERMAL STRESS IN GLAZING• Glass panes/ units: Must have adequate resistance to thermal stress generated by

orientation, shading, solar control and construction.

390 AVOIDANCE OF CONDENSATION

• Requirement: Notional psychrometric conditions under which condensation must not formon building interior surfaces of framing members or any part of infill panels/ facings are:- Notional outdoor psychrometric conditions as BS 6229, table A1.- Notional indoor psychrometric conditions:Temperature: 20?C.Relative humidity: 50%.Vapour pressure: 1.17 kPa.

410 SOUND TRANSMITTANCE• Minimum weighted sound reduction index (Rw) to BS EN ISO 717-1:

- Between internal and external surfaces of curtain walling: Refer to acoustician's reportand recommendations.

• Minimum weighted standardized level difference (DnTw) to BS EN ISO 717-1:- Between adjacent floors abutting curtain walling: In accordance with HTM 08-01.- Between adjacent rooms on same floor abutting curtain walling: In accordance withHTM 08-01.

425 INTERNAL SURFACE SPREAD OF FLAME OF CURTAIN WALLING

• Standard: To BS 476-7.- Class 0.

430 FIRE STOPPING• Locations: At junctions of curtain walling with compartment walls and floors.• Materials and methods of fixing: To ensure fire resistance not less than that specified for

compartment walls and floors.

435 OPENING LIGHTS (WINDOWS)• Performance criteria: To CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes' Part 3.

• Security:- Applicable opening lights: All.- Security rating: To BS 7950.

• Opening lights restrictive catches to CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes'clause 4.2.5: To all opening lights in windows to floors above ground level .

• Ventilation requirement: In accordance with mechanical engineer's calculations to achieveminimum natural ventilation requirements.

• Windows to be cleaned from inside of the building: Refer to cleaning and maintenanceschedule.

• Fasteners: Concealed multipoint, operated by an internal handle.

• Integral locks: Suited to pass same key.



436 DOORS AND OTHER ACCESS FACILITIES• Performance criteria: To CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes' Part 3.• Access facilities designated for use by disabled persons: All external doors to meet the

minimum requirements of ADM and BS8300.• Strength and durability: To CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes' clause

4.3.3.- Forces and tests: To BS EN 12400.

• Security:- Applicable doors: All.- Security rating: To PAS 24-1.

440 DURABILITY

• Relevant agents or degradation mechanisms: To be determined by curtain wallingcontractor.

• Design life of the curtain walling system: Not less than 50 years.

• Secondary components: Submit details together with required maintenance regime,replacement periods and methods of replacement.

450 SAFETY• Finished surfaces of curtain walling: Accessible internal and external areas must not:

- Have irregularities capable of inflicting personal injury.- Release irritant or staining substances.

TESTING

510 COMPARISON (TYPE) TESTING• Requirement: To CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes', Part 8.• Test results and reports: Before commencement of curtain walling fabrication and

installation, submit proof of compliance with this specification.

520 PROJECT TESTING (SITE)

• Test results and reports: Before installation of general areas of curtain walling, submit proof of compliance with this specification.

530 TESTING AUTHORITY• Requirement: Project testing must be carried out by a United Kingdom Accreditation

Service (UKAS) approved independent laboratory.



550 TEST SEQUENCE - STANDARD LABORATORY TESTS• Requirement: To CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes', Standard sequence

A, clause 8.12.1, and as follows:• Air permeability (infiltration): To CWCT clause 8.6.

- Peak test pressure: As clause 340.- Method of identifying areas of concentrated air leakage: Smoke.

• Air permeability (exfiltration): To CWCT clause 8.6.- Peak test pressure: As clause 340.- Allowable exfiltration rates: As clause 345.- Method of identifying areas of concentrated air leakage: Smoke.

• Water penetration resistance - static: To CWCT clause 8.7.1.- Peak test pressure: As clause 350.

• Wind resistance - serviceability: To CWCT clause 8.8.- Peak test pressure: Equal to design wind pressure specified in clause 313.- Position of displacement measuring devices: To be agreed.- Allowable elastic and residual deformation: in accordance with CWCT Standard, clause3.5.2.

• Air permeability (infiltration): Repeat as above.

• Air permeability (exfiltration): Repeat as above.

• Water penetration resistance - static: Repeat as above.

• Hose test: To CWCT clause 8.16.2.- Joints to be tested: As drawing.

• Wind resistance - safety: To CWCT clause 8.8.- Peak test pressure: Equal to 1.5 times design wind pressure specified in clause 313.- Position of displacement measuring devices: As drawing.- Allowable residual deformation: in accordance with CWCT Standard, clause 3.6.2.2.

• Impact - safety: To CWCT clause 8.10.- Location, sequence and number of impacts to be applied: Not applicable.- Type of soft body impactor: Double tyre to BS EN 12600 .- Energy of soft body impactor (E): Not applicable.- Required hard body impact load category: As clause 313.- Required soft body impact classification: As clause 313.

• Dismantle inspect and record.



550A TEST SEQUENCE - (Note - for client testing see clause 550B)• Requirement: To CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes', Standard sequence

A, clause 8.12.1, and as follows:• Air permeability (infiltration): To CWCT clause 8.6.

- Peak test pressure: As clause 340.- Method of identifying areas of concentrated air leakage: Smoke.

• Air permeability (exfiltration): To CWCT clause 8.6.- Peak test pressure: As clause 340.- Allowable exfiltration rates: As clause 345.- Method of identifying areas of concentrated air leakage: Smoke.

• Water penetration resistance - static: To CWCT clause 8.7.1.- Peak test pressure: As clause 350.

• Wind resistance - serviceability: To CWCT clause 8.8.- Peak test pressure: Equal to design wind pressure specified in clause 313.- Position of displacement measuring devices: To be agreed.- Allowable elastic and residual deformation: in accordance with CWCT Standard, clause3.5.2.

• Air permeability (infiltration): Repeat as above.

• Air permeability (exfiltration): Repeat as above.

• Water penetration resistance - static: Repeat as above.

• Hose test: To CWCT clause 8.16.2.- Joints to be tested: As drawing.

• Wind resistance - safety: To CWCT clause 8.8.- Peak test pressure: Equal to 1.5 times design wind pressure specified in clause 313.- Position of displacement measuring devices: As drawing.- Allowable residual deformation: in accordance with CWCT Standard, clause 3.6.2.2.

• Impact - safety: minimum To CWCT clause 8.10 - see also clause 550B.



550B ADDITIONAL CLIENT TEST REQUIREMENTS

Taken from the Environmental Design Guide, Adult Medium Secure Services, published bythe Department of Health, 2011

The testing of materials or components is a critical element of the development project.The project quality plan should clearly identify responsibilities for testing at an early stageand ensure that the appropriate skills, training, recording and safety measures are in place.The tests types provided below are designed to replicate a number and/or combination of actions.

Curtain wall components will pass testing if:

It exhibits no significant failure resulting in the removal of the whole or part of thecomponentIt does not break or fracture enabling its use as a weapon or means of self-harmThere is no escape or exposure to live electrical wiring, high-temperature pipework or anyother vulnerable services.If the element or component becomes deformed as a result of testing, this should notnecessarily be classified as a failure provided the extent of deformation does not enableaccess to any recess or void within which it is fixed.

Type 1 An attack on a component or element of construction by the use of animplement or weapon

Implement: 36 x 36x 1000mm hardwood shaft (minimum density 650 kg/m3),chamfered at one end to replicate the jagged edge/arises/etc. of a vandalised component,to be planed and all arises roundedTest: Carry out a sustained attack for a period of 15 minutes (maximum potential periodfor a patient to work undetected on a component, notwithstanding the noise that this wouldcreate), including hitting with the flat section of the weapon a minimum of 10 consecutiveblows, attacking end-on with the non-chamfered end of the weapon for a minimum of 10consecutive blows and, where testing a component, prizing away from the structure towhich it is fixed by the chamfered end of the weapon (the latter applies to the whole or any part of the component)

Type 2 Attack by punching or kicking

Implement: 1.2 kg rubber mallet (75mm)Test: Carry out sustained attack with implement comprising of 15 consecutive blowscommencing each blow with the implement withdrawn a minimum of 1000mm away fromthe component/element of constructionA component or element of construction will pass testing if:

Type 3 The impact of the full body weight of a person

Implement: Rubber paving maulTest: Carry out sustained attack with implement comprising of 15 consecutive blowscommencing each blow with the implement withdrawn a minimum of 1000mm way from thecomponent/element of construction

Dismantle inspect and record results.



635 SITE HOSE TEST• Requirement: To CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes', 'Standard test

methods for building envelopes' Section 9.- Joints to be tested: All.

655 WIND LOAD FATIGUE TEST, SMALL SPECIMEN• Requirement: To CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes', 'Standard test

methods for building envelopes' Section 14.- Test sequence: As CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes' Table 8.1.

PRODUCTS

710 ALUMINIUM ALLOY FRAMING SECTIONS

• Standard: To relevant parts of BS EN 515, BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020.

• Alloy, temper and thickness: Suitable for the application and specified finish.

• Structural members: To BS 8118.

712 ALUMINIUM ALLOY SHEET• Standards: To relevant parts of BS EN 485, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573.• Alloy, temper and thickness: Suitable for the application and specified finish.

715 CARBON STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/ REINFORCEMENT

• Standards: To relevant parts of BS 7668, BS EN 10029, and BS EN 10210.

• Thickness: Suitable for the application, and for galvanizing or other protective coating.

730 MECHANICAL FIXINGS

• Stainless steel: To BS EN ISO 3506, grade A2 generally, grade A4 when used in severelycorrosive environments.

• Carbon steel: To BS 4190 and suitable for galvanizing or other protective coating.

• Aluminium brackets, rivets and shear pins: To relevant parts of BS EN 755.

732 ADHESIVES• General: Not degradable by moisture or water vapour.

735 FIXING ANCHORS

• Type and use: Reviewed and approved by fixing manufacturers. Submit confirmatoryinformation on request.

• Dimensions: Not less than recommended by their manufacturers.

• Adjustment capability: Sufficient in three dimensions to accommodate building structureand curtain walling fabrication/ installation tolerances.

737 GLASS GENERALLY• Standards: To BS 952 and relevant parts of:

- BS EN 572 for basic soda lime silicate glass.- BS EN 1096 for coated glass.- BS EN 1748 for borosilicate glass.- BS EN 1863 for heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass.- BS EN 12150 for thermally toughened soda lime silicate glass.- BS EN 13024 for thermally toughened borosilicate glass.- BS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass.

• Glass quality: Clean and free from obvious scratches, bubbles, cracks, ripplings, dimplesand other defects.

• Glass edges: Generally undamaged. Shells and chips not more than 2 mm deep andextending not more than 5 mm across the surface are acceptable if ground out.



741 DISTORTIONAL TOLERANCES ON GLASS• Measurement of tolerances: After any thermal toughening/ heat strengthening.• Maximum bow: 0.2% of pane dimension.• Maximum roller wave:

- For 3 to 5 mm thick glass: 0.5 mm.- For 6 to 10 mm thick glass: 0.3 mm.- For 12 mm and thicker glass: 0.15 mm.

• Maximum edge dip:- For 3 to 5 mm thick glass: 0.8 mm.- For 6 to 10 mm thick glass: 0.5 mm.- For 12 mm and thicker glass: 0.25 mm.

745 INSULATING GLASS UNITS

• Standard and labels for hermetically sealed units: To BS EN 1279.

• Label: Each pane.

• Colour of aluminium perimeter spacers: Black.

• Perimeter taping: Not to be used.

• Perimeter seals:- Resistant to UV light degradation on exposed edges.- Compatible with structural, assembly and weather sealants.

760A GASKETS• Material:

- Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1.- Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.

• Continuity : Outer gaskets of single front sealed curtain walling systems and inner gasketsof drained and ventilated or pressure equalized curtain walling systems must be formed ina complete frame with sealed joints.Inner gaskets to be sectional to avoid ligature risk.Vulcanized rubber gaskets must have factory moulded corner joints.

• Durability: Resistant to oxidation, ozone and UV degradation.

765 WEATHERSTRIPPING OF OPENING UNITS

• Material:- Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1.- Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.- Polypropylene woven pile, silicone treated.

• Attachment: Fixed in undercut grooves in framing sections using preformed corners, withany joints in the length.

770 GENERAL SEALANTS• Selection: In accordance with BS 6213 from:

- Silicone.- One part polysulfide.- Two part polysulfide.- One or two part polyurethane.

• Classification and requirements: To BS EN ISO 11600.• Reaction to contact products and finishes: Stable and compatible.

770A GENERAL SEALANTS

• Selection: In accordance with BS 6213 from:Anti-pick sealant to client approval.

• Reaction to contact products and finishes: Stable and compatible.



772 CURTAIN WALLING JOINT ASSEMBLY SEALANTS• Material: One part, low modulus silicone to BS EN ISO 11600, type F or G. Neutral curing

where in contact with or close proximity to other products that may be adversely affected by acetoxy curing.

• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.- Product reference: Submit proposals - anti-pick type.

780 THERMAL INSULATION• Material: PIR rigid board.

- Recycled content: Not applicable.- Properties: Durable, rot and vermin proof and not degradable by moisture or water vapour.

• Fixing: Attached to or supported within the curtain walling so as not to bulge, sag,delaminate or detach during installation or in situ during the life of the curtain walling.

785 VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER

• Acceptable materials:- Aluminium alloy.- Carbon steel, galvanized or protective coated.- Stainless steel.- Reinforced membranes: Foil, plastics or rubbers, protected both sides by rigid facings/linings.

• Location: Warm side of thermal insulation.• Integrity: Continuous, free from gaps and sealed at joints.

FINISHES

810 PROTECTIVE COATING OF CARBON STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/REINFORCEMENT

• Treatment: One of the following to all surfaces:- Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.- An appropriate equivalent coating to BS 5493, BS EN ISO 12944 or BS EN ISO 14713.

820 PROTECTIVE COATING OF CARBON STEEL MECHANICAL FIXINGS

• Treatment: One of the following to all surfaces:- Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.- Sherardized to BS 4921, class 1 coating thickness and passivated.- Zinc plated to BS EN 12329, coating designation Fe//Zn//C for an iridescent (yellow passivate) chromate conversion coating or Fe//Zn//D for an opaque (olive green)chromate conversion coating.

830 POWDER COATING• Requirement: As section Z31.

FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

910 GENERALLY

• Electrolytic corrosion: Prevent. Submit proposed methods.

• Fixings: Concealed unless indicated on detailed drawings. Where exposed they mustmatch material and finish of the products fixed.

• Fabrication: Machine cut and drill products in the workshop wherever possible.

• Identification of products: Mark or tag to facilitate identification during assembly, handling,storage and installation. Do not mark surfaces visible in the completed installation.



912 METALWORK• Requirement: As section Z11, unless specified otherwise in this section.

915 GLAZING• Requirement: As section L40, unless specified otherwise in this section.• Directional patterned/ wired glass: Generally fix parallel to surround and align adjacent

panes where seen together at close quarters.

917 FIXINGS/ ADHESIVES APPLICATION

• Requirement: As section Z20, unless specified otherwise in this section.

920 SEALANT APPLICATION• Requirement: As section Z22, unless specified otherwise in this section.

930 ASSEMBLY• General: Carry out as much assembly as possible in the workshop.• Joints (other than movement joints): Rigidly secured, reinforced where necessary and fixed

with hairline abutments. • Displacement of components in assembled units: Submit proposals for reassembly on site.

955 FIXING ANCHOR INSTALLATION

• Site drilling or cutting into structure: Submit proposals for positions other than shown ondetailed drawings.

• Concrete supporting structure:- Cast-in inserts: Provide detailed locational information. Protect cavities in inserts fromentry of concrete.

- Edge fixing distances: Not less than recommended by fixing anchor manufacturers.

• Corrective fabrication: Minimize. Where necessary, submit proposals.

970 CURTAIN WALLING INSTALLATION• Securing to fixing anchors: Through holes formed during fabrication only.• Tightening mechanical fasteners: To manufacturer's recommended torque figures. Do not

overtighten fasteners intended to permit differential movement.• Protective coverings: Remove only where necessary to facilitate installation and from

surfaces that will be inaccessible on completion.

975 WELDING

• In situ welding: Not permitted .

980 INTERFACES

• Flashings, closers, etc: Locate and form correctly to provide weathertight junctions with thecurtain walling.

982 IRONMONGERY• Assembly and fixing: Accurately, using fasteners with matching finish supplied by

ironmongery manufacturer.• Completion: Check, adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct functioning.



985 MAINTENANCE• Maintenance manual: Incorporate details within the Building Manual in accordance with

CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes' clause 7.6.1.- Materials certification and test reports to be included:Contact details for subcontractors and suppliers.Design criteria for the curtain wall system.Product information for components and materials including manufacturers? literature,COSHH data sheets and recommendations for cleaning maintenance and repair.Copies of material, components and finishes certification and test report.A full set of construction drawings, updated to include any changes made up to the timeof completion.The terms and conditions of any guarantee.Method statement for means of access for maintenance and for use of any permanentequipment.Method statement covering the procedures for replacement of parts that have a designlife less than the design life of the curtain wall system.Recommendations for routine maintenance and cleaning, including suitable cleaningagents and lubrication/ adjustments to working parts.Record book for listing defects, maintenance and repairs.



H13

Structural glass assemblies

H13 Structural glass assemblies


TYPES OF STRUCTURAL GLASS ASSEMBLY

115A STRUCTURAL GLASS ASSEMBLY to education centre link corridor

• Supporting structure: to engineers design.

• System manufacturer: Pilkington Bauglasindustrie. Supplied and installed by Reglit GlassArchitecture.Ashbury House, 6, Ashton Road, Glasgow G73 1UB. Telephone 0141 6136060 [email protected] Product reference: Pilkington Profilit plus Glazing System .Glass type:Walls: Double glazed system SP26 toughened glass with film both panes. U Value1.4w/m2K requiredPattern - wired castSize: 262x60mmOther requirements:Units to be thermally broken, with powder coated aluminium frames, fitted with impactgaskets type 166, and silicone sealant both sides. Note that sealant is required to be anti-pic.

High level glass to parapet area: Double glazed system SP26 toughened glass. U Value1.4 w/m2k requiredPattern - cast etched.Size : 262x60mmOther requirements:Units to be thermally broken, with powder coated aluminium frames, fitted with impactgaskets type 166, and silicone sealant both sides.

Drawings - see design intent document for indicative sketches and GA drawings.

General:Installed system to meet the requirements for critical glazing areas as stipulated in theApproved doc N of the england and Wales building regulations.Method of assembly : Pilkington profilit Plus, glass channels fitted vertically with impactgaskets type 166, double glazed into proprietory aluminium perimeter framing system.aluminium frame to be fixed to support structure, around full extent of structural opening.all materials to be site cut.All glass/ glass and glass / aluminium joints to be sealed withsilicone sealant. (anti-pick where accessible)Glazing system to be installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions andrecommendations.Weather resistance:External glazing including jointing and fixing , must be wind and water tight under allconditions with full allowance made for permissible deflections.Integrity:Calculate glass size, thickness, spans, frame types and location of fixings in accordancewith manufacturers recommendations and BS6399: Part 2: 1997 Standard Method (making due allowance for any internal presure) to ensure that the glazing will resist alldead loads and live loads, and accommodate all deflections and thermal movementswithout damage.




205A CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN of glass assembly to education centre link.• Design responsibility: Determine glass assembly specification talking into account

minimum requirements described above, sizes and numbers of fixings. Detail assemblyand fixings to suit the layout and details of supporting steelwork design. .

• Structural and fire requirements:- Generally: As section B50.Functional requirements: As specified in this section and section A33.

• Additional requirements: samples of glass and joints to be provided. Evidence of impactresistance of assembly to be provided.

220 SPECIFICATION

• Compliance standard: The Centre for Window and Cladding Technology (CWCT)'Standard for systemised building envelopes'.

• Reference information: For the duration of the contract, keep available at the design office,workshop and on site copies of: - The CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes'.- Publications invoked by the CWCT 'Standard for systemised building envelopes'.

225 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE DETAILED DESIGN OF STRUCTURALGLAZING

• Submittals:- Detailed reports and calculations to prove compliance with design and performancerequirements. Reports and calculations must be based on approved laboratory testing or computer modelling.

- Full details of structural sealant glazing design.

230 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN OF STRUCTURALGLAZING

• Submittals:- Quality plan.- Method statements.

• Content: In accordance with CWCT TN53, BS EN ISO 9001 and including the following:- Name of the quality manager.- Quality assessment procedures.- Inspection procedures to be adopted in checking the work.- Stages at which checklists will be used and samples of the lists.- List of work procedures on the correct use of materials or components, both off site andon site.

- List of product information with latest revisions.- Subcontractors involved in the work.- Subcontractors' quality plans.- Storage, handling, transport and protection procedures.- Procedure for registering and reporting non-compliances.- Maintenance procedures and calibration records.- Certification that completed work complies with specification.- Checklist register to ensure all items have been inspected and non-compliancesdischarged.



231 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE FABRICATION OF STRUCTURALGLAZING

• Submittals:- Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation.- Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from the structural glass assembly to thestructure.

- Proposals for connections to and support from the building structure and buildingcomponents.

- Proposals for amendments to primary supporting structure and for secondary supportingstructure additional to that shown on preliminary design drawings.

- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with the Main Contractmaster programme.

- Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of products.

241 LABELLED PRODUCT SAMPLES

• Timing: Submit before commencing detailed design.

• Samples: typical glass section and joint .

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

313 INTEGRITY• Requirement: The structural glass assembly must resist wind loads, dead loads and

design live loads, and accommodate deflections and movements without damage.• Design wind pressure: Calculate in accordance with: BS EN 1991-1-4 and National Annex.• Impact resistance for structural glass walls:

- Hard body impact loads: In accordance with CWCT TN75:Location and exposure category: exposure category A.

- Soft body impact loads - glass to BS EN 12600:Location and classification: glass assemblies should be capable of withstanding testmethods outlined in the DoH Environmental design guide annexe B test levels 1,2 & 3 .

• Impact resistance for structural glass roofs:- Safety and fragility class: In accordance with CWCT TN66: Not applicable.

• Permanent imposed loads: to be confirmed through detailed design.• Temporary imposed loads: occupant body impact .

331 GENERAL MOVEMENT

• Requirement: The structural glass assembly must accommodate anticipated buildingmovement without damage.- Anticipated building movement: to be confirmed.

341 WEATHER RESISTANCE• Air leakage through sealant joints: None.• Water leakage through the structural glass assembly and perimeter junctions: None.

351 AIR PERMEABILITY• Air leakage:

- Through sealant joints: None.- Through opening lights and perimeter junctions (maximum): 2.0 m³/h/ linear m.

• Test: In accordance with Centre for Window and Cladding Technology (CWCT) 'Standardfor systemised building envelopes', Standard test methods - section 5.- Peak positive test pressure: 600 Pa.- Test results: Submit.



355 WATER PENETRATION• Water leakage through the structural glass assembly: None.• Test: In accordance with Centre for Window and Cladding Technology (CWCT) 'Standard

for systemised building envelopes', Standard test methods - section 6.- Peak positive test pressure: 600 Pa.- Test results: Submit.

361 HEAT CONSERVATION• Average thermal transmittance (U-value): 1.4 W/m²·K.

391 THERMAL STRESS IN GLAZING

• Glass panes and units: Must have adequate resistance to thermal stress generated byorientation, shading, solar control and construction.

421 SECURITY• Threaded assembly fixings and assembly support fixings: Locked or pinned at completion

of structural glazing to prevent rotation due to building movement and unauthorizedadjustment.

430 ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY AND EARTH BONDING• Standard: To BS 7671 and BS EN 62305-1 and -4.

440 DURABILITY

• Products used in the structural glass assembly: Not liable to attack by fungi, insects or vermin.

• Schedule for maintenance and replacement of sealants and secondary components:Submit.

TESTING

520A PROJECT TESTING• Test sample: A section of the structural glass assembly.

- Location: to be agreed.• Tests: impact as described in clause 313.

- Timing: Submit proposals.• Testing authority: System manufacturer.• Test results and reports: Submit proof of compliance with this specification.

- Timing: Before installation of general areas of structural glass assembly.

PRODUCTS

610 GLASS GENERALLY

• Standards: To BS 952 and BS EN 1863 for heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass.

• Glass quality: Clean and free from obvious scratches, bubbles, cracks, rippling, dimplesand other defects.

• Glass edges: Flat ground, generally undamaged.- Shells and chips: Permitted to maximum dimensions of 2 mm deep and 5 mm acrosssurface. Grind out to edges.

- Arrises: Slightly ground, suitable for sealant jointing.



615 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES ON GLASS• Measurement of tolerances: Before thermal toughening and/ or heat strengthening.• Panes:

- Dimensions < 1 m: ± 1 mm.- Dimensions > 1 m: ± 2 mm.- Squareness: Maximum 4 mm difference in diagonal measurements.

• Holes:- Positional tolerance: ± 1 mm from single datum point.- Diameter tolerance: ± 1 mm.

617 DISTORTIONAL TOLERANCES ON GLASS

• Measurement of tolerances: After thermal toughening and/ or heat strengthening:

• Bow (maximum): 0.2% of pane dimension.

• Roller wave for glass thickness (maximum):- 3–5 mm: 0.5 mm.- 6–10 mm: 0.3 mm.- > 12 mm: 0.15 mm.

• Edge dip for glass thickness (maximum):- 3–5 mm: 0.8 mm.- 6–10 mm: 0.5 mm.- > 12 mm: 0.25 mm.

620 THERMALLY TOUGHENED GLASS• Standards: To BS EN 12150 or BS EN 13024.• Impact performance: To BS EN 12600.• Edgework and holes: Complete before toughening.• Toughening process: Horizontal to eliminate tong marks and minimize dimensional

inaccuracies.• Nickel sulfide inclusions: Heat soak toughened glass to BS EN 14179.

- Holding period: as Reglit standard.

630 LAMINATED GLASS

• Panes: Thermally toughened glass, combined with heat strengthened glass to BS EN 1863and BS EN ISO 12543 or annealed glass, to form panes that retain integrity in event of breakage.

• Interlayers to glass leaves: Polyvinyl butyral (pvb) or cast in place resin. Sealed at theperimeter to prevent deterioration due to water or glass joint sealant.

650 STAINLESS STEEL ASSEMBLY FIXINGS AND/ OR SUPPORTS• Castings and machined fittings: To BS EN 10088-1, grade 1.4401.• Plate and strip: To BS EN 10088-2, grade 1.4401.• Bars, rods and sections: To BS EN 10088-3, grade 1.4401.• Fasteners: Austenitic stainless steel, to BS EN ISO 3506-1 and 2, grade A4.

660 ALUMINIUM ALLOY ASSEMBLY FIXINGS AND/ OR SUPPORTS• Extrusions: To BS EN 573-3, alloy designation EN AW-6063.• Plate and strip: To BS EN 485, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573.

FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

710 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

• Fabrication: Machine cut and drill glass, assembly fixings and assembly supports in theworkshop.



720 SUITABILITY OF SUPPORTING STRUCTURE• Pre-installation survey: Submit report.

730 STRUCTURAL GLAZING• Setting out of glass panes and units: Orientate to ensure uniformity of appearance.• Assembly fixings and assembly support fixings:

- Isolate metal surfaces to prevent direct contact with glass.- Isolate dissimilar metal surfaces to prevent electrolytic corrosion.- Tighten to manufacturer's recommended torque figures.

740A SEALANT JOINTS

• Sealant: To BS EN ISO 11600, type G silicone, neutral curing where in contact or closeproximity to other products and finishes that may be adversely affected by acetoxy curing.

• Colour: clear.

• Application: applied in accordance with manufacturers receommendations. Anti - pick typeto be agreed - sample required .



H14

Precast concrete and glass lens/ paver rooflights/ floorlights/ pavement lights/ security panels

H14 Precast concrete and glass lens/ paver rooflights/ floor lights/ pavement lights/ security panels


PRODUCTS

310A ROOFLIGHTS Circular rooflights to entrance area and education entrance foyer 9no

• Manufacturer: The Rooflight Company. Wychwood Business centre Milton Road Shiptonunder Wychwood. OX7 6XU. Tel 01993833108.- Product reference: bespoke plateau circular rooflights complete with kerb upstands sealsand flashings..

• Panel size:- Overall size (length x width x depth): varies - see roof plans / schedule.Glazing configuration: Double glazed flat laid on tilted kerb .

• Load capacity (minimum): tbc.

• Fire resistance:- Standard: BS 476-21.- Requirement (minimum): 30 minutes loadbearing, 60 minutes integrity and 90 minutesinsulation.

• Thermal transmittance (U-value): Not greater than 1.4 W/m?K.

• Cast in lifting sockets: Not required. .- Form: circular .- Face dimensions (l x b or diameter): varies.- Other requirements: Glazing - double glazed unit to be capable of being traficked for maintenance pruposes, etching for obsucity to be integral with glassTested in accordance with Doh Environmental deisgn guide for adult Medium secureservices annexe B tests 1,2 and 3.

310B ROOFLIGHTS BESPOKE WALK ON RECTANGULAR X 6NO• Manufacturer: Greenways Architectural Ltd or equal approved

5A Grammer School Lane . Halesowen . West Midlands . B63 3SWT: 0121 550 9406 . E: info@greenwaysarchitectural.co.ukwww.greenwaysarchitectural.co.uk .- Product reference: walk on roof light bespoke design to form part of activity courtyard in patent area..

• Panel size:- Overall size (length x width x depth): overall 5.5 x 1.3m sectional.

• Glazing configuration: double glazed with obscure etch to surface, compatible with loadingand thermal requirements stated, and subject to DoH testing criteria levels 1,2,3. Glazingproposals to be submitted to architect and client prior to manufacture .

• Load capacity (minimum): MIN 5.0 kN/m² distributed - to be confirmed.

• Fire resistance:- Standard: Not applicable.Thermal transmittance (U-value): 1.4W/M2.

• Other requirements: tested in accordance with Doh Environmental deisgn guide for adultMedium secure services annexe B tests 1,2 and 3. Surface to be flush with pavingadjacent. .

365 INFORMATION• Documents: Submit reports, calculations and certificates demonstrating compliance with

DOH testing criteria prior to manufacture of panels/ units.



EXECUTION

601 SUITABILITY OF SURROUNDS/ SUPPORTS• Survey: Before placement of panels/ units carry out a geometric survey of the surrounds

and supports to verify required accuracy and security.- Give notice: If surrounds or supports will not allow the required accuracy or security.

605 ADVERSE WEATHER• General: Do not use frozen materials or lay units on frozen surfaces.• Air temperature requirements: Do not lay units in mortar or apply sealant when air

temperature is at or below 3?C and falling or unless it is at least 1?C and rising.

• Newly laid panels/ units: Protect at all times from rain and snow.

615 INSTALLING PERIMETER MOVEMENT JOINTS

• Filler placement: Build in as panel/ unit is laid and to the correct depth to receive thesealant system.

• Sealant placement: Prepare joints and apply sealant as section Z22. Remove surplus fromadjoining surfaces as work proceeds.



H62

Natural slating

H62 Natural slating


TYPES OF SLATING

110A ROOF SLATING WITH COUNTERBATTENS generallyContractor to provide rates for alternatIVE SLATE OPTIONS SHOWN IN CALUSES 110a/b/c

• Substrate: Trussed rafters at 600 mm centres.

• Pitch: 30 degrees.

• Underlay: As clause 110B.- Recycled content: Manufacturer's standard.- Direction: Parallel to eaves.Counterbattens:

- Size: 38 x 38 mm.- Fixing: 65 x 3.35 mm galvanized annular ring shank nails .

• Battens:- Size: 50 x 25 mm.- Fixing: 65 x 3.35 mm galvanized annular ring shank nails .

• Slates:- Supplier: SSQ UK Limited OR APPROVED SUPPLIER301 Elveden RoadPark RoyalLondonNW10 7SS.Product reference: DOMIZ FIRST.

- Type: Spanish.- Size: 500x250mm.- Thickness: tba.- Fixing: Two nails each slate.

• Accessories: None.



110B ROOF SLATING WITH COUNTERBATTENS ALTERNATIVE 1• Contractor to provide rates for alternatIVE SLATE OPTIONS SHOWN IN CALUSES 110a/

b/c ]Substrate: [Trussed rafters at 600 mm centres].Pitch: [30 degrees].Underlay: [As clause 110B].- Recycled content: [Manufacturer's standard].- Direction: Parallel to eaves.Counterbattens:

- Size: [38 x 38 mm].- Fixing: [65 x 3.35 mm galvanized annular ring shank nails].Battens:

- Size: [50 x 25 mm].- Fixing: [65 x 3.35 mm galvanized annular ring shank nails].Slates:

- Supplier: [SSQ UK Limited OR APPROVED SUPPLIER301 Elveden RoadPark RoyalLondonNW10 7SS].Product reference: [DEL CARMEN FIRST].

- Type: [Spanish].- Size: [500x250mm].- Thickness: [tba].- Fixing: Two nails each slate.Accessories: [None].

110C ROOF SLATING WITH COUNTERBATTENS ALTERNATIVE 2

Contractor to provide rates for alternatIVE SLATE OPTIONS SHOWN IN CALUSES 110a/b/c ]Substrate: [Trussed rafters at 600 mm centres].Pitch: [30 degrees].Underlay: [As clause 110B].- Recycled content: [Manufacturer's standard].- Direction: Parallel to eaves.Counterbattens:

- Size: [38 x 38 mm].- Fixing: [65 x 3.35 mm galvanized annular ring shank nails].Battens:

- Size: [50 x 25 mm].- Fixing: [65 x 3.35 mm galvanized annular ring shank nails].Slates:

- Supplier: [SSQ UK Limited OR APPROVED SUPPLIER301 Elveden RoadPark RoyalLondonNW10 7SS].Product reference: [DEL CARMEN ULTRA].

- Type: [Spanish].- Size: [500x250mm].- Thickness: [tba].- Fixing: Two nails each slate.Accessories: [None].



SLATING GENERALLY

210 BASIC WORKMANSHIP• General: Fix slating and accessories to make the whole sound and weathertight at earliest

opportunity.• Setting out: To true lines and regular appearance, with neat fit at edges, junctions and

features.• Fixings for slating accessories: As recommended by manufacturer.• Gutters and pipes: Keep free of debris. Clean out at completion.

240 UNDERLAY

• Handling: Do not tear or puncture.

• Laying: Maintain consistent tautness.

• Vertical laps (minimum): 100 mm wide, coinciding with supports and securely fixed.

• Fixing: Galvanized steel, copper or aluminium 20 x 3 mm extra large clout head nails.

• Eaves: Where exposed, underlay must be BS 8747 Annex B, type 5U, or equivalent UV durable type.

• Penetrations: Use proprietary underlay seals or cut underlay to give a watertight fit aroundpipes and components.

• Ventilation paths: Do not obstruct.

245 BATTENS/ COUNTERBATTENS - TREATED• Timber: Sawn softwood.

- Species: To BS 5534, clause 4.12.1.- Permissible characteristics and defects: Not to exceed limits in BS 5534, annex C.- Grading: Factory pre-graded with site grading of knots and wane .- Moisture content at time of fixing and covering (maximum): 22%.

• Preservative treatment: As section Z12 and Wood Protection Association CommoditySpecification C8.- Type: Copper-organic.

259 COUNTERBATTENS ON RAFTERS

• Fixing: Into rafters at not more than 300 mm centres.

265 BATTEN FIXING

• Setting out: Align parallel to ridge in straight horizontal lines to gauge of slates. Align onadjacent areas.

• Batten length (minimum): Sufficient to span over three supports.• Joints in length: Square cut. Butt centrally on supports. Joints must not occur more than

once in any group of four battens on one support.• Additional battens: Provide where unsupported laps in underlay occur between battens.• Fixing: Each batten to each support. Splay fix at joints in length.

272 TIMBER FOR SLATING SUBSTRATE WORK• Timber: Sawn softwood, free from wane, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack (ambrosia

beetle excepted).- Moisture content at time of fixing and covering (maximum): 22%.

• Preservative treatment: As section Z12 and Wood Protection Association CommoditySpecification C8.- Type: Copper-organic.



275 SLATE FIXING• Setting out: Lay slates with an even overall appearance with slightly open (maximum 5

mm) butt joints. Align tails.• Slate thickness: Consistent in any one course. Lay with thicker end as tail.• Ends of courses: Use extra wide slates to maintain bond and to ensure that cut slates are

as large as possible. Do not use slates less than 150 mm wide.• Top course: Head-nail short course to maintain gauge.• Fixing: Centre nail each slate twice through countersunk holes 20-25 mm from side edges.

- Nails: Copper clout to BS 1202-2 or aluminium clout to BS 1202-3.- Nail dimensions: Determine in accordance with BS 5534 to suit site exposure,withdrawal resistance and slate supplier?s recommendations.

290 MORTAR BEDDING/ POINTING

• Mortar: As section Z21, 1:3 cement:sand, with plasticizing admixtures permitted.- Bond strength providing resistance to uplift: To BS 5534.

• Weather: Do not use in wet or frosty conditions or when imminent.

• Preparation of concrete and clay tile accessories to be bedded: Wet and drain surfacewater before fixing.

• Appearance: Finish neatly as work proceeds and remove residue.

ROOF SLATING EDGES/ JUNCTIONS/ FEATURES

305 GENERALLY• Fittings and accessories: As recommended by slate supplier, do not improvise.

- Exposed fittings and accessories: To match slate colour and finish.• Cut slates: Cut only where necessary, to give straight, clean edges.• Flashings: Fix with or immediately after slating. Form neatly.

325 FIRE SEPARATING WALLS

• Separating walls: Completely fill space between top of wall and underside of slates withmineral wool quilt to provide fire stopping.

• Boxed eaves: Completely seal air paths in plane of separating wall with wire reinforcedmineral wool, not less than 50 mm thick, fixed to rafters and carefully cut to shape toprovide fire stopping.

365 UNVENTILATED EAVES

• Underlay support: 12 mm plywood, as section G20.- Continuous to prevent water retaining troughs.

• Gutter: Dress underlay or underlay support tray to form drip into gutter.• Undercourse and first course slates: Fix with tails projecting 50 mm over gutter or to centre

of gutter, whichever dimension is the lesser.

445 MORTAR BEDDED VERGES WITH BEDDED UNDERCLOAK• Underlay: Carry 50 mm onto outer leaf of gable wall and bed on mortar.• Undercloak: Slates.

- Position: Over underlay, level with underside of slating battens, sloping towards verge.- Projection beyond face of wall: 38-50 mm.- Bedding: On mortar identical to that used in gable walling.

• Slating battens: Carry onto undercloak and finish 100 mm from verge edge.

• Verge slates: - Bedding: Flush with undercloak on 75 mm wide bed of mortar.- Pointing: Flush profile.- Fixing: Do not displace or crack mortar.



535 LEAD ROLL HIPS• Underlay: Lay courses over hip.

- Overlaps (minimum): 150 mm.• Hip slates: Cut close to timber roll and fix to form a straight junction.

615 METAL VALLEYS• Underlay: Cut to rake. Dress over tilting fillets to lap onto metal valley. Do not lay under

metal.• Roof slates: Cut extra wide slates adjacent to valley to fit neatly.

- Valley width between slates: 125 mm.

660 SIDE ABUTMENTS

• Underlay: Turn up not less than 100 mm at abutments.

• Abutment slates: Cut as necessary. Fix close to abutments.

• Soakers: Interleave with abutment slates. Fix by turning down over head of abutmentslates.

670 TOP EDGE ABUTMENTS• Underlay: Turn up not less than 100 mm at abutments.• Top slate courses: Fix close to abutments.

730 LEAD ROLL RIDGES

• Underlay: Lay courses over ridge.- Overlap (minimum): 150 mm.

• Top slate courses: Fit close to timber roll.

850 ROOF SLOPE TERMINALS

• Ventilator slates: In-line grille.- Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.Product reference: Slate vent.

- Connect to soil and vent pipes.

VERTICAL SLATING EDGES/ JUNCTIONS

910 BOTTOM EDGES• Slating substrate work: Fix timber tilting fillet to support bottom course of slates in correct

vertical plane. Fix flashing to tilting fillet.• Underlay: Dress over flashing.• Undercourse and bottom course slates: Fix with tails neatly aligned.

920 TOP EDGES

• Top slate courses: Fix under abutment and make weathertight with flashings dressed downnot less than 150 mm.

930 SIDE ABUTMENTS• Slating substrate work: Chase abutment wall and insert stepped flashing.

- Flashing: Return not less than 75 mm behind slating, overlapping underlay and battens.Turn back to form a vertical welt.

• Abutment slates: Cut and fix neatly.

950 ANGLES WITH SOAKERS• Angle slates: Cut extra wide slates and fix to form a straight, close mitred junction.

• Soakers: Interleave with angle slates. Fix by nailing to battens at top edge.



960 JUNCTION WITH ROOF VERGES• Slating substrate work: Fix additional slating batten parallel to and below verges.• Course end slates: Splay cut slate and a half width slates to angle of verge rake. Fix to

additional slating batten with cut edge parallel to and below verge.



H71

Lead sheet coverings/ flashings

H71 Lead sheet coverings/ flashings


TYPES OF LEADWORK

110A ROOFING GENERAL NOTESALL LEAD INSTALLATIONS TO BE SECURITY MARKED, FOR THE PURPOSES OFANTI-THEFT ONCE INSTALLED BEFORE AND AFTER HANDOVERCONTRACTOR TO PROPOSE.

230 VALLEY GUTTER LINING TO SLATE/ TILE ROOFS• Underlay: Needle punched nonwoven polyester geotextile .• Type of lead: Rolled to BS EN 12588.

- Thickness: 1.75 or 1.80 mm (Code 4).• Pretreatment: Apply thin coating of patination oil to underside of lead and allow to dry

before laying.• Laying: Over and beyond tilting fillets.• Lengths: Not more than 1500 mm.

- Cross joints: Lapped not less than 200 mm.• Fixing: Welt edges. Nail top edge of each sheet. Dress bottom end neatly into eaves gutter.

315 RIDGE/ HIP ROLLS TO SLATE ROOFS

• Clips: At capping laps and not more than 500 mm.- Fixing: Nail to top of ridge/ hip board before fixing core. Nail each side not more than 50mm from edge of capping (drill slates as necessary).

• Core: Rounded timber.- Size: 45 mm high x 45 mm wide.- Shape: Tapered to a flat base 30 mm wide.- Fixing: To ridge/ hip board with brass or stainless steel screws at not more than 600 mmcentres, with base not less than 5 mm above slates.

• Lead capping:- Thickness: 2.00 or 2.24 mm (Code 5).- Lengths: Not more than 1500 mm.- Hip capping: Nail head of each length around core.- Laps: Not less than 150 mm for ridges, 100 mm for hips.- Cover: Wings of capping to extend not less than 150 mm on to roof.



472 CHIMNEY FLASHINGS TO SLATE/ PLAIN TILE ROOFS• Lead front apron:

- Thickness: 2.00 or 2.24 mm (Code 5).- Dimensions:Length: Width of chimney plus not less than 150 mm underlap to each side flashing.Upstand: Not less than 75 mm.Cover to roof: Not less than 220 mm.

- Fixing: Lead wedges into bed joint.• Lead soakers:

- Thickness: 1.25 or 1.32 mm (code 3).- Dimensions:Length: Slate/ tile gauge + lap + 25 mm.Upstand: Not less than 75 mm.Underlap: Not less than 100 mm.

• Lead step flashings:- Thickness: 2.00 or 2.24 mm (Code 5).- Dimensions:Lengths: Not more than 1500mm.End to end joints: Laps of not less than 100 mm.Front end: Turn 75 mm around chimney over apron.Cover: Overlap to soaker upstands of not less than 65 mm.

- Fixing: Lead wedges at every course.

• Lead back gutter:- Thickness: 2.00 or 2.24 mm (Code 5).- Dimensions:Length: Width of chimney plus not less than 100 mm overlap to each side flashing.Upstand: Not less than 100 mm.Gutter sole: Not less than 150 mm.Cover up roof: Not less than 225 mm.

• Lead back gutter cover flashing:- Thickness: 2.00 or 2.24 mm (Code 5).- Dimensions:Length: Width of chimney plus not less than 100 mm overlap to each side flashing.Cover: Overlap to back gutter upstand of not less than 75 mm.

- Fixing: Lead wedges into bed joint.

476 CHIMNEY DAMP PROOF COURSE• Position: Level with Top edge of back gutter.• Lead:

- Thickness: 2.00 or 2.24 mm (Code 5).• Protection: Fully coated with high build bitumen based paint on surfaces to be embedded.• Dimensions:

- Plan area of chimney plus laps on perimeters: turned up 50 mm against stack in roof void, turned down 50 mm over stack externally, through flue lining and turned up 25 mmall round internally.

• Laying: On a thin even bed of wet mortar.- Next layer of overlying construction: Bed on mortar without delay and finish joint neatly.




510 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY• Standard: To BS 6915 and latest edition of 'Rolled lead sheet. The complete manual'

published by the Lead Sheet Association.• Fabrication and fixing: To provide a secure, free draining and completely weathertight

installation.• Operatives: Trained in the application of lead coverings/ flashings. Submit records of

experience on request.• Preforming: Measure, mark, cut and form lead prior to assembly wherever possible.• Marking out: With pencil, chalk of crayon. Do no use scribers or other sharp instruments

without approval. • Bossing and forming: Straight and regular bends, leaving sheets free from ripples, kinks,

buckling and cracks.• Solder: Use only where specified.• Sharp metal edges: Fold under or remove as work proceeds.• Finished work: Fully supported, adequately fixed to resist wind uplift but also able to

accommodate thermal movement without distortion or stress.- Protection: Prevent staining, discolouration and damage by subsequent works.

516 LEADWELDING

• In situ leadwelding: Is permitted, subject to completion of a 'hot work permit' form andcompliance with its requirements.

520 LEAD SHEET• Production method:

- Rolled, to BS EN 12588, or - Machine cast and BBA certified, or - Sand cast, from lead free from bitumen, solder, other impurities, inclusions, laminations,cracks, air, pinholes and blowholes; to code thicknesses but with a tolerance (by weight)of ?10%.

• Identification: Labelled to show thickness/ code, weight and type.

555 LAYOUT

• Setting out of longitudinal and cross joints: Submit proposals.

560 CONTROL SAMPLES

• General: Complete areas of the finished work, and obtain approval of appearance beforeproceeding:

• Size: Submit proposals.• Location: sample of lead roll .

610 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES• Condition: Dry and free of dust, debris, grease and other deleterious matter.

620 PREPARATION OF EXISTING TIMBER SUBSTRATES

• Remedial work: Adjust boards to level and securely fix. Punch in protruding fasteners andplane or sand to achieve an even surface.

• Defective boards: Give notice.

• Moisture content: Not more than 22% at time of covering. Give notice if greater than 16%.



630 PLYWOOD UNDERLAY• Standard: Manufactured to an approved national standard and to BS EN 636, section 8

(plywood for use in humid conditions).- Sheet size: 2400 or 1200 x 1200 mm and 6 mm thick.

• Moisture content: Not more than 22% at time of covering. Give notice if greater than 16%.• Laying: Cross joints staggered and a 0.5 to 1 mm gap between boards.• Fixing: With 25 mm annular ringed shank copper or stainless steel nails, at 300 mm grid

centres over the area of each sheet and at 150 mm centres along edges, set in 10 mmfrom perimeter edges.- Nail heads: Set flush or just below the surface.

640 TIMBER FOR USE WITH LEADWORK

• Quality: Planed, free from wane, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack (ambrosia beetleexcepted).

• Moisture content: Not more than 22% at time of fixing and covering. Give notice if greater than 16%.

• Preservative treatment: Organic solvent as section Z12 and Wood Protection AssociationCommodity Specification C8.

650 LAYING UNDERLAY• Handling: Prevent tears and punctures.• Laying: Butt or overlap jointed onto a dry substrate.

- Fixing edges: With copper or stainless steel staples or clout nails.- Do not lay over roof edges but do turn up at abutments.- Wood core rolls: Fixed over underlay.- Protection: Keep dry and cover with lead at the earliest opportunity.

FIXING LEAD

705 HEAD FIXING LEAD SHEET

• Top edge: Secured with two rows of fixings, 25 mm and 50 mm from top edge of sheet, at75 mm centres in each row, evenly spaced and staggered.

• Sheets less than 500 mm deep: May be secured with one row of fixings, 25 mm from topedge of sheet and evenly spaced at 50 mm centres.

710 FIXINGS

• Nails to timber substrates: Copper clout nails to BS 1202-2, or stainless steel (austenitic)clout nails to BS 1202-1.- Shank type: Annular ringed, helical threaded or serrated.- Shank diameter: Not less than 2.65 mm for light duty or 3.35 mm for heavy duty.- Length: Not less than 20 mm or equal to substrate thickness.

• Screws to concrete or masonry substrates: Brass or stainless steel to BS 1210, tables 3 or 4.- Diameter: Not less than 3.35 mm.- Length: Not less than 19 mm.- Washers and plastic plugs: Compatible with screws and lead.

• Screws to composite metal decks: Self tapping as recommended by the deck and leadmanufacturer/ supplier for clips.



715 CLIPS• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.• Material:

- Lead clips: Cut from sheets of same thickness/ code as sheet being secured.- Copper clips:Thickness: 0.70 mm.Temper: BS EN 1172, designation R220 in welts, seams and rolls, R240 elsewhere;dipped in solder if exposed to view.

- Stainless steel clips:Thickness: 0.46 mm.Grade: BS EN 10088, 1.4301(304) terne coated if exposed to view.

• Dimensions:- Width: 50 mm where not continuous.- Length: To suit detail.

• Fixing clips: Secure each to substrate with either two screw or three nail fixings not morethan 50 mm from edge of lead sheet. Use additional fixings where lead downstandsexceed 75 mm.

• Fixing lead sheet: Welt clips around edges and turn over 25 mm.

765 CONTINUOUS CLIPS FOR CROSS JOINTS IN ROOFING

• Lead continuous clips: 50 mm wide, cut from sheets of same thickness/ code as sheetbeing secured.

• Fixing clips: Leadweld top edge of clips to underlap sheet, 50 mm from lower edge of overlap.

• Fixing lead sheet: Welt edge around continuous clip and dress down.

770 WEDGE FIXING INTO JOINTS/ CHASES• Joint/ chase: Rake out to a depth of not less than 25 mm.• Lead: Dress into joint/chase.

- Fixing: Lead wedges at not more than 450 mm centres, at every change of direction andwith at least two for each piece of lead.

• Sealant: Contractor's choice.- Application: As section Z22.

780 WEDGE FIXING INTO DAMP PROOF COURSE JOINTS

• Joint: Rake/ cut out under damp proof course to a depth of not less than 25 mm.

• Lead: Dress lead into joint.- Fixing: Lead wedges at not more than 450 mm centres, at every change of direction andwith at least two for each piece of lead.

• Sealant: Contractor's choice.- Application: As section Z22.

JOINTING LEAD

810 FORMING DETAILS• Method: Bossing or leadwelding except where bossing is specifically required.• Leadwelded seams: Neatly and consistently formed.

- Seams: Do not undercut or reduce sheet thickness.- Filler strips: Of the same composition as the sheets being joined.- Butt joints: Formed to a thickness one third more than the sheets being joined.- Lap joints: Formed with 25 mm laps and two loadings to the edge of the overlap.

• Bossing: Carried out without thinning, cutting or otherwise splitting the lead sheet.- Details where bossing must be used: Not applicable .



840 WOOD CORED ROLL JOINTS WITHOUT SPLASH LAP• Wood core:

- Size: 45 x 45 mm round tapering to a flat base 25 mm wide.- Fixing to substrate: Brass or stainless steel countersunk screws at not more than 300mm centres.

• Undercloak: Dress half way around core.• Copper or stainless steel clips. Fix to core at not more than 450 mm centres. Do not restrict

thermal movement of the undercloak.• Overcloak: Dress around core with edge welted around ends of clips, finishing 5 mm clear

of main surface.

845 WOOD CORED ROLL JOINTS WITH SPLASH LAP

• Wood core:- Size: 45 x 45 mm round tapering to a flat base 25 mm wide.- Fixing to substrate: Brass or stainless steel countersunk screws at not more than 300mm centres.

• Undercloak: Dress three quarters around core.- Fixing: Nail to core at 150 mm centres for one third length of the sheet starting from thehead.

• Overcloak: Dress around core and extend on to main surface to form a 40 mm splash lap.

847 HOLLOW ROLL JOINTS• Joint allowance: 125 mm overcloak and 100 mm undercloak.• Copper or stainless steel clips: Fix to substrate at not more than 450 mm centres.• Overcloak: Welt with clips around undercloak to form a roll of consistent cross section.

860 DRIPS WITH SPLASH LAPS• Underlap: Dress into rebate along top edge of drip.

- Fixing: One row of nails at 50 mm centres on centre line of rebate.

• Overlap: Dress over drip and form a 40 mm splash lap.

862 DRIPS WITH SPLASH LAPS

• Underlap: Dress up full height of drip upstand.- Fixing: Two rows of nails to lower level substrate, 25 mm and 50 mm from face of drip.At 75 mm centres in each row, evenly spaced and staggered. Seal over nails with asoldered or leadwelded dot.

• Overlap: Dress over drip and form a 75 mm splash lap.- Fixing: Lead clips, leadwelded to underlap, with not less than one per bay.

865 DRIPS WITHOUT SPLASH LAPS• Underlap: Dress into rebate along top edge of drip.

- Fixing: One row of nails at 50 mm centres on centre line of rebate.• Overlap: Dress over drip to just short of lower level.

880 WELTED JOINTS

• Joint allowance: 50 mm overlap and 25 mm underlap.

• Copper or stainless steel clips: Fix to substrate at not more than 450 mm centres.

• Overlap: Welt around underlap and clips and lightly dress down.

970 PATINATION OIL• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.

- Product reference: Contractor's choice.• Location: lead ridges/ hipps, valleys .• Application: As soon as practical, apply a smear coating to lead, evenly in one direction

and in dry conditions.



H72

Aluminium strip/ sheet coverings/ flashings

H72 Aluminium strip/ sheet coverings/ flashings


TYPES OF ALUMINIUM WORK

250A WEATHERING TO copings - aluminium cappings

• Substrate: masonry parapets, reglit parapets.

• Underlay: sarnafil flashings.

• Aluminium: Polyester powder coated.- Alloy designation: EN AW-1050A.- Thickness: 1.0 mm.

• Joints: manufacturers proposals.

• Edge details: see architects drawings.

• Fixing: Determined by Contractor.

420A COVER FLASHINGS to window head• Aluminium: polyester powder coated.

- Alloy designation: EN AW-1050A.- Thickness: 1.0mm.

• Fixing: see architects details 31-002 .



• Standard: Generally to CP 143-15.

• Fabrication and fixing: To provide a secure, free draining and completely weathertightinstallation.

• Operatives: Trained in the application of aluminium coverings/ flashings. Submit records of experience on request.

• Measuring, marking, cutting and forming: Prior to assembly wherever possible.

• Marking out: With pencil, chalk or crayon. Do not use scribers or other sharp instrumentswithout approval.

• Folding: With mechanical or manual presses to give straight, regular and tight bends,leaving panels free from ripples, kinks, buckling and cracks. Use hand tools only for foldingdetails that cannot be pressed.

• Surface protection: Fully coat surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar with highbuild bitumen based paint, after folding.

• Sharp metal edges: Fold under or remove as work proceeds.• Joints: Do not use sealants to attain waterproofing.• Finished aluminium work: Fully supported, adequately fixed to resist wind uplift and able to

accommodate thermal movement without distortion or stress.- Protection: Prevent staining, discolouration and damage by subsequent works.

515 WELDING• In situ welding: Not permitted.

525 COATED ALUMINIUM STRIP/ SHEET

• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.- Product reference: Contractor's choice.



535 INTEGRITY OF ALUMINIUM• Requirement: Design coverings/ flashings and methods of attachment to prevent loss of

weathertightness and permanent deformation due to wind pressure or suction. • Wind loads: Contractor's design .• Structural requirements:

- Generally: As section B50.Modifications: None.

• Design: Complete in accordance with the designated code of practice to satisfy specifiedperformance criteria.

550 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

• Aluminium coverings: Attach the following to a lightning protection system copings inaccordance with engineers lightenting protection scheme .

• Electrical continuity: Provide between aluminium strips/ sheets via welting of joints.

555 LAYOUT

• Setting out of longitudinal and cross joints: Submit proposals.

610 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES• Condition: Dry and free of dust, debris, grease and other deleterious matter.

620 PREPARATION OF EXISTING TIMBER SUBSTRATES

• Remedial work: Adjust boards to level and securely fix. Punch in any protruding fastenersand plane or sand to achieve an even surface.

• Defective boards: Give notice.

• Moisture content: Not more than 22% at time of covering.

640 TIMBER FOR USE WITH ALUMINIUM WORK

• Quality: Planed, free from wane, splits, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack (ambrosiabeetle excepted).

• Moisture content: Not more than 22% at time of fixing and covering.• Preservative treatment: Organic solvent as section Z12, and Wood Protection Association

Commodity Specification C8.

650 LAYING UNDERLAY• Handling: Prevent tears and punctures.• Laying: Butt jointed onto a dry substrate.

- Fixing edges: With aluminium or galvanized steel staples or 20 x 3 mm extra large headclout nails.

- Do not lay over eaves and drip/ step aluminium underlaps.• Ventilation paths: Do not obstruct.

• Protection: Keep dry and cover with aluminium at the earliest opportunity.



FIXING

710 FIXINGS FOR CLIPS• Nails to timber substrates: Aluminium to BS 1202-3 for aluminium clips. Stainless steel

(austenitic) for stainless steel clips.- Shank type: Annular ringed or helical threaded.- Shank diameter: Not less than 2.65 mm.- Head: Flat.- Length: Not less than 25 mm or equal to substrate thickness.

• Screws to concrete/ masonry substrates: Sherardized or zinc plated steel to BS 1210,table 2, or aluminium to BS 1210, table 5 for aluminium clips. Stainless steel (austenitic) toBS 1210, table 4 for stainless steel clips.- Diameter: Not less than 3.35 mm.- Length: Not less than 25 mm.- Washers and plastic plugs: Compatible with screws.

• Screws to composite metal decks: Self tapping, as recommended by the deck andaluminium manufacturer/ supplier for aluminium or stainless steel clips.

750 CLIPS FOR FLASHINGS/ CROSS JOINTS

• Material: Cut from same alloy and thickness as that being secured.

• Dimensions:- Width: Not less than 50 mm.- Length: Sufficient to suit detail.

• Fixing: Secure each clip to substrate with two fixings, not more than 50 mm from edge of strip/ sheet being fixed.

760 CONTINUOUS CLIPS• Material: Cut from same alloy and thickness as that being secured.• Dimensions:

- Width: Sufficient to suit detail.- Length: Not more than 1.8 m.

• Fixing: To substrate at 150 mm centres. Welt edge of strip/ sheet being fixed to continuousclip and dress down.

JOINTING

810 FORMING DETAILS

• Folds and welts: Form without thinning or splitting the strip/ sheet.

• Thermal movement: Form details with appropriate allowance for movement, withoutimpairment of security at full expansion or contraction.

815 FREE EDGE DETAILS• Visible feature edges: Finish with 15 mm welts.

860 DRIP/ STEP JOINTS• Strip/ Sheet from below step: Fold up full height of upstand and fix to top edge.• Form aluminium underlap/ continuous clip:

- Cover to roof slope: Not less than 100 mm with anticapillary welt at top edge.- Projection: 25 mm for forming into drip welt.- Downstand: Not less than 40 mm with welt at bottom edge.- Fixing: To roof slope at 100 mm centres, avoiding through fixings at longitudinal jointpositions.

• Strip/ Sheet from above step: Fold around underlap projection and single welt to form adrip.



880 SINGLE LOCK WELT JOINTS• Joint allowances: 100 mm overlap and 50 mm underlap.• Underlap: Welt and secure with clips, two per bay.• Overlap: Welt around underlap and clips and dress down.• Forming: Fold welts lightly to allow freedom of movement.

890 DOUBLE LOCK WELT JOINTS• Joint allowances: 90 mm overlap, 60 mm underlap.• Underlap: Welt and secure with clips, one per bay.• Overlap: Double welt around underlap and clips, and dress down.



J40

Flexible sheet waterproofing/ damp proofing

J40 Flexible sheet waterproofing/ damp proofing


110 SOFT BLINDING TO HARDCORE BEDS

• Material: Pulverized fuel ash or soft sand.- Thickness (minimum): 50 mm.

• Finish on completion: Smooth, consolidated bed free of sharp projections.

115 CONCRETE BLINDING TO HARDCORE BEDS

• Concrete: Designated GEN 1 or Standardized prescribed ST2.- Thickness: Minimum 50 mm.

• Finish on completion: Smooth.

TYPES OF TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING

140 LOOSE LAID POLYETHYLENE GAS RETARDANT DAMP PROOFING• Substrate: BLINDED HARDCORE.• Manufacturer: contractor choice.

- Product reference: Submit proposals.• Thickness/ Gauge: 300 micrometres (1200 gauge).

• Joints:- Surfaces to be joined: Clean and dry beyond full width of joint.- Laps (minimum): in accordance with manufacturers recommendatiosn for gas membrane

- Sealing: Two continuous strips of double sided mastic tape between overlaps. Roll toprovide gas tight joints.

• Accessories: manufacturers recommended products for system installation. Link withcontinuous cavity tray dpc .

WORKMANSHIP

310 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY• Condition of substrate:

- Clean and even textured, free from voids and sharp protrusions.- Moisture content: Compatible with damp proofing/ tanking.

• Air and surface temperature: Do not apply sheets if below minimum recommended bymembrane manufacturer.

• Condition of membrane at completion:- Neat, smooth and fully supported, dressed well into abutments and around intrusions.- Completely impervious and continuous.- Undamaged. Prevent puncturing during following work.

• Permanent overlying construction: Cover membrane as soon as possible.

320 INSPECTION

• Give notice: Before covering any part of membrane with overlying construction.

Page 88 of 266 J40 Project Fitzroy


335 PRIMERS• Manufacturer: Grace Construction Products Limited, Ajax Avenue, Slough, Berkshire SL1

4BH- Tel: 01753 692929- Fax: 01753 691623- Web: www.graceconstruction.com.- Product reference: Grace Preprufe SC1 Primer.

• Coverage per coat (minimum): As recommended for the purpose by membranemanufacturer.

• Curing: Allow to dry thoroughly before covering.

345 COLD APPLIED BONDING COMPOUNDS

• Type and application: As recommended for the purpose by the membrane manufacturer.

350 ANGLES IN BONDED DAMP PROOFING/ TANKING

• Preformed rot proof fillet to internal angles:- Size (minimum): 50 x 50 mm, splay faced.- Bedding: Bitumen mastic or bonding compound.

• Reinforcing strip to all angles:- Material: As damp proofing tanking.- Width (minimum): 300 mm.- Timing: Apply before main sheeting.

• Dressing of main sheeting onto adjacent surfaces (minimum): 100 mm.

360 JUNCTIONS WITH PROJECTING DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS• Adjoining surfaces: Clean and dry.• Dpcs/ Cavity trays: Lap and fully bond/ seal with sheeting.

- Laps (minimum): 100 mm.- Bonding/ Sealing: Preprufe LM two-component elastomeric, cold applied liquidcompound or as recommended by the manufacturer.

370A PREFORMED COLLARS FOR PIPES, DUCTS, CABLES, ETC. IN DAMP PROOFMEMBRANES.

• Manufacturer: Visqueen Building Products, Heanor Gate, Heanor, Derbyshire. DE75 7RGTel: +44 (0)845 302 4758Fax: +44 (0)845 017 8663Email: [email protected]: www.visqueenbuilding.co.uk.- Product reference: Top Hat units.

• Sealing: Fully bond to penetrations and sheeting using double-sided jointing tape .• Completed junctions: Impervious.

370B PREFORMED COLLARS FOR PIPES, DUCTS, CABLES, ETC. IN TANKINGMEMBRANES.

• Manufacturer: Grace Construction Products Limited, Ajax Avenue, Slough, Berkshire SL14BH- Tel: 01753 692929- Fax: 01753 691623- Web: www.graceconstruction.com.- Product reference: Preprufe? LM and Preprufe? Tape.

• Sealing: Where these pass through sheeting, make junctions completely impervious usingBituthene? LM and where required Preprufe Tape .

• Completed junctions: Impervious.



380A PROTECTION BOARDS FOR DAMP PROOFING/ TANKING• Manufacturer: Grace Construction Products Ltd (Servicised).

- Web: www.graceconstruction.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Hydroduct? 220

• Drainage collector strip: Hydroduct Coil 150.



J41

Reinforced bitumen membrane roof coverings

J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof coverings

TYPES OF ROOF COVERING

ROOF FINISH MANUFACTURER The following specification is based upon sytemproposal by Bauder - Roof finish to be either Bauder or similar equal approved

110A BUILT-UP REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE WARM DECK ROOF COVERINGPlant Deck Roofs" Substrate: New Concrete deck (designed and constructed level with no deflections,hollows or back-falls). Roof falls to be provided by the tapered insulation scheme.- Preparation: As clause 610C." Vapour control layer: Bauder VB4-Expal, 4 mm thick aluminium lined, elastomeric bitumen torch applied vapour barrier. Installation as clauses 670D, 710." Insulation:- BauderPIR Tapered insulation, fire resistant, zero ODP, highly efficient rigidurethane insulation. Installation in accordance with the Bauder scheme supplied toachieve U value of 0.1w/m/k. Installation as clause 680G.- Form gutter within insulation, as clause 680N." Insulation to upstands: BauderPIR flat board 140mm thick, to be used at all verticalabutments to roof openings such as rooflight or plant kerbs i.e. builders kerbs (butexcluding proprietary insulated integrated rooflight units), in compliance with Part L of thecurrent building regulations. Installation as clause 681C." Vertical upstands to insulated cavity wall abutments only: 30 mm thick, Bauder PIR flat board, fire resistant, zero ODP, highly efficient rigid urethane insulation. Incompliance with Part L of the current Building Regulations, the insulation to wallabutments should be 300 mm in height from the deck surface to the top of the upstand,with the vertical insulation being installed before the flat, so as to retain the insulation at the base. Installation as clause 681C." Waterproof covering: BAUDER TOTAL ROOF SYSTEM

- System manufacturer: Bauder Limited, 70, Landseer Road, Ipswich, Suffolk, IP3 0DH.Tel: 01473 257 671. Fax: 01473 230 761. Email: [email protected]: www.bauder.co.uk

- Underlayer: BauderTEC KSA DUO, 3 mm thick, 200g/m² glass-fibre reinforced,elastomeric self-adhesive bitumen underlayer.Attachment: As clauses 710, 747A.

- Top layer / Cap sheet: Bauder K5K, 5 mm thick, 250g/m² polyester reinforced,elastomeric bitumen torch applied capping sheet, Natural Slate finish.Attachment: As clauses 710, 750A.

- Flashings and detail work: Bauder K5K capping sheet, Natural Slate finish. Install asclauses, 773, 774, 775A." Surface protection: N/A" Accessories: -- Bauder Insulation upstand support brackets. Installation, as clause 775A.- Bauder 50 mm x 50 mm PIR angle fillets. Installation, as clause 775A- Supply and install new Bauder Bituminous Standard Insulated Vertical Outlets,quantity as required, 100 mm or 150 mm nominal bore, to fit the specified drainagepipework and complete with pre-attached bitumen connection flange and domegrating. The appropriate depth extension unit (supplied separately) must be used whenthis outlet is used within warm roof construction. Installation as clause 784B.- Bauder GRP edge trim to all perimeter kerbs – Installation, as clause 785A." Additional Requirements: 210, 230, 515, 520, 530, 560, 561, 562, 910A, 940, 950B.



110B BUILT-UP REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE WARM DECK ROOF COVERING single story flat roofs see dwg 27 seriesContractor to provide proposals for use of NOXITE roof covering to areas indicated on theroof plan. The roof mcovering will be laid over laid to falls insulation and the U value to bereached is 0.1w/m/k.The Noxite torch-on roofing system consists of the BiELSo membrane covered with aprotective layer of Noxite®. Icopal's BiELSo membrane is manufactured from recycledroofing membrane with maximum CO2 reduction.Manufacturer

Icopal LimitedBarton Dock RoadStretford Manchester United KingdomM32 0YL

Tel: +44 (0) 161 865 4444Fax: +44 (0) 161 864 2616Email: [email protected]

Roof finish to be installed by Icopal approved installer.20 year garaunbtee required.



110E BUILT-UP REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE WARM DECK ROOF COVERING Resin bound gravel areas to activity courtyards roof type 4" Roof area: First Floor Activity Courtyards" Substrate: New Concrete deck with screed (designed and constructed to provide aminimum finished slope of 1°).- Preparation: As clause 610C." Vapour control layer: Bauder VB4-Expal, 4 mm thick aluminium lined, elastomeric bitumen torch applied vapour barrier. Installation as clauses 670D, 710." Insulation: Bauder PIR FA-TE flat board, fire resistant, aluminium foil faced, zeroODP, highly efficient rigid urethane insulation 110mm thick to achieve the required Uvalue of 0.19w/m/K (refer Clause 230). Installation as clause 680E." Insulation to upstands: Vertical upstands to roof light kerbs, access hatches i.e.builders kerbs (but excluding proprietary insulated integrated rooflight units) andchanges of level, the Insulation is to be the same thickness and meet the same thermalvalue as used for the flat area. Installation as clause 681C." Vertical upstands to insulated cavity wall abutments only: 30 mm thick, Bauder PIR FA-TE flat board, fire resistant, aluminium foil faced, zero ODP, highly efficient rigidurethane insulation. In compliance with Part L of the current Building Regulations, theinsulation to wall abutments should be 300 mm in height from the deck surface to the topof the upstand, with the vertical insulation being installed before the flat, so as to retainthe insulation at the base. Installation as clause 681C." Waterproof covering: BAUDER TOTAL ROOF SYSTEM.

- System manufacturer: Bauder Limited, 70, Landseer Road, Ipswich, Suffolk, IP3 0DH.Tel: 01473 257 671. Fax: 01473 230 761. Email: [email protected]: www.bauder.co.uk

- Underlayer: Bauder TEC KSA DUO, 3 mm thick, 200g/m² glass-fibre reinforced,elastomeric self-adhesive bitumen underlayer.Attachment: As clauses 710, 747A.

- Top layer / Cap sheet: Bauder K5E, 5 mm thick, 250g/m² polyester reinforced,elastomeric bitumen torch applied capping sheet - mica finish.Attachment: As clauses 710, 750A.

- Flashings and detail work: Bauder K5K capping sheet, Natural Slate finish. Install asclauses, 773, 774, 775A." Surface protection: Bound gravel permeable surfacing on harcore layer on bauder DSE60 drainage layer on fleece and PE foil. Eg Envirotech resin bound surface with non-slip surface dressing." Accessories: -- Bauder Insulation upstand support brackets. Installation, as clause 775A.- Bauder 50 mm x 50 mm PIR angle fillets. Installation, as clause 775A- Supply and install new Bauder Bituminous Standard Insulated Vertical Outlets,quantity as required, 100 mm or 150 mm nominal bore, to fit the specified drainagepipework and complete with pre-attached bitumen connection flange and dome grating.The appropriate depth extension unit (supplied separately) must be used when thisoutlet is used within warm roof construction. Installation as clause 784B.Other notes: Bound Gravel layer to be permeable to allow drainage throuhg the finishand to the drainage layer. The oulets will be located at the drainage level.

PERFORMANCE

210 ROOF PERFORMANCE

• General: Secure, free draining and weathertight.



225 AVOIDANCE OF INTERSTITIAL CONDENSATION: WARM AND INVERTED ROOFS• Determine: Interstitial condensation risk of roof construction as recommended in BS 5250,

annex D.• Vapour control layer: If necessary, provide a suitable membrane so that damage and

nuisance from interstitial condensation do not occur.

230A INSULATION• Requirement: Determine type and thickness of insulation and integral or separate overlay

to satisfy the following criteria:Thermal transmittance of roof (generally): 0.1 W/mK. For activity courtyard 0.19w/m/K .- Compressive strength of insulation (minimum) at 10% compression: suitable for permanently trafficked area.

- Finished surface: Suitably even, stable and robust to receive the covering.- Insulation compliance: To relevant British Standard, or Agrement certified.

PRODUCTS

320A PRIMER

• Type: Any commercially available Bituminous Priming Solution meeting characteristics of BS 8217, clause 5.6.2. supplied by approved installer, or Bitumen cut back with volatilesolvent.

• Characteristics when tested to BS EN 13357:- Volatile solvent content (minimum): 40% by mass. - Viscosity (maximum) (STV at 25?C, 4 mm orifice): 10s.

325 BONDING COMPOUND• Type: Oxidized bitumen to BS 3690-2, grade 95/25.• Restriction: For heat sensitive insulation materials, use cold bonding compounds.

330 TIMBER TRIMS, ETC

• Quality: Planed. Free from wane, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack (except ambrosiabeetle damage).

• Moisture content at time of covering (maximum): 22%.

• Preservative treatment: Please note organic solvent based timber preservatives are notpermitted, as these attack bitumen based materials.

EXECUTION GENERALLY

515 ADVERSE WEATHER• General: Do not lay coverings in high winds, wet or damp conditions or in extremes of

temperature unless effective temporary cover is provided over working area.• Unfinished areas of roof: Keep dry. Protect edges of laid membrane from wind action.

520 INCOMPLETE WORK

• End of working day: Provide temporary seal to prevent water infiltration.

• On resumption of work: Cut away tail of membrane from completed area and remove fromroof.

530 APPLYING PRIMERS

• Coverage per coat (minimum): As per manufacturer?s recommendations.• Surface coverage: Even and full.• Coats: Fully bond. Allow volatiles to dry off thoroughly between coats.



SUBSTRATES/ VAPOUR CONTROL LAYERS/ WARM DECK ROOF INSULATION

560 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP REQUIREMENTS

• Installation of the Bauder waterproofing system may only be carried out by trained andcertified operatives approved by Bauder Ltd and who carry current ID badges. Theseshould be available for inspection at all times.

• Workmanship must comply with Codes of Practice BS 8217:2005 (or alternatively Bauder Ltd.?s specification where otherwise stated). Non-compliant workmanship will not bepermitted, even if the system is watertight. The client will be told that all such faults mustbe remedied, before the Guarantee is issued.

• All waterproofing materials and system components must be supplied by Bauder Ltd,unless otherwise stated. Any sub-standard materials or un-authorised alternatives will berejected. Any building work which is the responsibility of the roofing contractor and has abearing on the life of the Bauder System must be carried out by properly trained andqualified tradesmen.

• Any structural damage, peculiarities or details discovered that might affect the performanceof the Bauder system, should be reported immediately to the client?s representative andBauder Limited in order that they may assist in overcoming the problem.

• The contractor is to ensure water tightness of the roof at all times. Proper day joints mustbe formed at the end of each working day to provide a temporary seal. No mopping or loose covers will be permitted.

• Where building works are to be carried out by other trades, following completion of thewaterproofing, the contractor must make adequate provision for supplying protection to prevent damage to the new membranes. The final inspection will not be carried out by theBauder Site Technician or the Bauder nominated Independent surveyor until all associatedtrades are complete and the roof areas are clear from all debris and protection layers.

• It is imperative that the Bauder Approved Contractor conforms to the workmanship criteriaas listed above. Any deviation will result in the contract being consideredunguaranteeable.

• All mechanical and electrical work to plant and equipment should be carried out bycompetent mechanical and electrical qualified tradesmen. All plant is to be reinstated andre-commissioned on completion of the roofing works in accordance with the client'sdetailed specification.

• Where building works are to be carried out by other trades, following completion of thewaterproofing, the contractor must make adequate provision for supplying protection to prevent damage to the new waterproofing.

• If any items of plant/equipment are to be situated on the finished roof, a sacrificial layer of Bauder capping sheet is to be loose laid beneath. This is to extend a minimum 25mm pastthe point of contact on all sides. In the case of heavy items it may be necessary tointroduce a load-spreading slab, please contact Bauder for further advice.

• All lead work to be carried out by skilled tradesmen and in accordance with current codesof practice and the recommendations of the Lead Development Association.



561 SITE INSPECTIONS• Bauder Site Technicians will carry out regular inspections of the project during the course

of the works. The Approved Contractor must give reasonable notice to Bauder of their intention to commence laying capping sheet. This will allow a discretionary inspection of the underlayer to take place, so that any remedial treatment necessary can be carried outprior to installing the capping sheet. This is particularly important when tapered insulationhas been used to ensure that any areas of standing water that may remain can beaddressed.

• Bauder must be notified when the roof is ready for final inspection and all related worksand snagging complete. See also clauses 910A or 910B (Landscaped roofs).

HEALTH & SAFETY INFORMATION – ROOFING WORK

1. Suitable precautions must be taken to prevent accidents occurring when roofingsystems are being installed.

2. The contractor must ensure that adequate measures are taken to effectivelyprevent injury to members of the public and other persons using the premises.

3. Where microwave equipment is installed at roof level, care must be taken toprevent persons working on the roof from being exposed to large doses of microwaveradiation.

4. Similarly, the contractor should liaise with the client to ensure that there are noextract outlets situated on the roof where noxious or harmful emissions could affectpersons working. Suitable precautions will be necessary to prevent exposure where thissituation arises.

5. The contractor is responsible for providing adequate fire fighting equipment in theform of extinguishers during work on the roof. These should be kept in easily accessiblelocations and be suitably signed.

6. Whenever possible, access to the roof should be made via internal staircasesrather than by temporary means. Where this is not available, it is the responsibility of thecontractor to ensure a safe means of access and a safe working place.

As far as roofs are concerned, edge protection in the form of scaffolding or a fixed structureshould be in place to a height of 1.1 metres in accordance with the Workplace (Health,Safety and Welfare) Regulations 1992.

Failing this, safety harnesses may be worn in exceptional circumstances where this is theonly way of preventing falls.

Means of access should be by fixed ladder, passenger hoist or scaffolding.

7. The contractor must ensure that suitable written method statements and riskassessments are available for the work being undertaken. ln particular, it is essential thatmanual handling methods be fully assessed as roofing materials are heavy and can causeserious injury.

8. The contractor must ensure that suitable information about the roof covering isprovided to the Client at the end of the work to ensure that work in future can be carried outsafely. This information will form part of the Safety File.

9. All persons working on the roof should be provided with, and wear, suitablepersonal protective equipment and wet weather gear. Training must be provided to all



contract staff on the safe use of the equipment.

10. The installer must observe Product Safety Datasheets, relevant to the materialsbeing used.

11. No work must be carried out on fragile roofs or where there are skylights unlesssuitable precautions have been taken to prevent persons falling through fragile roofs andopenings. In particular, the following are likely to be fragile:

" Non reinforced fibre cement sheets e.g. asbestos" Corroded metal decking" Woodwool slabs" Rotten chipboard or similar " Stramit" Slates or tiles" Old roof lights" Glass (including wired)

12. HSE guidance must be followed when carrying out any work involving interferencewith asbestos.

13. Current CDM Regulations, must be observed

610B SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES (METAL)

• Substrates generally: Secure, clean, dry, smooth, and free from frost, contaminants, voidsand protrusions.

• Falls: Where provided, the falls/cross-falls should be designed to 1:40 to achieve minimumfinished falls of 1:80 to comply with drainage requirements of BS 6229:2003 and currentcodes of practice BS 8217:2005. No deflections or back-falls present if the deck isdesigned to achieve a level finished surface.

• Preliminary work: Complete including:- Grading to correct falls.- Formation of upstands, kerbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases and expansionjoints.

- Fixing of battens, fillets and anchoring plugs/ strips.• Moisture content and stability of substrate: Must not impair roof integrity.• Preparation: The new metal deck should be of a suitable type/profile to support the vapour

barrier and insulation. Approval of the specified deck should be first obtained from Bauder Limited at specification stage to confirm suitability. The approved waterproofing contractor to Inspect the installed deck and report any issues that may have a detrimental effect uponwaterproofing system to the both the Clients representative and Bauder Limited. If there is any doubt as to the exact requirement Bauder Limited should be contacted for further advice. Prime all areas receiving the new waterproofing with bitumen primer, as clause320, and allow it to dry.



610C SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES (CONCRETE)• Substrates generally: Secure, clean, dry, smooth, and free from frost, contaminants, voids

and protrusions.• Falls: Where provided, the falls/cross-falls should be designed to 1:40 to achieve minimum

finished falls of 1:80 to comply with drainage requirements of BS 6229:2003 and currentcodes of practice BS 8217:2005. No deflections or back-falls present if the deck isdesigned to achieve a level finished surface.

• Preliminary work: Complete including:- Grouting of deck slab joints, application of surface screed (including falls if specified).- Formation of abutment upstands, kerbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases andexpansion joints.

- Fixing of battens, fillets and anchoring plugs/strips as required.• Moisture content and stability of substrate: Must not impair roof integrity.• Preparation: The new concrete/ screed deck to be allowed to cure thoroughly, remove

rough edges, and surface defects. If the surface is very rough a skin screed of concrete tobe applied to give a smooth surface. Prime all areas receiving the new waterproofing withbitumen primer, as clause 320, and allow it to dry.

640 FIXING TIMBER TRIMS

• Fasteners: type/length appropriate and suitable to particular deck substrate .

• Fixing centres (maximum): 500 mm.

670A LAYING VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER (METAL DECK)• Attachment: Cold applied and fully bonded to substrate in accordance with manufacturer?s

requirements.• Side and end laps: minimum 100 mm, laid red over blue with all laps torch sealed to

provide a 5-10 mm bitumen bead extrusion. Installation methods as recommended bymanufacturer.

• Joints in second layer (where applicable): Stagger by half a membrane.• Penetrations: Fully seal using bonding or taping methods recommended by manufacturer.• Edges of insulation at roof edges, abutments, upstands, kerbs, penetrations and the like:

Enclosed with vapour control layer:- Dressed up 150 mm above surface of insulation, thus providing 100 mm (minimum) sealwhen overlapped by the roof covering.

- Care should be taken to ensure adhesion when the temperature is below + 5? C.• Please note: If BauderTHERM DS1 DUO Vapour barrier is left exposed for longer than two

weeks as a temporary waterproof layer, the burn off release foil and surface of the torch-activated adhesion stripes will be effected by the exposure to ultra violet. This minor issuecan be resolved by using more heat to activate the bitumen stripes, but the process will beslightly slower than when using newly laid material.

670B LAYING VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER (CONCRETE DECK)

• Attachment: Generally, fully bonded to deck substrate in accordance with manufacturer?srequirements. However, for new concrete, the vapour barrier should be partially bonded(in the approved Bauder manner) to meet the requirements of the current codes of practice.

• Side and end laps: minimum 100 mm, laid red over blue with all laps torch sealed toprovide a 5-10 mm bitumen bead extrusion. Installation methods as recommended bymanufacturer.

• Joints in second layer (where applicable): Stagger by half a membrane.• Penetrations: Fully seal using bonding or taping methods recommended by manufacturer.• Edges of insulation at roof edges, abutments, upstands, kerbs, penetrations and the like:

Enclosed with vapour control layer:- Dressed up 150 mm above surface of insulation, thus providing 100 mm (minimum) sealwhen overlapped by the roof covering.

- Care should be taken to ensure adhesion when the temperature is below + 5? C.



680E LAYING WARM DECK ROOF INSULATION" Setting out:- Long edges: Fully supported- End edges: Fully supported.- Joints: close butted together.- End joints: Stagger." Bedding: Bonded to the upper surface of the Vapour barrier using Bauder Polyurethane Insulation Adhesive. The adhesive should be applied in strips followingthe direction of the board length giving 4 no. 8 mm wide continuous and equally spacedadhesive beads within each 600 mm board width." Multiple board layers: Where the total thickness of insulation required is greater than can be achieved by a single standard board, then a second board can be adheredto make up the total thickness required. The second board layer should be bonded usingBauder Insulation Adhesive applied in strips following the direction of the board lengthgiving 4 no. 8 mm wide continuous and equally spaced adhesive beads within each 600mm board width. The second layer of boards should be laid off-set and staggered." Protection to exposed edges of insulation: Reduced thickness treated timber battenas clause 640 (or equivalent plywood construction), a minimum width of 150 mm and 10mm less in thickness than the insulation to accommodate the build-up of thewaterproofing layers – all securely fixed to the deck. Outer edges chamfered at changes in level." Completion: Boards must be in good condition, well-fitting and stable

680G LAYING WARM DECK ROOF INSULATION" Setting out: Laid strictly in accordance with the manufacturers scheme plan andinstallation instructions. Bauder cannot be held responsible for the drainage performanceof tapered insulation schemes applied to an inappropriate deck surface and it is theresponsibility of the installing contractor to check the roof deck surface and report anydiscrepancies.

- Long edges: Fully supported (if metal deck - run at right angles tometal deck troughs)

- End edges: Fully supported.- Joints: close butted together.- End joints: Stagger.

" Thermal performance: Refer to Bauder Tapered Insulation Layout Plan for details of 'U' value achieved by this scheme." Before installing: No tapered boards should be laid on site without a copy of thelatest scheme to hand. Contractors should always refer to the Bauder plan with regard tothe recommended start point and layout of boards. If contractors are unsure of the correctplan being on site they should check with the Bauder Technical Department ASAP." Wastage: All off-cuts over 300mm must be considered as usable and are includedas such within the scheme plan." Bedding: Bonded to the upper surface of the Vapour barrier using Bauder Polyurethane Insulation Adhesive. The adhesive should be applied in strips following thedirection of the board length giving 6 no. 8 mm wide continuous and equally spacedadhesive beads within each 600 mm board width." Protection to exposed edges of insulation: Reduced thickness treated timber battenas clause 640 (or equivalent plywood construction), a minimum width of 150 mm and 10mm less in thickness than the insulation to accommodate the build-up of the waterproofinglayers – all securely fixed to the deck. Outer edges chamfered at changes in level." Completion: Boards must be in good condition, well-fitting and stable.

680N LAYING WARM DECK ROOF INSULATIONConstruct a gutter detail within the insulation (using thinner board to the gutter lining)between the rainwater outlets. The most efficient finished gutter width is 500mm, as thisminimises material wastage.



681C LAYING WARM DECK ROOF INSULATION" Bedding: Bonded to the upper surface of the Vapour barrier using Bauder Polyurethane Insulation Adhesive. The adhesive should be applied in strips following thedirection of the board length giving 4 no. 8 mm wide continuous and equally spacedadhesive beads within each 600 mm board width. Upstand insulation boards should beinstalled before the insulation to the flat areas so that the vertical upstand insulation isretained both at the base and at the top. At vertical wall abutments that are cavityinsulated, retention is obtained by mechanical fixing of the Bauder insulation supportbracket. Where the use of hot bitumen is considered unsafe or impractical for accessreasons, it is permissible to use Bauder insulation adhesive as an alternative, following theguidance/installation instructions on the container." Protective hard edges: treated timber battens or Bauder Insulated upstand brackets(as appropriate to given detail situation) must be used at all right angled edges e.g. topedges of parapet walls or abutment upstands." Encapsulation seal: Provision must be allowed for forming a minimum 100 mm lapseal between the vapour control layer and underlayer, where the insulation finishes.

WATERPROOF MEMBRANES/ ACCESSORIES

710 LAYING REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANES GENERALLY

• Direction of laying: Unrolled up the slope.- Where practicable, install so that water drains over and not into laps.

• Side and end laps: 100 mm, with the exception of mineral surfaced membranes, whereside laps are 80 mm, but the head laps to remain 100 mm.

• Head and side laps: Offset.

• Intermediate and top layer/ capsheet: Fully bond.

• Successive layers: Apply without delay. Do not trap moisture.• Strips of bitumen membrane for 'linear' details: Cut from length of roll.• Completed coverings: Firmly attached, fully sealed, smooth, weatherproof and free

draining.

747A SELF-ADHESIVE BONDING OF REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANES" Bond: Full over whole surface, with no air pockets." Underlayer: Cold applied and fully bonded by removing the release foil sheet andinstalling in the approved Bauder manner, using the Bauder long handled roller to extrudea 5-10 mm bead of bitumen. Head laps to be 100 mm side laps to be 80 mm, lapping redstrip over blue and torch sealing. All laps to upstands, edge details, flashings, etc., to be100 mm. The underlayer must be taken up all upstands, edge details, in accordance withcurrent British Standards and the manufacturer's recommendations." Alternative underlayer for detail work: For detailing to un-insulated abutmentupstands, where the waterproofing is to be applied to rough or uneven non-combustiblesurfaces i.e. brickwork or concrete, it is permissible for the installing contractor to use theBauder underlayer appropriate to the specified system where this product is considered tobe better for application to these surfaces. For all other situations, and particularly tovertical insulation, the Bauder Self-Adhesive Underlayer appropriate to the specifiedsystem must be used." Underlayer inspection: The Approved Contractor must give reasonable notice to thenominated Bauder Site Technician of their intention to commence laying capping sheet.This will allow a discretionary inspection of the underlayer to take place, so that anyremedial treatment necessary can be carried out prior to installing the capping sheet



750A LAYING MINERAL FACED REINFORCED BITUMEN TORCH-ON CAPPING SHEET• Bond: Full over whole surface, with no air pockets.• Excess compound at laps of top layer/ capping sheet: Leave as a 5 mm - 10 mm

continuous bitumen bead extrusion.• Laying top layer: Fully bonded to the underlayer by torching in the approved Bauder

manner. Head laps to be 100 mm, side laps to be 80 mm. All laps to upstands, edgedetails, flashings, etc. to be 100 mm.

• Final Inspection: The finished roof must be thoroughly inspected by the Bauder SiteTechnician. This is to ensure that any remedial treatment that is necessary can be carriedout prior to issuing the guarantee. Failure to ensure the instigation of this inspection willresult in the issuing of the Bauder guarantee being put in jeopardy.

773 FIRE RISK DETAILING ALTERNATIVE MEMBRANES AND APPLICATION" For detailing application in areas constructed from or adjacent to potentiallyflammable materials, such as timber, plywood OSB/3 etc. or where considered appropriateto minimise fire risk." Underlayers: it is permissible to use a Bauder self-adhesive membrane so long asthis product is a recognised component of the system specified." Acceptable alternatives underlayers are listed below: -- Bauder G4E to be replaced with Bauder KSA Duo- Bauder EGV 3.5 to be replaced with Bauder Sprint Duo" Capping sheets: where appropriate, the installing contractor should use Bauder KSO SN capping sheet, applied to the Bauder self-adhesive/hot air applied underlayer using hot air hand tools suitable for use with bituminous systems. Please note that Bauder KSO SN is only available in one colour - natural slate." A list of permissible hot air detailing tools are shown below:

Hot air welding equipmentThe equipment required to install the membranes must be manufactured by either Leister (contact Welwyn Tool Group, Tel 01707 331 111, http://www.welwyntoolgroup.co.uk) or Sievert (contact Lister Gas Pro, Tel 0800 801 046, [email protected]) and is available for hire or purchase.

Equipment details

LEISTERSide laps – one of the following:-" Leister Varimat or Bitumat automatic hot air welder 240V/4600W with an 80mm

Nozzle." Leister Electron hot air hand tool 240V/4500W with an 80mm nozzle.

Head laps and all detailing" Leister Electron hot air hand tool 240V/4500W with an 80mm nozzle.

SIEVERTSide laps – one of the following:-" Sievert TW5000 automatic hot air welder 240V/5000W with an 80mm nozzle." Sievert TH1750 hot air hand tool 240V/2300W with an 80mm nozzle.

Head laps and all detailing" Sievert TH1750 hot air hand tool 240V/2300W with an 80mm nozzle.



774 NON COMBUSTIBLE SURFACES -ALTERNATIVE DETAILING METHODS" For detailing to un-insulated abutment upstands, where the waterproofing is to beapplied to rough or uneven non-combustible surfaces i.e. brickwork or concrete, it ispermissible for the installing contractor to use the Bauder underlayer appropriate to thespecified system where this product is considered to be better for application to thesesurfaces. For all other situations, and particularly to vertical insulation, the Bauder Self-Adhesive Underlayer appropriate to the specified system must be used.

775A SKIRTINGS AND UPSTANDS" Insulated upstand brackets: Bauder insulated upstand support brackets must beused at all vertical abutment wall upstands (where the wall cavity is insulated) inconjunction with 30 mm Bauder insulation. These are to be fixed at 400mm centres usingsuitable fixings through the vapour barrier, so that the top edge is a minimum of 300mmabove the surface of the deck. A 3mm gap should be left between adjacent sections. Thedetail is to be carried out in accordance with the Bauder detail drawing, where provided." Angle fillets: Bauder PIR angle Fillets (50 mm x 50 mm) must be used at all rightangled upstands, provisionally bonded in Bauder PUR membrane adhesive andsubsequently retained once the underlay detailing is applied. Under no circumstancesmust fillets of an alternative material be incorporated (i.e. cork, fibre, etc.) as this wouldinvalidate the guarantee." Layers of bitumen membrane: Carry in staggered formation up the upstand, witheach layer fully bonded." Upstands:" At ends of rolls: Underlay layer only, form with bitumen membrane carried upwithout using separate strip. " Elsewhere: Form with matching strips of bitumen membrane, maintaining laps." Additional fixing of bitumen membranes: Mechanically fix the top leading edge of allupstand details in excess of 250 mm in height using appropriate fasteners. In the event of doubt, Bauder should be consulted regarding any specific requirement." Upstand details (minimum height): 150 mm. This must be taken from the finishedroof surface. Please note that for landscaped roofs, this minimum height is measuredfrom the finished landscape surface as opposed to the waterproofing surface. Specialattention should be paid to all structures, such as rooflights, counter-flashings, window anddoor cills, pipes etc. Bauder cannot take responsibility for water ingress over waterproofingdetails constructed below the recommended minimum height." Flashings: Separate flashings must always be formed. Capping sheet taken up theupstand in one piece will not be permitted.

784B ROOF DRAINAGE OUTLETSOulets to be anti-tamper - contrcator to propose for client comment / approval



785A FIXING PERIMETER TRIMS" First / Intermediate layers bitumen membrane: Lay over roof edge upstand. Projectfree edge 25 mm from wall or fascia." Trim:

-Setting out: 3 mm (minimum) clear from wall or fascia.-Fasteners: Screw fasteners of type appropriate to kerb or deck substrate. Nail

fixing is not permitted.-Fixing: 30 mm from ends and at 300 mm (maximum) centres.-Jointing sleeves / bridging piece: must be provided to each joint.-Corner pieces: Purpose made.

" Completion:-Contact surfaces: Prime.-Joints: Cover with 150 mm long pads of bitumen membrane, bonded to trim.

" Completion of bitumen membrane:-Top layer/ Capping sheet: Butt joint to rear edge of trim.-Cover strip: Fully bond to trim and top layer/ capping sheet of bitumen membrane.

Carry over roof edge upstand and lap 100 mm onto roof. The capping sheet is to bedressed tightly into the top lip of the trim, ensuring a bead of bitumen extrudes at the edge." Wall / kerb joints: The new trim must cover any open joint that may exist at the topof the kerb or wall, by a minimum distance of 20mm." Cover strip material: Bauder K5K

COMPLETION

910A INSPECTION" Interim and final roof inspections: Strictly in accordance with the manufacturer'srequirements for guarantee." Notification: It is the responsibility of the approved contractor to advise Bauder Ltdwhen the roof is ready for Final Inspection. " Other requirements: Please also refer to preliminaries / general conditions." Site contact details - Site Technician: Jez Lound, Tel: 07801 688323" Technical Contact Details - Area Sales Manager: David Harland, Tel: 07788290765

930 FLOOD TEST• Condition of roof before testing: Complete to a stage where integrity of bitumen membrane

covering can be tested.

• Outlets: Externally cover and seal. Protect against damage from water pressure usingtemporary kerbs. Do not use plugs to seal outlets.

• Flood levels: Submit proposals. In no case higher than kerbs.

• Flood duration: 24 hours.

• Inspection to detect leaks: Regular.

• Completion of test: Slowly drain roof. Do not overload or flood outlets.

• Test results and warranty: Submit on completion of testing.

940 COMPLETION• Roof areas: Clean.• Outlets: Clear.• Work necessary to provide a weathertight finish: Complete.• Storage of materials on finished surface: Not permitted.• Completed membrane: Do not damage. Protect from chemicals, traffic and adjacent or

high level working.



950A GUARANTEE• A 20 year product and workmanship guarantee is to be provided upon completion following

a Final Inspection by Bauder. Details regarding the full terms and conditions are availableseparately from Bauder Ltd upon request. This system must installed by a Bauder Approved Contractor, to be eligible for guarantee.



J42

Single layer polymeric sheet roof coverings

J42 Single layer polymeric sheet roof coverings


TYPES OF ROOF COVERING

ROOF FINISH MANUFACTURER The following specification is based upon a Bauder system. Roof finish to be by Bauder or similar equal approved



110A WARM DECK ROOF COVERING to general roof areas - see roof plan" Substrate: New Metal Deck (designed and constructed level, with no deflections or back-falls, taking account in the design of the supporting structure for any anticipatedinherent deflection in the metal decking that will occur). Roof falls to be provided by thetapered insulation scheme.- Preparation: As clause 610C." Roof covering system: BAUDER SINGLE PLY THERMOFOL SYSTEM or equalapproved" System manufacturer: Bauder Limited, 70, Landseer Road, Ipswich, Suffolk, IP30DH.

Tel: 01473 257 671. Fax: 01473 230 761. Email: [email protected]: www.bauder.co.uk

" Vapour control layer: Bauder VB20 polyethylene vapour control layer, loose laid and installed as clause 670A." Insulation: BauderPIR Tapered insulation, fire resistant, highly efficient rigidurethane insulation, with zero ODP to achieve U-Value of 0.1w/m/K (refer Clause 230 andtapered drawing). Installation in accordance with the Bauder scheme supplied, as clause680F." Insulation to upstands: Thickness to be confirmed, for all vertical upstands to roof light kerbs, access hatches i.e. builders kerbs (but excluding proprietary insulatedintegrated rooflight units) and changes of level to meet the same thermal value as used for the flat area. Installation as clause 681A." Vertical upstands to insulated cavity wall abutments only: 30 mm thick, PIR flat board, fire resistant, zero ODP, highly efficient rigid urethane insulation. To comply withPart L of the building regulations, the insulation to wall abutments should be 300 mm inheight from the deck surface to the top of the upstand, with the vertical insulation beinginstalled before the flat, so as to retain the insulation at the base. Installation as clause681A" Separating layer (loose laid): N/A" Waterproof membrane: Thermofol U15 FB, 1.5 mm thick polyester reinforced fleecebacked waterproofing membrane, colour Light Grey, fully bonded by cold applied adhesive.Installation as clauses 720C." Lap joints: All joints to be hot air or solvent welded, as clause 730A." Details: -Two dimensional detailing: formed using Thermofol pre-coated, pre-fabricated metal, or non-fleece backed membrane (colour and thickness as used for the flat areas), or used incombination where appropriate. Membrane to be either fully bonded using the appropriateBauder contact adhesive or mechanically fixed according to the construction - refer to theBauder Single Ply Installation Manual for further guidance.Three dimensional detailing: Complex three dimensional detailing to curves, pipes or awkward shapes to be formed using Thermofol un-reinforced D15 membrane. OtherwiseThermofol pre-formed corners must be used at intersections and returns.Detailing generally: to be carried out in accordance with clauses 760, 764A, 765A, 766A,767A, 768A, 769, 770, 780A and the Bauder Single Ply Installation Manual." Surface protection: Bauder Thermofol Anti Slip Walkway 2.0mm thick, un-reinforcedwaterproofing membrane with dark grey anti-slip finish to be loose laid over the finished membrane surface. Attachment as clause 850A." Accessories:- Use of Bauder Mastic Sealant. Application as clause 901A.- Bauder Thermofol lightning conductor clips. Installation, as clause 902A- Internal Rainwater outlet (size as required to match drainage pipe work).Installation as clause 904A" Additional requirements: 210, 310, 510A, 517, 520, 522, 523, 524, 910A, 940,950A.- Latchways Constant Force Post System (supplied direct by Latchways), partnumber 65690-00 approved for use within Bauder Single Ply systems. Refer to Section



N25 and the manufacturer's recommendations and installation guidance. Contact:Latchways plc, Hopton Park, DEVIZES, Wiltshire, SN10 2JP Telephone: +44 (0)1380732700.Email: [email protected]

PERFORMANCE

210A ROOF PERFORMANCE• Roof covering: Secure, free draining and weathertight.

225 AVOIDANCE OF INTERSTITIAL CONDENSATION: WARM AND INVERTED ROOFS• Determine: Interstitial condensation risk of roof construction as recommended in BS 5250,

annex D.

• Vapour control layer: If necessary, provide a suitable membrane so that damage and nuisance from interstitial condensation do not occur.

230 INSULATION

• Requirement: Determine type and thickness of insulation and integral or separate overlayto satisfy the following criteria:- Thermal transmittance of the roof (maximum): 0.15w/m2k.- Compressive strength of insulation (minimum) at 10% compression: tbc - plant areas.- Finished surface: Suitably even, stable and robust to receive roof covering.- Insulation compliance: To a relevant British Standard, or Agr?ment certified.

PRODUCTS

330 TIMBER TRIMS, ETC• Quality: Planed. Free from wane, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack except ambrosia

beetle damage.• Moisture content at time of covering (maximum): 22%.• Preservative treatment: Please note organic solvent based timber preservatives are not

permitted, as these attack bitumen based materials.

355B MECHANICAL FASTENERS, WASHERS, PRESSURE PLATES, ETC

• Type: Respective tube washers to be used for both membrane and insulation.Supplier: Bauder only approves the use of fasteners from manufacturer/supplier companies with associate membership to SPRA.Product reference: Tube fastener - Tube size and fastener type for both membrane andinsulation as recommended by supplier specifically for project and installed in accordanceto their fixing plan. Please note that insulation tubes (round) differ from membrane tubes(rectangular 80 x 40 mm).

EXECUTION GENERALLY

510A ADVERSE WEATHER• General: Do not lay membrane at temperatures below 5?C or in wet or damp conditions

unless effective temporary cover is provided over working area.• Provide temporary covers and drainage as required to keep finished areas of the roof dry• Poor weather: Suspend work in severe or continuously wet weather, unless an effective

temporary roof is provided over the working area. If unavoidable wetting of the constructiondoes occur, take prompt action to minimise and make good any damage.

• Unfinished areas of roof: Temporarily ballast incomplete areas of membrane as necessaryto protect from wind action.



517 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP REQUIREMENTS

• Installation of the Bauder waterproofing system may only be carried out by approvedBauder contractors.

• Workmanship should comply with current Codes of Practice, BS6229 and Bauder Ltdinstallation instructions. All waterproofing materials and system components should besupplied by Bauder Ltd, unless otherwise stated, to be included within the guarantee.Non-compliant workmanship will not be permitted (even if the system is watertight). Allsuch faults must be remedied, before the Guarantee can be issued.

• Any building work which is the responsibility of the roofing contractor and has a bearing onthe life of the Bauder System should be carried out by properly trained and qualifiedtradesmen.

• Any structural damage, peculiarities or defects discovered that might affect theperformance of the Bauder waterproofing, should be reported immediately to the client andBauder in order that they may make a decision in overcoming the problem prior towaterproofing.

• The contractor is to ensure water tightness of the roof at all times.• Where building works are to be carried out by other trades, following completion of the

waterproofing, the contractor must make adequate provision for supplying protection to prevent damage to the new membranes. The final inspection will not be carried out by theindependent surveyor until all associated trades are complete and the roof areas are clear from all debris and protection layers.

• All mechanical and electrical work to plant and equipment should be carried out bycompetent mechanical and electrical qualified tradesmen. All plant is to be reinstated andre-commissioned on completion of the roofing works in accordance with the client'sdetailed specification.

• Any lead work must be carried out by skilled tradesmen and in accordance with currentcodes of practice and the recommendations of the Lead Development Association.

520A INCOMPLETE WORK• End of working day: Provide temporary seal to the deck to prevent water infiltration,

ensuring that the insulation, if present, is protected.• Ensure that the sequence of laying enables temporary sealing of loose membrane edges

to be down on the slope and not against the flow of water • On resumption of work: Cut away tail of membrane from completed area and remove from

roof.

522 PROTECTION AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

• Store rolls of polymeric membrane and associated products in a clean, dry, well ventilatedand cool conditions.

• Store materials designated by the manufacturers as temperature sensitive in facilitieswhere temperature can be maintained at the recommended level.

• Insulation products must be kept dry and protected from wet weather during storage andinstallation.

523 PROTECTION OF WORK• Ensure that from completion of the roof until practical completion:• The roof is not used as a working platform, unless fully protected to the satisfaction of the

CA.• No paints, solvents or other volatile substances harmful to the membrane are allowed to

come into contact with the roof surface.• No building materials stored on the roof.• Finished roof areas are adequately protected from damage by subsequent building

operations



524 HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION• 1. Suitable precautions must be taken to prevent accidents occurring when roofing

systems are being installed.

2. The contractor must ensure that adequate measures are taken to effectivelyprevent injury to members of the public and other persons using the premises.

3. Whenever possible, access to the roof should be made via internal staircasesrather than by temporary means. Where this is not available, it is the responsibility of thecontractor to ensure a safe means of access and a safe working place is establishedthough the risk assessment process.

4. Where microwave equipment is installed at roof level, care must be taken toprevent persons working on the roof from being exposed to large doses of microwaveradiation.

5. Similarly, the contractor should liaise with the client to ensure that there are noextract outlets situated on the roof where noxious or harmful emissions could affectpersons working. Suitable precautions will be necessary to prevent exposure where thissituation arises.

6. The contractor is responsible for providing adequate fire fighting equipment in theform of extinguishers during work on the roof. These should be kept in easily accessiblelocations and be suitably signed.

7. The contractor must ensure that suitable written method statements and riskassessments are available for the work being undertaken. It is essential that working atheight and manual handling methods be fully assessed as roofing materials are heavy andcan cause serious injury.

8. The contractor must ensure that suitable information about the roof covering isprovided to the Client at the end of the work to ensure that work in future can be carried outsafely. This information will form part of the Health and Safety File.

9. All persons working on the roof should be provided with, and wear, suitablepersonal protective equipment and wet weather gear as identified in the risk assessment.Training must be provided to all contract staff on the safe use of the equipment.

10. The installer must observe Product Safety Datasheets and complete COSHHassessments relevant to the materials being used.

11. No work must be carried out on fragile roofs or where there are skylights unless asuitable risk assessment has been completed and precautions taken to prevent personsfalling through fragile roofs and openings.

12. HSE guidance must be followed when carrying out any work involving interferencewith asbestos.

13. Current CDM Regulations must be observed.

530 APPLYING PRIMERS

• Coverage per coat (minimum): As per manufacturer?s recommendations.

• Surface coverage: Even and full.

• Coats: Fully bonded. Allow volatiles to dry off thoroughly between coats.



SUBSTRATES/ VAPOUR CONTROL LAYERS/ WARM DECK ROOF INSULATION

610C SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES• Substrates generally: Secure, clean, dry, smooth, free from corrosion, contaminants,

damage and protrusions.Falls: Where provided, the falls/cross-falls should be designed to 1:40 to achieve minimumfinished falls of 1:80 to comply with drainage requirements of BS 6229:2003 and the SPRAdesign guide (after deflection). No deflections or back-falls present if the deck is designedto achieve a 0? level finished surface.Preliminary work: Complete including:Formation of independent upstands, kerbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases andexpansion joints.Fixing of battens, fillets and anchoring plugs/ strips.Suitibility of substrate: Must not impair roof integrity.Preparation: The new metal deck should be of a suitable type/profile to support the vapour barrier and insulation. Approval of the specified deck should be first obtained from Bauder Limited at specification stage to confirm suitability. The approved waterproofing contractor to Inspect the installed deck and report any issues that may have a detrimental effect uponwaterproofing system to the both the Clients representative and Bauder Limited. If there is any doubt as to the exact requirement Bauder Limited should be contacted for further advice.

640 FIXING TIMBER TRIMS

• Fasteners: fastener type/length appropriate and suitable to particular deck substrate .

• Fixing centres (maximum): 500 mm.

670A LAYING VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER• Loose laid directly on to the decking. The surface should be clean, dry and without any

sharp penetrations, ridges or holes.On inspecting the deck, if the contractor is dissatisfied with any of the proprietary work andconsiders that this could have a detrimental effect on the vapour barrier, both the client andBauder Limited should be informed immediately.All vapour barrier side laps should be overlapped 80mm and sealed using Bauder Tape 03.End laps should be overlapped 100mm and sealed using Bauder Tape 03.The vapour barrier should be sealed at all edges, abutments and roof penetrations. Thevapour barrier should be continued to the maximum height of the insulation and secured tothe structure using Bauder Tape 20 to ensure correct sealing.



680F LAYING WARM DECK ROOF INSULATION• Setting out: Laid strictly in accordance with the manufacturers scheme plan and installation

instructions. Bauder cannot be held responsible for the drainage performance of taperedinsulation schemes applied to an inappropriate deck surface and it is the responsibility of the installing contractor to check the roof deck surface and report any discrepancies.

- Long edges: Fully supported. (Where metal decking is specified, the longedges must be fully support and run at right angles to metal deck troughs).

- End edges: Fully supported.- Joints: close butted together.- End joints: Stagger.

Thermal performance: Refer to Manufacturers Tapered Insulation Layout Plan for detailsof ?U? value achieved by the scheme.Before installing: No tapered boards should be laid on site without a copy of the latestscheme to hand. Contractors should always refer to the Manufacturers Tapered InsulationLayout Plan regarding the recommended start point and any multi-layer build-up of boardsand the layout of boards. If contractors are unsure of the correct plan being on site theyshould check with the Manufacturers Technical Department ASAP.Wastage: All off-cuts over 300mm must be considered as usable and are included as suchwithin the scheme plan. Attachment: Mechanically fixed using suitable insulation tube fasteners, as clause 355B.Care should be taken to adhere to the handling, storage and installation guidelines given inthe product technical information. Boards should be mechanically fastened to the deckusing the recommended pattern shown in the manufacturer?s literature with a suitablefastener. Bauder only approves the use of fasteners from companies with associatemembership to SPRA. Fasteners should be selected in accordance with advice given bythe appropriate supplier, ensuring their suitability to comply to the length of guaranteeoffered for the whole system. All fasteners should be installed in accordance with therecommendations given by the manufacturer, as clause 355B.When calculating the required insulation thickness to BS EN ISO 6946: 2007, the type of mechanical fixing used may change the thickness of insulation required. The calculationsundertaken by Bauder Ltd assume the use of a telescopic tube type fastener with a thermalconductivity of 1.00 W/m?K or less, the effect of which is insignificant in the overallcalculation.Specialist tooling and accessories are available for purchase from these suppliers. Allfasteners should be installed in accordance with the recommendations given by themanufacturer.Protection to exposed edges of insulation: A hard timber edge or similar protection shouldbe incorporated at all exposed edges. See clauses 330 & 640.Completion: Boards must be in good condition, well-fitting and stable.

681A LAYING WARM DECK ROOF INSULATION• Boards should be mechanically fixed to the upstand using suitably sized tube fasteners

and screws through the vertical surface of the vapour barrier into the underlyingsubstrate/structure. Joints to be close butted.Care should be taken to adhere to the handling, storage and installation guidelines given inthe product technical information. Boards should be mechanically fastened to the deckusing the recommended pattern shown in the manufacturer?s literature with a suitablysized fastener.Bauder only approves the use of fasteners from manufacturers with associate membershipto SPRA. Tube fasteners should be selected in accordance with advice given by theappropriate supplier, ensuring their suitability to comply to the length of guarantee offeredfor the whole system. All fasteners should be installed in accordance with therecommendations given by the manufacturer, as clause 355B.Protective hard edge treated timber battens must be used at all right angled edges i.e. topsof parapet walls or abutment upstands, in conjunction with the Bauder coated metal



WATERPROOF MEMBRANES/ ACCESSORIES

720C ADHESIVE BONDING OF WATERPROOF MEMBRANE• Attachment: To be bonded directly to the surface of the Insulation. The adhesive for this

application must be Bauder Spray Contact Adhesive. The adhesive is to be applied to theupper surface of the insulation in a full and continuous covering and to the fleece undersideof the membrane in a full and continuous covering. The adhesive coverage rate isapproximately 3-4 m?/kg, for a two coat application, however guidance should be soughtfrom Bauder Ltd when installing onto Bauder tapered insulation. It is essential that thesurface of the insulation is clean, dry and free from dust etc., before applying the adhesive.Care should be taken to ensure that the adhesive does not come into contact with theareas of the membrane that will require welding. The coated membrane should be applieddirectly onto the adhesive coated substrate after approximately 5-10 minutes of it beingapplied and then pressure rolled over its full surface area. All side and end laps to be hotair welded. Detailed instructions for the installation of the membrane can be found in theBauder Installation Guide. Installation shall be carried out in accordance with the detailsgiven in the Bauder Installation Guide.Note: A range of approved hot air welding machines and accessories specifically designedfor this operation are listed in the Bauder Installation Guide.Installation: Installation shall only be carried out by Bauder trained installers in strictaccordance with the details given in the Bauder Installation Guide.

730A WELDED JOINTING OF WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

• Laying: Loose lay, do not wrinkle or stretch.- Side and end joints: manufacturer?s/ supplier?s recommendation

- Laps (minimum): manufacturer?s/ supplier?s recommendation- Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces for full width of joint.- Sealing: Weld together (Hot Air or Solvent welded).

Condition at completion: Fully sealed, smooth, weatherproof and free draining.Accessories: None

760 PERIMETER OF MEMBRANE• General: Secure membrane at roof edge conditions, changes of plane, curb flashings,

upstands to roof lights, etc. with mechanical fasteners.

764A PRE-FORMED PRE-COATED METAL FLASHINGS

• Thermoplan Pre-Coated Metal sheet is available from Bauder for the formation of fabricated metal flashings, Trims and Terminations. A list of fabrication companies whoalready hold this material for bespoke flashing fabrication is available from Bauder Ltd. Alldetail designs if not in accordance with the design shown within our detail drawing attachedmust be submitted to Bauder for approval prior to fabrication.

• All Thermoplan Coated Metal flashings must be mechanically attached usingrecommended fastenings installed at 250mm centres. The flashing must be sealed usingThermoplan Tape 20 to the structure as shown in the attached detail drawing to ensureminimum air passage through or below the flashing. The chosen fastener supplier can giveguidance as to the type of fastener required (fasteners must have counter sunk headstyle).

765A PERIMETER DETAILS FOR THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANES• Upstands, edge trims, drips, kerbs, etc: Secure Bauder Thermoplan preformed pre-coated

metal sections to roof structure with mechanical fasteners.• Roof membrane: Dress over perimeter profile. Overlap beyond fasteners as per

manufacturers recommendations• Sealing: Weld together.



766A WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE (TWO DIMENSIONAL DETAILS• Upstands, edge details, flashings etc: Detail work requiring membrane is to be carried out

with Bauder Thermoplan membrane restrained beneath or welded directly to Thermoplan-T Coated Metal as shown in the attached detail drawings. Thermoplan Pre-FormedCorners must used for the formation of internal or external corner details.

• Special consideration must be given to the preparation required prior to hot air welding of the all laps within the Bauder Thermoplan System. Thermoplan FPO Cleaner/Activator must be used for this operation.

• A list of suitable Hot Air Welding machines and accessories specifically designed for thisoperation is contained in the Bauder Installation Guide.

767A WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE (THREE DIMENSIONAL DETAILS

• Pipes, Roof Penetrations etc.: Detail work requiring the membrane to be used in irregular angles is to be carried out with Bauder Thermoplan TL Non Reinforced membrane or Thermoplan Pre-Formed Accessory detailing items. Special consideration must be given tothe preparation required prior to the hot air welding of all detailing joints within the Bauder Thermoplan System.

• Special consideration must be given to the preparation required prior to hot air welding of the all laps within the Bauder Thermoplan System. Thermoplan FPO Cleaner/Activator must be used for this operation.

• A list of suitable Hot Air Welding machines and accessories specifically designed for thisoperation is contained in the Bauder Installation Guide.

768A COVER STRAPS TO THERMOPLAN-T METAL• Provision should be made to allow a 4mm gap between abutting sections in the

Thermoplan-T metal edge trim, for expansion/contraction. Supply and install Thermoplan T-SV reinforced cover straps, 200mm in width fixed over the joints in the Thermoplan-Tmetal edge trim to provide a smooth neat finish. The membrane should be welded to thesurface of the Thermoplan metal leaving the centre section of the cover strap un-weldedand Thermoplan cleaner/activator should be used to prepare the surface prior to welding.The cover strap should be cut to remove visible 90? corners.

769 DETAILS GENERALLY

• The minimum recommended height for constructing waterproofing details is 150mm fromthe top of the waterproofing. Special attention should be paid to all structures such asrooflights, counter-flashings, window and door cills etc. These may have to be raised toenable a 150mm waterproofing detail to be formed. We cannot take responsibility for water ingress over waterproofing details the do not meet the minimum required height.

770 PERIMETER DETAILS FOR THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANES• Upstands, edge trims, drips, kerbs, etc: Form flashings from waterproof membrane

material.• Roof membrane: Terminate in horizontal plane immediately adjacent to change in direction

and secure with mechanical fasteners.• Flashings: Dress over perimeter profile. Overlap horizontal roof membrane beyond

perimeter securement by minimum in accordance with the manufacturer?srecommendations.

• Sealing: Weld together.



780A ROOF PENETRATIONS THROUGH THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANES• Roof membrane: Cut around penetrations and secure to deck.

Flanged sleeve:-Type: Form from Thermofol D 15 un-reinforced membrane, complete with base

flange.-Installation: Dress over and around penetration.-Roof membrane overlap to flange (minimum): 50 mm beyond fasteners.-Sealing: Weld flange to roof membrane.-Protection to top edge of sleeve: Flashing or weathering cravat.

SURFACING

850A LAYING MEMBRANE WALKWAYSAttachment: The membrane should be heat welded around it?s full perimeter to the surfaceof the finished waterproofing.

ACCESSORIES

901A MASTIC SEALANTProvision should be made to allow for the use of Bauder Sealant in conjunction withBauder Sealant Primer at all abutments with the Thermofol system, and any other instances where a mastic seal is required.It is imperative that the primer is used to prepare the surfaces effectively to enable a longlasting key with the sealant.

902A LIGHTNING CONDUCTORIf a lightning conductor tape is to be installed upon completion of the Thermofol system useeither the Type 2 [Uncoated Conductor Tape] or Type 4 [Coated Conductor Tape]conductor clips incorporating the Thermofol pad fully welded to the Thermofol membraneat 1m centres. The welding of the clip to the membrane is only to be carried out by theApproved Contractor. The commissioning of the lightning conductor is to be carried out bya specialist company in conjunction with the roofing contractor.

904A INTERNAL OUTLETInternal rainwater outlet/s (suitable for PVC membranes) of the correct size is to beinstalled through the system and deck after creation of a suitable size diameter opening.The outlet should be secured using suitable fasteners.All vapour barrier edges should be sealed to the deck using Tape 03. Connection to therainwater waste pipe should be made by others, details for this connection can be found inthe product data pages. The outlet is designed to be connected into the standard spigotend connector on the rainwater waste pipe. The outlet spigot is universal length to copewith differing insulation thickness?s and will require cutting down to the correct length. The Thermofol waterproofing membrane should be welded on to the outlets pre-attached PVCmembrane (if present) or to the body of the outlet. Install the clip-fix leaf grille.



COMPLETION

910A INSPECTIONSInterim and final roof inspections - These are a requirement where workmanship isincluded within the Bauder Guarantee and must to be carried out in strict accordance withthe manufacturer?s requirements. It is the responsibility of the approved contractor toadvise the appointed Bauder Site Technician when the roof is ready for ?Final Inspection?.A Final Inspection of the waterproofing should be carried out prior to any landscaping beinginstalled i.e. where green roofs, paved or ballasted finishes are specified to ensure that anydamage or defects are rectified.Any waterproofing covered by landscaping that has not been inspected and approved byBauder Ltd will not be eligible for guarantee.Where a ?Product only? guarantee is offered, there may still be random inspections carriedby Bauder Ltd for the purposes of monitoring general workmanship standards, but these donot form part of any warranty ?sign off? process.Please also refer to preliminaries / general conditions.Site contact details - Site Technician Jez Lound, Tel: 07801 688323Technical Contact Details - Area Sales Manager: David Harland, Tel: 07595 653704

920 ELECTRONIC ROOF INTEGRITY TEST

• Testing authority: The roofing contractor.

• Timing of test: Prior to, and on completion of access by other trades.

• Condition of roof prior to testing:- Waterproof membrane complete to a stage where integrity can be tested.- Surface: Clean.

• Test results and warranty: Submit on completion of testing.

940 COMPLETION• Roof areas: Clean.

- Outlets: Clear.• Work necessary to provide a weathertight finish: Complete.• Storage of materials on finished surface: Not permitted.• Completed membrane: Do not damage. Protect from traffic and adjacent or high level

working.

950A GUARANTEE

• A 20 year guarantee is to be provided upon completion following a Final Inspection byBauder. Details regarding the full terms and conditions of this guarantee are availableseparately from Bauder Ltd upon request. This system must installed by a trained Bauder installer to be eligible for guarantee.



K10

Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ ceilings

K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ ceilings


TYPES OF DRY LINING

205I LINING ON TIMBER / STEEL STRUCTURAL SOFFIT underside of timber trusses, profiledmetal deck and steel structure supporting same.

• Background: Timber rafter /steel beams.

• Linings: 2 x 15mm fireline board or similar to acheive 1 hour fire rated protection.- Fixing: Screwed to underside of rafters. Fixed to steelwork with proprietpry metal firringsystem or timber grounds .

• Finishing: Seamless jointing.- Primer/ Sealer: Not required.- Accessories: none.

• Other requirements: 50mm stonewool insulation. Sealing to adjacent surfaces achieve afire rated lining where shown on drawings .

Page 119 of 266 K10 Project Fitzroy


215A SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM all areas

• Manufacturer: British Gypsum, East Leake, Loughborough, Leicestershire LE12 6HXWebsite: www.british-gypsum.com Tel: 0844 800 1991 Fax: 0844 561 8816E-Mail: [email protected] Gypsum contact: Chris Nattress, Project Specification Manager. Tel: 07810 378567,e-mail: [email protected] reference: CasoLine MF.Lining board: 15 mm duraline plasterboard or equalapproved. Board to be Duraline MR for toilets / bathrooms etc. .- Finishing: 2-3mm skim coat.Primer/ Sealer: Primer to painted areas.

- Accessories: Beads/ stops.• Suspension system: As recommended by lining manufacturer to complete the ceiling

system and achieve specified performance.- Grid type: Contractor's choice.- Hangers: Type recommended by board manufacturer.Length: see section drawings.

- Top fixing: To suit structural soffit of profiled metal deck shuttering with suitable fixings.

• Access units: Required - M&E engineer to advise on locations and numbers. ProvideBlazedoor PF/BF plaster beaded access panels with plastered door, hinged and lockable.Manufactured by M&M Access Ltd5 Quarry Park CloseMoulton Park Industrial estateNorthamptonNN3 6QB.

• Integrated services fittings: Hangers and housings for linear luminaires.

• Other requirements: 12mm wbp plywood backing to all areas.

• System performance:- Structural: The ceiling system must safely support all anticipated loads including servicesfittings.Test standard: To BS EN 13964.Uniformly distributed load (maximum): 0.6 kN/m?.Additional loads/ pressures: plywood linings, Luminaires and ventilation units as M&Eengineers drawings and schedules.Deflection of grid between points of support (maximum): 0.0025 x span.

- Fire resistance: Not required.- Airborne sound insulation (complete floor and ceiling assembly):Weighted sound reduction index, Rw (minimum), to BS EN ISO 717-1: Not applicable.Other requirements: Additional supports as recommended by manufacturers to carryweight of linings as required above. .

275A ENCASEMENT ON FRAMING to steel beams in voids - see dwg 2342-22-D-200• Framework: contractor choice if required..• Linings: 15mm fireline board.

- Fixing: Contractor's choice.

• Finishing: Seamless jointing.

• Other requirements: nom 25mm insulation lining and voids filled with isowool inaccordnace with robust details to prevent flanking sound transmission .



275B ENCASEMENT ON FRAMING to steel columns• Framework: to contractors choice timber or metal firrings ..• Linings: 15mm duraline boards on 12mm wbp plywood.

- Fixing: Contractor's choice.• Finishing: Skim coat plaster.

- Accessories: movement joint connection to hardwall plastered surfaces.• Other requirements: nom 25mm insulation lining and voids filled with isowool in

accordnace with robust details to prevent flanking sound transmission .

GENERAL/ PREPARATION

300 ENVIRONMENT - ISO14001British Gypsum has ISO 14001 certification across the entire business including: mining,manufacture, distribution and all ancillary servics to support the business function.

301 ENVIRONMENT - BREEAM RATED PROJECTSPrior to making any amendments to British Gypsum specifications consult with the designteam responsible for the project for guidance. BREEAM (or similar environmentalframework) ratings may be downgraded as a result of changes to this specification.

305 COMPLIANCE WITH PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS• Testing/ Assessment: Submit UKAS accredited laboratory reports for the following: Fire

resistance: Partitions (including deflection heads and doorsets) and suspended ceilings(including access units)..

• Materials, components and details: As used in testing/ assessment reports. If discrepancies arise, give notice.


• Framing: Accurately position and securely fix to give full support to:- Partition heads running parallel with, but offset from main structural supports.- Fixtures, fittings and service outlets. Mark framing positions clearly and accurately onlinings.

- Board edges and lining perimeters, as recommended by board manufacturer to suit typeand performance of lining.

345 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS FOR PARTITION HEADSProvide or ensure provision of accurately positioned and securely fixed framing to receivepartition heads running parallel with, but offset from main structural supports.

355 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS FOR FIXTURES AND FITTINGSProvide or ensure provision of accurately positioned and securely fixed framing to supportfixtures, fittings and services. After fixing boards, mark positions of framing for followingtrades.

365 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS FOR BOARD EDGES AND PERIMETERSProvide or ensure provision of additional framing, accurately positioned and securely fixed,to give full support to board edges and lining perimeters in accordance with boardmanufacturer's recommendations.

375 NEW WET LAID BASES• Dpcs: Install under full width of partitions/ freestanding wall linings.

- Material: Bituminous sheet or plastics.



385 SERVICE PENETRATIONSThe dry lining contractor must liaise with the Main Contractor and other contractors toensure that fire resistance and other specified performance requirements are not impairedby service penetrations.In particular:Form framed openings accurately for grouped services, ducts, etc. allowing for associatedfire barriers.Provide insulation backings to recessed electrical outlets and switches as recommendedby the plasterboard manufacturer.

COMPONENTS

INSTALLATION

435 DRY LININGS GENERALLY

• General: Use fixing, jointing, sealing and finishing materials, components and installationmethods recommended by board manufacturer.

• Cutting plasterboards: Neatly and accurately without damaging core or tearing paper facing.- Cut edges: Minimize and position at internal angles wherever possible. Mask with boundedges of adjacent boards at external corners.

• Fixings boards: Securely and firmly to suitably prepared and accurately levelledbackgrounds.

• Finishing: Neatly to give flush, smooth, flat surfaces free from bowing and abrupt changesof level.

435A DRY LININGS GENERALLY• Fixing, jointing and finishing materials and accessories, where not specified otherwise, to

be as recommended by the board manufacturer.

• Handle and store materials in accordance with BS 82122, section 5. Do not use damagedboards.

• Use operatives properly trained for dry lining work and who have attended a recognisedtraining scheme.

• Fix boards only in areas which have been made weathertight. Prevent frost damage.

• Cut boards neatly and accurately without damage to core or tearing of paper facing. Keepcut edges to a minimum and position at internal angles wherever possible.Mask with bound edges of adjacent boards at external corners.

• Fix boards securely and firmly to suitably prepared and accurately levelled backgrounds.Set heads of fastenings in a depression; do not break paper or gypsum core.Finish neatly to give flush, smooth, flat surfaces free from bowing and abrupt changes of level.

445 CEILINGS• Sequence: Fix boards to ceilings before installing dry lined walls and partitions.• Orientation of boards: Fix with bound edges at right angles to supports and with ends

staggered in adjacent rows.• Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.

485 SUSPENDED CEILING GRIDS

• Setting out: Accurately aligned and level.- Grid members and hangers: Centres to suit specified linings and imposed loads.- Additional grid members: Provide bracing and stiffening at upstands, partition heads,access hatches, etc.

• Fixing: Securely at perimeters, grid joints, top and bottom hanger fixings.



495 MINERAL WOOL INSULATION TO METAL STUD PARTITIONS/LININGSFit securely with closely butted joints, leaving no gaps. Unless the insulation is of a self supporting slab type fitted between studs, fix at head of frame using timber battens or proprietary clips.

505 INSTALLING MINERAL WOOL INSULATION• Fitting insulation: Closely butted joints and no gaps. Use fasteners to prevent slumping or

displacement.• Services:

- Electrical cables overlaid by insulation: Sized accordingly.- Ceilings: Cut insulation around electrical fittings, etc.

510 SEALING GAPS AND AIR PATHS

• Location of sealant: To perimeter abutments and around openings.- Pressurized shafts and ducts: At board-to-board and board-to-metal frame junctions.

• Application: To clean, dry and dust free surfaces as a continuous bead with no gaps.- Gaps greater than 6 mm between floor and underside of plasterboard: After sealing, fillwith jointing compound.

526A CAVITY FIRE BARRIERS WITHIN SINGLE FRAME PARTITIONSMaintain continuity of fire barrier formed by perimeter channels using short lengths of closefitting plasterboard screwed into the web across joints in channel sections and aroundservice holes,except where:- The partitions abut plasterboard linings or masonry- Timber sole or head plates are fittedForm continuous vertical barriers using lengths of close fitting plasterboard screwed intothe web of individual studs or channels.

545A FIRE BARRIER

• Manufacturer: Rockwool Ltd.- Web: www.rockwool.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Rockwool Fire Barrier Slab

• Accessories: Rockwool Acoustic Intumescent Sealant

555 FIRE STOPPING AT PERIMETERS OF DRY LINING SYSTEMS• Material: Tightly packed mineral wool or intumescent mastic/ sealant.• Application: To perimeter abutments to provide a complete barrier to smoke and flame.

555A FIRE STOPPINGSeal any gaps at junctions of linings and cavity barriers with perimeter abutments, servicepenetrations, etc. using tightly packed stone mineral wool or fire resisting/intumescentsealant,to prevent penetration of smoke and flame.

560 JOINTS BETWEEN BOARDS

• Tapered edged plasterboards:- Bound edges: Lightly butted.- Cut/ unbound edges: 3 mm gap.

• Square edged plasterboards: 3 mm gap.• Square edged fibre reinforced gypsum boards: 5 mm gap.



560A JOINTS BETWEEN BOARDSGyproc plasterboards: Lightly butt boards together.Square edged Gyproc plasterboards to be finished with Artex textured compound : 3mmgap.Glasroc F fibre reinforced gypsum boards: Lightly butt boards together.

565 VERTICAL JOINTS• Joints: Centre on studs.

- Partitions: Stagger joints on opposite sides of studs.- Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.

570 HORIZONTAL JOINTS

• Surfaces exposed to view: Horizontal joints not permitted. Seek instructions where heightof partition/ lining exceeds maximum available length of board.

• Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers by at least 600 mm.

• Edges of boards: Support using additional framing.- Two layer boarding: Support edges of outer layer.

570A HORIZONTAL JOINTSHorizontal joints will not be permitted in surfaces exposed to view except where the heightof partition/lining exceeds the maximum available length of board. Agree positions of jointswhere not specified. For two layer boarding, stagger joints between layers by at least 600mm. If previous layer of plank plasterboard, stagger joints between layers by 300mm.Ensure that edges of boards are supported by additional framing. For two layer boardingframing must support the outer layer.

591A FIXING PLASTERBOARD TO METAL SUPPORTSPartitions/linings/casings:Face layer: Fix securely to all supports at maximum 300mm centres (reduced to 200mm atexternal angles where recommended by the board manufacturer)Previous layer of plank plasterboard: Install with long edges at right angles to studs, and fixsecurely to each stud using two screws.Other previous layers: Fix securely to supports around the perimeter of each board atmaximum 300mm centres.Ceilings: Fix securely to all supports at maximum 230mm centres (reduced to 150mm atboard ends and at lining perimeters where recommended by the board manufacturer).Fix working from the centre of each board. Position screws not less than 13mm from cutedges and 10mm from bound edges of boards. Set heads in a depression; do not breakpaper or gypsum core.

610 FIXING PLASTERBOARD TO TIMBER• Fixing to timber: Securely at the following centres (maximum):

- Nails: 150 mm.- Screws to partitions/ wall linings: 300 mm. Reduce to 200 mm at external angles.- Screws to ceilings: 230 mm.

• Position of nails/ screws from edges of boards (minimum):- Bound edges: 10 mm.- Cut/ unbound edges: 13 mm.

• Position of nails/ screws from edges of timber supports (minimum): 6 mm.



FINISHING

650 LEVEL OF DRY LINING ACROSS JOINTS• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.• Joint deviations: Measure from faces of adjacent boards using methods and straightedges

(450 mm long with feet/ pads) to BS 8212, clause 3.3.5.- Tapered edge joints:Permissible deviation (maximum) across joints when measured with feet resting onboards: 3 mm.

- External angles:Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 4 mm.

- Internal angles:Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 5 mm.

670 SEAMLESS JOINTING TO PLASTERBOARDS

• Cut edges of boards: Lightly sand to remove paper burrs.

• Filling and taping: Fill joints, gaps and internal angles with jointing compound and cover with continuous lengths of paper tape, fully bedded.

• Protection of edges/ corners: Reinforce external angles, stop ends, etc. with specifiededge/ angle bead.

• Finishing: Apply jointing compound. Feather out each application beyond previousapplication to give a flush, smooth, seamless surface.

• Nail/ screw depressions: Fill with jointing compound to give a flush surface.

• Minor imperfections: Remove by light sanding.

671A TAPED SEAMLESS FINISH TO PLASTERBOARDManufacturer: British GypsumJoint compound: One or more of the following Gyproc products:- Easi-Fill- Easi-Fill 45- Joint Filler - Joint Cement- Ready Mix Joint Cement- ProMix LITE Joint CementJoints/gaps/internal corners: Gyproc Joint TapeExternal corners: Gyproc Drywall Metal Angle Bead or Gyproc No-Coat Ultraflex 325.Primer/sealer: Two coats Gyproc Drywall Sealer where vapour control required (willprovide vapour resistance only and does not meet performance requirementsfor moisture resistant grade boards as defined in BS/EN520, type H1) and one coatGyproc Drywall Primer elsewhere. Alternatively, one coat Gyproc Drywall Sealer for simple steam stripping of wall coverings (except for vinyl or other low permeabilitywall coverings) at a later date. Lightly sand cut edges of boards to remove paper burrs.Fill all joints, gaps and internal angles with joint compound and cover with continuouslengths of tape, fully bedded. Reinforce external angles, stop ends, etc. with thespecified bead/corner tape.When set, cover with joint compound, feathered out to give a flush, smooth, seamlesssurface.Spot nail/screw depressions with joint compound to give a flush surface.Fill minor indents. After joint, angle and spotting treatments have dried, lightly sand toremove any minor imperfections.Apply specified primer/sealer to give a continuous consistent texture to surface of boards.



681A SKIM COAT PLASTER FINISHManufacturer and reference: British Gypsum, Thistle Board Finish or Thistle Multi-Finish.Thickness: 2mm.Reinforcement:Joints/gaps/internal corners: Thistle ProTape FT50 or FT100, or any gaps exceeding 3mmpre-filled and reinforced using Gyproc Joint Tape.External corners: Thistle Thin Coat Angle Bead or Thin Coat Mini Mesh Bead.Edges: Thistle Thin Coat Plaster Stop Bead to all door and window surrounds.Fill and tape all joints except where coincident with metal beads.Trowel/float to a tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abrupt changes of level or trowel marks.

692 RIGID BEADS/STOPS

• Internal: To BS EN 13658-1.

• External: To BS EN 13658-2.

695 INSTALLING BEADS/ STOPS

• Cutting: Neatly using mitres at return angles.

• Fixing: Securely using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line and level,ensuring full contact of wings with substrate.

• Finishing: After joint compounds/ plasters have been applied, remove surplus materialwhile still wet from surfaces of beads exposed to view.



K11

Rigid sheet flooring/ sheathing/ decking/ sarking/linings/ casings

K11 Rigid sheet flooring/ sheathing/ decking/ sarking/ linings/ casings


TYPES OF FLOORING/ SHEATHING/ DECKING/ SARKING/ LINING/ CASINGS

110 WOOD-BASED SHEETS GENERALLY

• Standard: To BS EN 13986.- Evidence of compliance: Submit.

325 PARTICLEBOARD FLOORING for roof walkways and accessways to plant• Substrate: 100 x 50 joists over timber trusses.

- Additional supports: As clause 930.• Flooring: Particleboard to BS EN 312, Type P5.

- Thickness: 22 mm x 2400 wide where shown on roof plan .- Edges: Tongued and grooved all edges.- Recycled content: Contractor's choice.- Other requirements: none.

• Setting out: Long edges running across joists. End joints central over joists and staggered.• Fixing to joists:

- Fasteners: 50 mm x 8 gauge wood screws into pilot holes.- Fixing centres (maximum):Around floor perimeter and along short edges of each board: 200 mm.Along intermediate supports: 400 mm.

- Fixing distance from edges: 25 mm from long edges and minimum 10 mm from shortedges.

• Joint treatment: glued.• Expansion provision:

- Clear expansion gap around floor perimeter of floor area and any upstands: 1 mm per metre run of floor, with a minimum gap of 10 mm.

- Intermediate expansion/ movement joints: As recommended by flooring manufacturer.

815A PLYWOOD for lining under plasterboards

• Substrate: timber framework / metal suspended suppoert system.- Additional supports: as required.

• Plywood: Manufactured to an approved national standard.- Manufacturer/ Supplier: Contractor's choice.- Bonding quality to BS EN 314-2: Class 2.- Appearance class to BS EN 635: Class II.- Finish: Sanded.- Thickness: 12mm.- Edges: Square.- Treatment: none.Fixing to supports:

- Fasteners: contractor choice.- Fixing centres (maximum):Around board edges: 150 mm.Along intermediate supports: 300 mm.

- Fixing distance from edges (minimum): 10 mm.• Joint treatment: none.



WORKMANSHIP

910 INSTALLATION GENERALLY• Timing: Building to be weathertight before fixing boards internally.• Moisture content of timber supports (maximum): 18%.• Joints between boards: Accurately aligned, of constant width and parallel to perimeter

edges.• Methods of fixing, and fasteners: As section Z20 where not specified otherwise.


• Additional studs, noggings/ dwangs (Scot) and battens:- Provision: In accordance with board manufacturer's recommendations and as follows:Tongue and groove jointed rigid board areas: To all unsupported perimeter edges.Butt jointed rigid board areas: To all unsupported edges.

- Size: Not less than 50 mm wide and of adequate thickness.- Quality of timber: As for adjacent timber supports.- Treatment (where required): As for adjacent timber supports.

940 BOARD MOISTURE CONTENT AND CONDITIONING• Moisture content of boards at time of fixing: Appropriate to end use.• Conditioning regime: Submit proposals.

950 MOISTURE CONTENT TESTING• Test regime and equipment: Submit proposals.• Test results: Submit record of tests and results.

960 FIXING GENERALLY

• Boards/ sheets: Fixed securely to each support without distortion and true to line and level.

• Fasteners: Evenly spaced in straight lines and, unless otherwise recommended by boardmanufacturer, in pairs across joints.- Distance from edge of board/ sheet: Sufficient to prevent damage.

• Surplus adhesive: Removed as the work proceeds.

975 METAL WALL FRAMING• Setting out: Framing accurately aligned, vertical and securely fixed to surrounding structure

at maximum 600 mm centres. All board edges supported.

976 MINERAL WOOL INSULATION TO METAL FRAMING• Installation: Neat and secure with close butted joints and no gaps. Where insulation is not

self supporting, fixed at head of frame using clips or other suitable proprietary fixings.

980 OPEN JOINTS

• Perimeter joints, expansion joints and joints between boards: Free from plaster, mortar droppings and other debris.

• Temporary wedges and packings: Removed on completion of board fixing.

990 ACCESS PANELS• Size and position: Agree before boards are fixed.• Additional noggings/ dwangs (Scot), battens, etc: Provide and fix as necessary.



K32

Panel cubicles/ duct and wall linings/ screens

K32 Panel cubicles/ duct and wall linings/ screens


140 DUCT/ WALL LININGS – PANELS ONLY sanitaryware IPS fitted to softwood framing

• Manufacturer: contractors choice.- Product reference: Trespa or similar approved soldi grade laminate .

• Panels:- Type: For IPS units as detailed on drawings and schedules .Width (coordinating): see schedules.

- Core material: solid grade laminate.Thickness: 12/13 mm.

- Facings: plain colour from standard range .Colour/ Pattern/ Species: tbc.

- Edge treatment: Polished bevel, chamfer to top edge.- Reaction to fire (minimum classification, finished panel): Building Regulations, class 0.

• Fasteners: anti tamper screws (pin torx) to fixed panels. Hinged access panels with 2nosuited key locks.

• Framing/ Support:- Duct panels: Softwood or metal stud frame, site fabricated.- Wall panels: Softwood or metal stud frame site fabricated.

• Flashgap panels: same material as face.• Skirting: plinth as face material - see details.

180 DUCT PANEL SUPPORT FRAMING – SITE FABRICATED SOFTWOOD for IPS units• Framing: Softwood, free from decay and active insect attack and with no knots wider than

half the width of the section.- Finished size: As panel manufacturer's recommendations.- Moisture content at time of fixing (maximum): 18%.- Spacing (centres): As panel manufacturer's recommendations.- Method of fixing: screwed.

• Treatment: As section Z12 and Wood Protection Association Commodity SpecificationFR3, Type HR (Humidity resistant).

210 SAMPLES

• General: Before placing orders submit representative samples of the following: typical duct.

• Delivered materials/ products: To match samples.

250 INSTALLATION• Programming: Do not install cubicles or duct/ wall panels before building is weathertight,

wet trades have finished their work, wall and floor finishes are complete, and the building is well dried out.

• Accuracy: Set out to ensure frames and/ or panels and doors are plumb, level andaccurately aligned.

• Modifications: Do not cut, plane or sand prefinished components except where shown ondrawings.

• Fixing: Secure components using methods and fasteners recommended by the cubicle/panel manufacturer. Prevent pulling away, bowing or other distortions to frames, panelsand doors.

• Moisture and thermal movement: Make adequate allowance for future movement.



K40

Demountable suspended ceilings

K40 Demountable suspended ceilings

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.




TYPES OF CEILING SYSTEM

115E UNIT SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM SHOWER ROOMS• Ceiling system manufacturer: Rockfon, A Trading Division of Rockwool Limited.

- Web: www.rockfon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] .

- Product reference: Not applicable.• Ceiling:

- Infill units: As clause 265B.- Soffit height above finished floor level: refer to drawings, minimum 2400mm.

• Grid:- Form: Interlocking.- Exposure: Exposed.

• Access: Infill units fully demountable.• Suspension system: As clause 250B.• Perimeter trim: As clause 260.• Accessories: None.• Integrated services fittings: None.• Other requirements:

- All visible cut edges to be painted with Rockfon Edge Paint; and- All ceiling tiles to be clipped to the grid in accordance with the requirements of HTM60 .

115F UNIT SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM OFFICES

• Ceiling system manufacturer: Rockfon, A Trading Division of Rockwool Limited.- Web: www.rockfon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] .

- Product reference: Not applicable.

• Ceiling:- Infill units: As clause 265D.- Soffit height above finished floor level: refer to drawings, minimum 2550mm.

• Grid:- Form: Interlocking.- Exposure: Exposed.

• Access: Infill units fully demountable.• Suspension system: As clause 250A.• Perimeter trim: As clause 260.• Accessories: None.• Integrated services fittings: None.• Other requirements:

- All visible cut edges to be painted with Rockfon Edge Paint; and- All ceiling tiles to be clipped to the grid in accordance with the requirements of HTM60 .



GENERAL/ PERFORMANCE

205 COMPLIANCE WITH PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS• Testing/ assessment: Submit UKAS accredited laboratory reports for the following: Electric

al continuity and earth bonding .• Materials, components and details: Use those used in the test and identified in the

assessment reports. If discrepancies arise, give notice.

210 ENVIRONMENT• Environmental classification to BS EN 13964: Class A.

220 STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE GENERALLY

• Loads: The ceiling system must safely support all anticipated loads, including servicesfittings:- Class: 1.- Additional loads/ pressures to be sustained by ceiling system: None.Ceiling system subject to wind pressure: No.

• Deflection (maximum) between points of support:- Span under 1200 mm: Span/400.- Span 1200-1800 mm: Span/500.- Span over 1800 mm: Span/600.

• Test standard: To BS EN 13964.

225 FIRE PERFORMANCE GENERALLY• Completed ceiling system: Not intended for fire protection.• Surface spread of flame ratings:

- Ceiling soffit surfaces: To Building Regulations, Class 0.- Ceiling void surfaces: To Building Regulations Class 0.

• Fire resistance:- Overall fire resistance: To BS 476-21, 60/60/60 minutes stability/ integrity/ insulation .- Ceiling resistance: To BS 476-22, 30 minutes integrity and insulation .- Other protection: None.

• Test reports or assessments: Include details of performance related to the particular elements of construction.- Ceilings with integrated luminaires: Test/ assess with luminaires in place.

COMPONENTS

245 STANDARDS• Components: To BS EN 10346.

- Aluminium sheet, strip and plate: To BS EN 485.- Aluminium bars, tubes and sections: To relevant parts of BS EN 515, BS EN 573, BS EN755 and BS EN 12020.



250A SUSPENSION SYSTEM GENERALLY• Manufacturer: Rockfon, A Trading Division of Rockwool Limited.

- Web: www.rockfon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected]. .

- Product reference: RockLink 24 suspension system.• Extent of system: Include all hangers, fixings, main runners, cross members, primary

channels, perimeter trims, splines, noggings, clips, bracing, bridging, etc. necessary tocomplete the ceiling system and achieve specified performance.

• Top fixings: to suit substrate.• Hangers: Rigid hangers.• Grid type: 24mm wide exposed grid.• Grid colour: White.• Perimeter trim: Standard as clause 260.• Enhanced corrosion resistance: Not required.

250B SUSPENSION SYSTEM SHOWER ROOMS

• Manufacturer: Rockfon, A Trading Division of Rockwool Limited.- Web: www.rockfon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected].

- Product reference: RockLink 24 suspension system.

• Extent of system: Include all hangers, fixings, main runners, cross members, primarychannels, perimeter trims, splines, noggings, clips, bracing, bridging, etc. necessary tocomplete the ceiling system and achieve specified performance.

• Top fixings: to suit substrate.

• Hangers: Rigid hangers.

• Grid type: 24mm wide exposed grid.

• Grid colour: White.• Perimeter trim: Standard as clause 260.• Enhanced corrosion resistance: Required.

260 PERIMETER TRIMS GENERALLY• Type: 32 x 19 mm steel angle trim, colour and finish to match exposed grid.• Manufacturer: Rockfon, A Trading Division of Rockwool Limited.

- Web: www.rockfon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected]].

- Product reference: 1438-001 Perimeter angle trim.• Fixings:

- Fasteners: BZP raised head screws.- Fixing centres (maximum): 450 mm.

265B CEILING TILES

• Manufacturer: Rockfon, A Trading Division of Rockwool Limited.- Web: www.rockfon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: MediCare Standard

• Module size: 600 x 600 mm.• Tile thickness: 20 mm.• Edge: A24 (square).• Acoustic fireboxes: Not required.



265D CEILING TILES• Manufacturer: Rockfon or equal approved

A Trading Division of Rockwool Limited.- Web: www.rockfon.co.uk.- Tel: +44 (0)20 8222 7457.- Product reference: Alaska

• Module sizes: 600 x 600 mm.• Thickness: 15 mm.• Edges: A24.• Acoustic fireboxes: Not required.

EXECUTION

302 CONTROL SAMPLES

• General: Complete areas as part of the finished work in the following locations: SampleRoom.

• Approval: Obtain before completing areas of similar work.

305 SETTING OUT• General: Completed ceiling should present, over the whole of its surface exposed to the

room below, a continuous and even surface, jointed (where applicable) at regular intervals.• Infill and access units, integrated services: Fitted correctly and aligned.• Edge/ perimeter infill units size (minimum): Half standard width or length.• Corner infill units size (minimum): Half standard width and length.• Grid: Position to suit infill unit sizes. Allow for permitted deviations from nominal sizes of

infill unit.• Infill joints and exposed suspension members: Straight, aligned and parallel to walls,

unless specified otherwise.• Suitability of construction: Give notice where building elements and features to which the

ceiling systems relate are not square, straight or level.

310 BRACING

• General: Secure, with additional bracing and stiffening to give a stable ceiling systemresistant to design loads and pressures.

315 PROTECTION

• Loading: Do not apply loads for which the suspension system is not designed.

• Ceiling materials: When necessary, remove and replace correctly using special tools andclean gloves, etc. as appropriate.

320 TOP FIXING• Building structure: Verify suitability.• Structural soffit: Concrete floor slab / steel liner tray.

- Suitability to receive specified fixings: Evaluate and confirm.• Fixing generally: In accordance with BS EN 13964.• Fixing to:

- Concrete: Drill and insert suitable expanding anchors.- Aerated concrete: Fix through from the top of concrete units and provide a system of primary support channels.

- Structural steel: Drill, or use suitable proprietary clips/ adaptors.- Metal roof decking: Fix to sides of liner tray corrugations.- Timber: Fix to side of joists at least 50 mm from bottom edge. If ceiling system isintended for fire protection, fix into top third of joists.

- Hollow structural members: Submit fixing proposals.



325 INSTALLING HANGERS• Wire hangers: Straighten and tension before use.• Installation: Install vertical or near vertical, without bends or kinks. Do not allow hangers to

press against fittings, services, or insulation covering ducts/ pipes.• Obstructions: Where obstructions prevent vertical installation, either brace diagonal

hangers against lateral movement, or hang ceiling system on an appropriate rigid sub-gridbridging across obstructions and supported to prevent lateral movement.

• Extra hangers: Provide as necessary to carry additional loads.• Fixing:

- Wire hangers: Tie securely at top with tight bends to loops to prevent vertical movement.- Angle/ strap hangers: Do not use rivets for top fixing.

• Spacings: in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

335 INSTALLING PERIMETER TRIMS

• Jointing: Neat and accurate, without lipping or twisting.- External and internal corners: Mitre joints generally. Overlap joints at internal corners areacceptable.- Intermediate butt joints: Minimize. Use longest available lengths of trim. Align adjacentlengths.

• Fixing: Fix firmly to perimeter wall, edge battens or other building structure.- Fasteners: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.- Fixing centres: 450 mm.

340 EXPOSED GRIDS• Grid fixings: Angle hangers.• Main runners: Install level. Do not kink or bend hangers.

- Spliced joints: Stagger.- Wire hangers passing through main runners: Use sharp bends and tightly wrappedloops.

- Angle/ strap hangers: Do not use rivets for bottom fixing.- Angular displacement of long axis of one runner in relation to next runner in line with it:Not visually apparent.

• Cross members supported by main runners or other cross members: Install perpendicular to intersecting runners.

• Cross tees: Flat and coplanar with flanges of main runners after panel insertion.- Cross tees over 600 mm long, cut and resting on perimeter trim: Provide an additionalhanger.

• Holding down clips: Locate to manufacturer's recommendations.- Fire protecting/ resisting ceiling systems: Use clip type featured in the fire test/assessment.

355 INSTALLING INFILL UNITS

• General:- Perimeter infill units: Trimmed, as necessary, to fully fill space between last grid member and perimeter trim. Prevent subsequent movement.

- Deeply textured infill units: Minimize variations in apparent texture and colour. Inparticular, avoid patchiness.

• Concealed grids: Install infill units uniformly, straight and aligned. Avoid dimension creep.- Infill units around recessed luminaires and similar openings: Prevent movement anddisplacement.

365 INSTALLING METAL INFILL UNITS• Sound absorbing pads: Fit to prevent upward air movement through infill units. Cut or fold

pads in cut perimeter infill units to full unit size. Reseal cut pads.• Perimeter infill units: Firmly wedge cut units into perimeter trim, or clip down.



385 UPSTANDS AND BULKHEADS• Vertical ceiling systems: Support and brace to provide alignment and stability. • High upstands: Provide support at base of upstand.

390 OPENINGS IN CEILING MATERIALS• General: Neat and accurate. To suit sizes and edge details of fittings. Do not distort ceiling

system.

395 INTEGRATED SERVICES

• General: Position services accurately, support adequately. Align and level in relation to theceiling and suspension system. Do not diminish performance of ceiling system.

• Small fittings: Support with rigid backing boards or other suitable means. Do not damage or distort the ceiling.- Surface spread of flame rating of additional supporting material: Not less than ceilingmaterial.

• Services outlets:- Supported by ceiling system: Provide additional hangers.- Independently supported: Provide flanges to support ceiling system.

401 CEILING MOUNTED LUMINAIRES• Support: By ceiling system .

- Independently supported luminaires: Suspension adjusted to line and level of ceiling.- Ceiling supported luminaires: Modifications and/ or extra support required: To eachluminaire.

• Surface mounted luminaires: Units installed so that in event of a fire the designed gridexpansion provision is not affected.

• Modular fluorescent recessed luminaires: Compatible with ceiling module. Extension boxesmust not foul ceiling system.

• Recessed rows of luminaires: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units, unlessmounted above grid flanges. Retain in position with lateral restraint.

• Fire protecting/ resisting ceiling systems: Luminaires must not diminish protection integrityof ceiling system.

• Access: Provide access for maintenance of luminaires.

406 TRUNKING

• Recessed trunking: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units, unless mountedabove grid flanges. Retain in position with lateral restraint.

411 MECHANICAL SERVICES• Fan coil units:

- Inlet/ Outlet grilles: Trim ceiling grid and infill units to suit.- Space beneath: Sufficient for ceiling system components.- Suspension and connections: Permit accurate setting out and levelling of fan coil units.

• Air grilles and diffusers:- Setting out: Accurate and level.- Linear air diffusers: Retain in place with lateral restraint. Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units.

- Grille/ Diffuser ceiling joints: Provide smudge rings and edge seals.

• Smoke detectors and PA speakers:- Ceiling infill units: Scribe and trim to suit.- Independent suspension: Not required.- Flexible connections: Required.

• Sprinkler heads: Carefully set out and level.



435 INSTALLING AIR PLENUM BARRIERS• Fixing: Fix tightly at perimeters and joints using methods recommended by the barrier

manufacturer to ensure permanent stability.• Edges and joints: Seal effectively to prevent air leakage.

500 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY AND EARTH BONDING• Substantial conductive parts of the ceiling system: Electrically continuous and fully earth

bonded to carry prospective earth fault currents.- Standard: To BS 7671.

• Sequence: Complete earth bonding as soon as possible after completion of eachindependent area of suspension system.

• Testing: After completion of the ceiling system, associated services and fittings, testconductive parts of suspension system required to carry earth fault current, or used asbonding connections. Give notice before testing.- Electrical continuity: Measure from various distant conductive points of ceiling systemand to earth bar in distribution board serving the area.

- Test current: Sufficient to indicate probable electrical performance under fault conditions.- Test instrument: Type providing a pulse of about 25 A at safe voltage for safe duration,and indicating resistance in ranges 0-2 ohms and 0-20 ohms.

- Resistance of measuring conductors: Deduce from test instrument readings.- Test readings: Record and certify. Add results to resistance of other parts of the pathforming the earth fault loop.

COMPLETION

505 TOOLS• Access tools: At Completion, supply one set of the following: Any specialist tools necessary

to carry out routine maintenance .

520 USER INSTRUCTIONS

• Contents: Include the following:- Correct methods for removing and replacing infill units and other components.- Cleaning methods and materials.- Recommendations for redecoration.- Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Limitations placed on subsequent alterationsand maintenance procedures, to ensure that their fire performance is not impaired.

- Maximum number, position and value of point loads that can be applied to ceiling systemafter installation.

530 SPARES• General: At Completion supply the following: 1No box of tiles for each specified ceiling type .



L10

Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Louvres

L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Louvres


GENERAL




110A EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE• Certification: Provide independently certified evidence that all incorporated components

comply with specified performance requirementsFinal window selection will provide at least for the following:.Anti-ligature window furniture.Anti-pass through mesh or similar approved feature.Windows should capable of being locked open as well as locked shut, or locked partiallyopen (restricted to 100mm)Windows and frames must be set within the building masonry e.g. Victorian reveal detail.External windows are to be thermally broken to prevent cold bridging. 'Victorian' revealedwindows to be fixed on all four sides with fixing straps, secured by expanding or chemical anchor bolts. Stainless steel friction stays to be provided to top hung windows, with silver anodised locking cockspur handles.

In non clinical staff only areas, windows can be operable where appropriate but stillrestricted protection from falling, in accordance with building regulations.Windows that are in buildings that form part of the defined perimeter should be sealed or protected against contraband being passed.Windows to be fixed on all sides in recessed reveal as details.

A full working sample of the proposed window will be required for mock up purposes andtested in accordance with the DoH environmental guide for secure adult facilities testcriteria 1-4.

140 CONTROL SAMPLES

• Procedure:- Finalise component details.- Fabricate one of each of the following designated items as part of the quantity requiredfor the project.

- Obtain approval of appearance and quality before proceeding with manufacturer of theremaining quantity.

• Designated items: External windows, brise soleil louvres .

PRODUCTS

205 WINDOW MATERIALS SPECIFICATION

• Minimum BRE 'Green Guide to Specification Online' rating: C.

Page 141 of 266 L10 Project Fitzroy


250A WOOD WINDOWS bespoke units to front elevations• Standard: To BS 644.• Manufacturer: A firm currently registered under a third party quality assurance scheme.• Exposure category to BS 6375-1/ Design wind load: based on 2000 Pa.• Operation and strength characteristics: To BS 6375-2.• Timber: Generally to BS EN 942.

- Species: Hardwood as table NA.2.- Appearance class: J10 for glazing beads, drip mouldings and the like. J40 or better for all other members.

- Moisture content on delivery: 12-19%.• Preservative treatment: Organic solvent as section Z12 and WPA Commodity Specification

C5; Desired service life 30 years.• Finish as delivered: Full paint system - suitable microporous opaque finish colour to be

confirmed.• Glazing details: double glazed units with 10mmm toughened outer leaf. Secondary glazing

internally for security reasons - see glazing strategy gdrawings .- Beading: External.

• Ironmongery/ Accessories: fixed .

• Fixing: steel cramps all sides in reveal - see dteails 31-100.Other requirements: See design intent document for traditional window deisgn. Beadproportion and design to be approved.



330A STEEL / ALUMINIUM WINDOWS openable

BRITPLAS ALUMINIUM (External sash) SAFEVENT WINDOWDesigned for use in supervised care environments,A horizontal sliding security window system comprising a double fronted window and a freesliding external sash operated by an anti ligature internal winder. The double window hasone glazed area and the other is fitted with a 1.5mm thick stainless steel mesh. The slidingsash is glazed, it seals the mesh side when closed and is weather tight and draught proof.To open the Safevent window one simply winds the sash over the glazed front areaexposing the mesh to allow ventilation. .The window is constructed from Aluminium extruded double thermal break profile.A roller is fixed to the sliding pane, which runs on a stainless steel track fixed into theframe.

Manufacturer: Britplas LtdProduct reference: Safevent

Materials: All profiles are extruded from aluminium alloy 6060/6063 T5/T6 and comply withthe recommendations of BS EN 12020-2; 2001/BS 755-9: 2001. Thermal breaks areformed with polyamide strips PA 6.6 25 reinforced with glass fibre sections capable of withstanding temperatures up to 200°C for over painting.

Construction: All window sets shall be manufactured, installed and glazed in strictaccordance with Britplas instructions and guidelines as set down in the appropriatetechnical literature, details and specifications.Depth of outer frame sections shall be 106mm incorporating two polyamide thermal breaksections within the profiles.All outer frame and window members to be 45° mitred corner construction(doors 90).Constructed using mitred and mechanically crimped corners, with heavy duty corner cleatsand stainless steel chevrons. Integral transoms and mullions are secured with heavy dutymechanical joints to the outer frame members. Joints are chemically bonded for extrastrength and to seal against water ingress.

Finish as Delivered:Powder Coating to any RAL colour

Glazing details: Window shall be site glazedWindows shall be glazed on none secure side and square beaded.

Glazing requirementsStandard glazing as a minimum includes:Unit thickness. Overall thickness of 38mmGlass SpecificationFixed Pane Specification:- INNER – 10mm Toughened soft coat SPACER -20mmThermoplastic Argon Filled OUTER – 6.4mm LaminatedOuter Sliding Sash Specification:- INNER – 6mm Toughened soft coat Active self cleanSPACER -20mm Thermoplastic Argon Filled OUTER- 6.4mm Laminated

Glass is retained with security bead –External beadingGlass locks fixed at 150mm centres around the glazing unitThermal: All windows, in conjunction with a suitable glazing specification, to achieve anaverage project U-value to meet the current requirements of the approved BuildingRegulation Document L1/L2 for England and Wales. Target window U-value to be < 1.9W/m²K.Fixing:Metal FL001 fixing straps positioned 150mm from each corner and each mullion/transom



and at centres not exceeding 150mm to all sides. Note windows fixed in reveal – seearchitects details 31 series dwgs..Mesh 1.5mm thick, 304 stainless steel grill perforated with 2mm holes on a 3mm pitch(40.3% open area)3mm holes on 4mm pitch (51% open area) 4mm holes on 5mm pich(58% open area) fixed withanti-tamper stainless steel rivets and concealed with an extruded nylon trimOther requirements:Anti-pick sealant throughout.Interstitial blinds - Blinds to be electronically operated from room for open and closeoperation. Provide facility for shut off / lock at 45 degrees via linked operation from corridor for staff use only.

• Size: Refer to schedule .• Type: external sliding with stainless steel security mesh .• - Beading: External .

• Ironmongery/ Accessories: - Aluminium sub-cill .• Fixing: steel fixing cramps all sides -see jamb details 31-100 .• Other requirements:

trickle vents to be provided to non-patient areas External plastic vent fittings not permitted .

330C STEEL / ALUMINIUM WINDOWS fixed lights

• Manufacturer: [Britplas or equal approved secure window manufacturer - Web: www.britplas.co.uk- Email: [email protected]].

- Product reference: [Safevent Anti-ligature Window].Standard: [To BS 4873].Material: [steel core with Aluminium Alloy facings 6063T6 to BS1474].

- Finish: [Polyester powder coating].- Colour: [to be confirmed].- Minimum film thickness: [60 micrometers].Size: [Refer to schedule].Type: [ fixed lights ].Glazing details: [Double glazed sealed units - build up varies dependant on area - seeglazing strategy drawing for requirements. ].

- Beading: [External].Fixing: [steel cramps all sides -see details 31-100].Other requirements: [integral blinds, to some windows -see window strategy drawings for locations.

- For glazing refer to Section L40 and strategy drawings- Windows to achieve a minimum u-value of 1.4W/m?k;



510A GLAZED TIMBER SCREENS integral blindsLocation: Refer to architect's drawings.

• Manufacturer: Leaderflush Shapland.or equal approved- Web: www.leaderflushshapland.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] .

• Sustainability: All timber products certified FSC 100% full chain of custody.• Fire performance: Refer to schedule.• Acoustic performance: Refer to Schedule.• Timber: Generally to BS EN 942.• Frame details:

- Size: Refer to Schedule.- Frame: hardwood min 44mm to match doors.- Architrave: 42 x 18mm with pencil rounded edges.- Species: Sustainable Ash Hardwood.- Appearance class to BS EN 942: J30.- Moisture content on delivery: 9-13%.

• Glazing details:- Bead system: Ash Hardwood screen bead, screwed and pelleted, finish to match frame.- Glass: double glazed unit with integral blinds glass requirements vary - see strategydrawing

• Assembly adhesive: PVAC to BS EN 204, Class D4 .

• Joinery workmanship: As section Z10.

• Finish as delivered: Hyalux clear lacquer.

• Special features/ Other requirements: anti-ligature control for blinds.

• Fixing: Screw fixed and pelleted as clause 780.

510B GLAZED TIMBER SCREENS STANDARD GLAZED• Location: Refer to architect's drawings.• Manufacturer: contractor proposal.• Sustainability: All timber products certified FSC 100% full chain of custody.• Fire performance: Refer to schedule.• Acoustic performance: Refer to Schedule.• Timber: Generally to BS EN 942.• Frame details:

- Size: Refer to Schedule.- Frame: hardwood frame min 44mm to match doorsets.- Architrave: 42 x 18mm with pencil rounded edges.- Species: Sustainable Ash Hardwood.- Appearance class to BS EN 942: J30.- Moisture content on delivery: 9-13%.

• Glazing details:- Bead system: Ash Hardwood screen bead, screwed and pelleted, finish to match frame.- Glass: 6.4mm laminated safety glass / 10mm toughened see glazing strategy, as clauseL40/530



• Finish as delivered: clear lacquer.

• Special features/ Other requirements: None.




510D GLAZED TIMBER SCREENS FIRE RATED with / without blinds• Location: Refer to architect's drawings.• Manufacturer: contractor proposal.• Sustainability: All timber products certified FSC 100% full chain of custody.• Fire performance: Refer to schedule.• Acoustic performance: Refer to Schedule.• Timber: Generally to BS EN 942.• Frame details:

- Size: Refer to Schedule.- Frame: Minimum 45 x 120mm sustainable hardwood frame, 640kg/m? minimum density.Manufacturer to confirm fire rating requirements.

- Architrave: 42 x 19mm with pencil rounded edges.- Species: Ash.- Appearance class to BS EN 942: J30.- Moisture content on delivery: 9-13%.

• Glazing details:- Bead system: Minimum 30 x 20mm hardwood bead, 640kg/m? minimum density,screwed to frame using 60mm long screws at 200mm centres.

- Glass: fire rated clear glass to approval. inc integral blinds - see glazing startegy for variants




• Special features/ Other requirements: None.


650A METAL LOUVRES TO PLANT AREAS• Manufacturer: Architectural Profiles Ltd

- Email: [email protected] Web: www.archprof.co.uk.- Product reference: Live LB3 Single Bank.

• Material: Aluminium.- Finish as delivered: Polyester powder coated.- Minimum film thickness: 60 micometers.- Colour: To be confirmed.

• Fire resistance rating: Not applicable.• Number of louvre banks: One.• Louvre blade pitch and angle: Pitch: 100mm.• Blanking panels: Not required.• Accessories/ Other requirements:

- 18g expanded aluminium bird mesh; and- Louves to provide minimum 50% free air.

• Fixing: Screwed to structure, using stainless steel screws or other corrosion resistantmaterials, as clause 782.

EXECUTION

710 PROTECTION OF COMPONENTS

• General: Do not deliver to site components that cannot be installed immediately or placedin clean, dry floored and covered storage.

• Stored components: Stack vertical or near vertical on level bearers, separated with spacersto prevent damage by and to projecting ironmongery, beads, etc.



740 CORROSION PROTECTION• Surfaces to be protected: Aluminium alloy components in contact with preservative treated

timber..• Protective coating: Two coats of bitumen solution to BS 6949 or an approved mastic

impregnated tape.- Timing of application: Before fixing components.

750 BUILDING IN• General: Not permitted unless indicated on drawings.

- Brace and protect components to prevent distortion and damage during construction of adjacent structure.

765 WINDOW INSTALLATION GENERALLY

• Installation: Into prepared openings.

• Gap between frame edge and surrounding construction:- Minimum: 5mm.- Maximum: 15mm.

• Distortion: Install windows without twist or diagonal racking.

765A WINDOW INSTALLATION GENERALLY• Installation: Into prepared openings in accordance with architects details , with flange

fixings to all sides resin anchored to masonry.• Gap between frame edge and surrounding construction:

- Minimum: 5mm.- Maximum: 10mm.

• Distortion: Install windows without twist or diagonal racking.

766 LOCATION OF OPENABLE WINDOWS IN NATURALLY VENTILATED BUILDINGS

• Location: Over 10 m from sources of external pollution.

770 DAMP PROOF COURSES IN PREPARED OPENINGS• Location: Ensure correct positioning in relation to window frames. Do not displace during

fixing operations.

780 FIXING OF WOOD FRAMES• Standard: As section Z20.• Fasteners: resin anchored to blockwork at 150mm centres .

- Spacing: When not predrilled or specified otherwise, position fasteners not more than150 mm from ends of each jamb, adjacent to each hanging point of opening lights, andat maximum 450 mm centres.

782 FIXING OF ALUMINIUM FRAMES

• Standard: As section Z20.

• Fasteners: 25 x 3 x 150 mm galvanized carbon steel frame cramp resin anchored tomasonry at 150mm centres.- Spacing: When not predrilled or specified otherwise, position fasteners not more than250 mm from ends of each jamb, adjacent to each hanging point of opening lights, andat maximum 600 mm centres.

790 FIRE RESISTING FRAMES• Gap between back of frame and reveal: Completely fill with intumescent mastic or tape.



810A SEALANT JOINTS AROUND EXTERNAL DOORS AND WINDOWS• Sealant:

gun applied polyurethane foam as clause 810C .- Internal Seal: CT1 mastic by C Tec building solutionsUnit 9,Kubrick Business Estate,Station Approach,London,E7 0HU. .

• Application: As section Z22 to prepared joints. Finish triangular fillets to a flat or slightlyconvex profile.

810C PU FOAM GAP FILLER

• Manufacturer: Tremco illbruck Ltd.- Web: www.tremco-illbruck.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: illbruck FM230 Window Seal Foam

• Material: one component, moisture curing, polyurethane foam.- Application: gun applied.

820 IRONMONGERY• Fixing: Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fasteners with matching finish

supplied by ironmongery manufacturer. Do not damage ironmongery and adjacentsurfaces.

• Checking/ Adjusting/ Lubricating: Carry out at Completion and ensure correct functioning.



L20

Doors/ shutters/ hatches

L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches





GENERAL

100 VOC CONTENT• All wood panels must be manufactured in accordance with BS EN 13986:2004.• Emission levels of all wood panels must be tested against and meet the minimum

standards of Formaldehyde E1 in accordance with BS EN 717-1:2004. Manufacturer toverify that regulated wood preservatives are absent and of the minimum content.

• Upon completion, the contractor shall provide copies of the manufacturer's productliterature confirming:- The standard(s) against which the product is tested.- The VOC emissions achieved.- The VOC emissions meet the required level.

110 EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE

• Certification: Provide independently certified evidence that all incorporated componentscomply with specified performance requirements. BS 476: Part 22: 1987

112 TIMBER PROCUREMENT

• Timber (including timber for wood based products): Obtained from well managed forestsand/ or plantations in accordance with:- The laws governing forest management in the producer country or countries.- International agreements such as the Convention on International Trade in EndangeredSpecies of wild fauna and flora (CITES).

• Documentation: Provide either:- Documentary evidence (which has been or can be independently verified) regarding theprovenance of all timber supplied.

- Evidence that suppliers have adopted and are implementing a formal environmentalpurchasing policy for timber and wood based products.

115 FIRE RESISTING DOORS/ DOORSETS/ ASSEMBLIES• Evidence of fire performance: Provide certified evidence, in the form of a product

conformity certificate, directly relevant fire test report or engineering assessment, that eachdoor/ doorset/ assembly supplied will comply with the specified requirements for fireresistance if tested to BS 476-22, BS EN 1634-1 or BS EN 1634-3. Such certification mustcover door and frame materials, glass and glazing materials and their installation, essentialand ancillary ironmongery, hinges and seals.

150 SITE DIMENSIONS

• Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions, record on shopdrawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.

• Designated items:Internal doors / Shutters / Hatches .



170 CONTROL SAMPLES• Procedure:

- Finalize component details.- Fabricate one of each of the following designated items as part of the quantity requiredfor the project.

- Obtain approval of appearance and quality before proceeding with manufacture of theremaining quantity.

• Designated items:Door veneer/laminate.

PRODUCTS

270 WOOD DOORS External to plant room areas on roof

• Materials: Generally to BS EN 942.- Species: Hardwood as table NA2 .- Appearance class: J40.

• Panels: 6.5 mm birch faced plywood; Bonding quality to BS EN 314-2: Class 3 .

• Assembly:- Adhesive: PVAC to BS EN 204, Class D4.- Joinery workmanship: As section Z10.- Accuracy: To BS 4787-1.

• Preservative treatment: Organic solvent as section Z12 and WPA Commodity SpecificationC5; Desired service life: 30 years .

• Moisture content on delivery: 13-19%.

• Finish as delivered: External paint system to contractors choice.

• Other requirements: 54mm thick with hardwood lippings all edges, suited locks - seeironmongery schedule. hardwoord rebated frames for painting .

410A WOOD DOORSETS generally• Manufacturer: Chosen manufacturers to provide a fully co-ordinated service including

working up of construction schedules for comment by design team. Manufacturer must carry fire certification services and be able to advise on technical requirements in thisregard. Read in conjunction with client special requirekments and door schedules. todetermine glazing / fire and performnace requirements for each door. A sample of proposed veneer and timber species will be required to agree qualty and appearance prior to proceeding to manufacture. A prototype door and frame will be required.- Product reference: doors are bespoke design to clients requirements shown at the endof this document.

• Frame:- Type: solid hardwood.- Species: Ash.

• Configuration: varies - see 2342-D-32-001.

• Facings: Veneer crown cut - Ash.

• Vision panel: see schedules and client requirements below .

• Glazing:- Type: observation units and general vision panels - Duralux vision panels, see guidancebelow.

- Bead: Proprietory bead system for highsecure environments .Ironmongery:

- Type: anti- ligature as separate schedule.- Material: Satin Stainless steel.

• Perimeter seals: as required for fire / sound rating.



410B WOOD DOORSETS FIRE RATED• Manufacturer: Contractors proposals

- Product reference: FD30/60 & FD30S/60S Doorsets .• Frame:

- Type: solid timber with min 40x 40mm stops.- Species: Hardwood to match veneer.

• Configuration: varies - see schedules.• Facings: Veneer crown cut - Ash.• Vision panel: see schedules.• Glazing:

- Type: min 10 mm toughened with fire rating - contractor choice.- Bead: Duralux vision panel system with integral blind .- Ironmongery: see separate schedulePerimeter seals: as required for fire certification fitted behind lippings to patientbedrooms / cut to 300mm lengths to avoid ligature elsewhere.

410G SECLUSION ROOM DOORSETS proprietory system tested and designed specifically for seclusion rooms in accordance with DoH guidelines

• Manufacturer: Stafford Bridge or Kingsway .- Product reference: Seclusion room doorset.

• see notes at the end of this section.Provide steel reinforced frame to house this door. provide steel subframe.

415A VISION PANELS• Vision panel : Duralux

Manufacturer:KingswayKimberley Business ParkBlackness LaneKestonKentBR2 6HLUnited KingdomTel: +44(0)1959.577.727Size: See schedules.

• Operation: Anti-ligature knob and collar to patient side, staff overide key outside. .

480A DOORSETS External aluminium doors to low use areas

• Manufacturer: Technal. or equal approved- Web: www.technal.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Pivot CD commercial door

• Arrangement: Open-out single action pivot hinged flush threshold door .

• Size: Refer to schedule.

• Finish: Polyester powder coated.- Minimum film thickness: 60 micrometers.

• Colour: To be confirmed.• Glazing/ panel thickness: 28mm double glazed units - see glazing strategy drawing .• Ironmongery: Concealed overhead door closer, with anti-finger trap device, anti ligature

primera handles.• Security:

- Applicable doors: see schedule.- Security rating: PAS 24-1.

• Other requirements: Manifestation to large uninterupted glazed panes .



480C DOORSETS STEEL SECURITY FM areas - see schedule• Manufacturer:

Britannia Metador, Britannia House, John Boyle Road, Middlesbrough, TS6 6TY- Tel: 01642 337119- Fax: 0845 371 0404- Email: [email protected] Web: www.britanniametador.com.

- Product reference: Metador defender or equal approved .• Door leaf: 54mm thick manufactured from two skins of 1.5mm galvanised steel.

- Configuration: varies - see schedule.- Finish as delivered: Stoved polyester powder coated. Colour ref: RAL - TBC.

• Frame and architraves: Single rebate; 1.6mm thick folded galvanised steel; fully weldedcorners.- Finish as delivered: Polyester powder coated. Colour ref: RAL TBC.

• Ironmongery: Refer to ironmongery schedule.• Perimeter seals: Silicone rubber weatherseal embedded to frame rebate.• Security:

- Applicable doors: All.- Security rating: PAS 24-1.

• Other requirements:- Door leaves to include security astragal to leading edges;- DDA compliant stainless steel threshold welded into the vertical frame posts; and- Continuous hinges.

• Fixing: resin anchored to blockwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendationsand DoH testing criteria.

480D DOORSETS - STEEL SECURITY (LOUVRED) to plant room areas - see schedule• Manufacturer:

Britannia Metador or equal approved.Britannia House, John Boyle Road, Middlesbrough, TS6 6TY- Tel: 01642 337119- Fax: 0845 371 0404- Email: [email protected] Web: www.britanniametador.com.

- Product reference: Metador 300.• Door leaf: 45mm thick manufactured from two skins of 1.2mm galvanised steel.

- Configuration: Outward opening, double leaf, LH inactive .- Vision panel: Not required.- Louvred panel: 460 x 1500mm louvred panel to each door leaf to provide minimum 50%free area. Expanded aluminium insect mesh to internal face.

- Finish as delivered: Stoved polyester powder coated. Colour ref: RAL 7012 - TBC.• Frame and architraves: Single rebate; 1.6mm thick folded galvanised steel; fully welded

corners.- Finish as delivered: Polyester powder coated. Colour ref: RAL 7012 TBC.

• Ironmongery: Refer to ironmongery schedule.

• Perimeter seals: Silicone rubber weatherseal bonded to frame rebate .

• Security:- Applicable doors: All.- Security rating: PAS 24-1.

• Other requirements:- Door leaves to include security astragal to leading edges;- DDA compliant stainless steel threshold welded into the vertical frame posts; and- Minimum 4No stainless steel butt hinges with dogging bolts .

• Fixing: Plugged and screwed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.



480E DOORSETS Aluminium - high use areas see schedule• Manufacturer: Technal. or equal approved

- Web: www.technal.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: SOLEAL High peformance door system or equal approvedArrangement: [Open-out single action pivot hinged flush threshold door].Size: [Refer to schedule].Finish: [Polyester powder coated].

- Minimum film thickness: [60 micrometers].Colour: [To be confirmed].Glazing/ panel thickness: [28mm double glazed units - see glazing strategy drawing].Ironmongery: [Concealed overhead door closer, with built in anti-finger trap device,primera anti-ligature handles ].Security:

- Applicable doors: [see schedule].- Security rating: [PAS 24-1].Other requirements: [Manifestation to large uninterupted glazed panesAnti ligature handles ].

610 ROLLER SHUTTERS to servery areas

• Manufacturer: Sytson or equal approved .- Product reference: Acoustic servery shutter .

• Performance: 30 min FR, 25 db Rw .

• Arrangement: roller and motor located in ceiling void .

• Shutter curtain: galvanised steel laths .- Finish as delivered: powder coated .

• Frame/ Guides: glavanised steel .- Finish as delivered: powder coated .

• Operation: electronic with fire alrm interface for operation in the event of detector activation.• Ironmongery: key switch operation .• Other requirements: manual bolt arrangement at base into side walls / guides .

610A ROLLER SHUTTERS to beverage bays ref IND 15.0• Manufacturer: Syston or equal approved .

- Product reference: steel flat lath tubular motor security shutter .• Performance: n/a .

• Arrangement: roller and motor located in ceiling void .

• Shutter curtain: galvanised steel laths .- Finish as delivered: powder coated .

• Frame/ Guides: glavanised steel .- Finish as delivered: powder coated .

• Operation: electronic key switch and manual lock ..

630A HATCHES IN NON-FIRE RATED PLASTERBOARD CEILINGS

• Manufacturer: contractor choice- Product reference: M&M access hatches Blazedoor range or equal approved - plasteredpanel type with invisible frame.

• Size: to be determnined by M&E engineer requirements for access to maintain services .• Fire performance: Not required.• Lock: Euro-profile suited.• Operation: Standard.



630B HATCHES SMOKE VENTS TO PITCHED ROOF AREAS• Manufacturer: Velux WWW.VELUX.CO.UK.

- Product reference: SMOKE VENT GGLU08.• Size: 1340 x 1400 mm.• Operation: AUTOMATIC TILT AND TURN ACTUATOR.

complete with kerbs and flashing to suit slate roof.Form shaft in plasterboard with plywood backing.

630C HATCHES smoke vents to flat roof areas• Manufacturer: A.Bilco UK, 20 Park Farm Business Centre, Fornham St Genevieve, Bury St

Edmunds, Suffolk, IP28 6TS.Tel. 01284 701696. Fax. 01284 702531, Web: www.bilcouk.com .- Product reference: Type UDF-50REM, size width: 1500mm x length: 1620mm. Lengthdenotes hinge sides. .

• B. Performance characteristics:1. Covers shall be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 195 kg/m2 with amaximum deflection of 1/150th of the span.2. Operation of the covers shall be through a 24VDC battery backed control systemthat will open the covers to the fire open position within 60 seconds and be capable of closing the covers.3. Operation of the covers shall not be affected by temperature.4. Entire vent shall be weathertight with fully welded corner joints on covers and curb.C. Covers: Shall be 3mm aluminium with a 100mm beaded flange with formedreinforcing members. Cover shall have a heavy extruded EPDM rubber gasket that isbonded to the cover interior to ensure a continuous seal when compressed to the topsurface of the curb.D. Cover insulation: Shall be polyisocyanurate of 50mm thickness with a U-value of 0.47 W/m2K. Insulation shall be fully covered and protected by an aluminium liner.E. Curb: Shall be 305mm in height and of 3mm aluminium. The curb shall be formedwith a 114mm flange with 11mm holes provided for securing to the roof deck. The curb shall be equipped with an integral metal capflashing of 2mm aluminium, fully welded at thecorners, that features the Bil-Clip? flashing system, including stamped tabs, 153mm oncenter, to be bent inward to hold single ply roofing membrane securely in place. Thereshall be a fixed central drip channel through the centre section of the curb.F. Wind Deflectors: Shall be 4mm aluminium with 3mm EPDM gasket.G. Curb insulation: Shall be polyisocyanurate of 50mm thickness with a U-value of 0.47 W/m2K.H. Operating mechanism - two 24VDC linear actuators per cover ( four actuators total)capable of opening the cover to the fire open position of 90 degrees.I. Hardware - 1. Heavy pintle hinges shall be provided2. Curb mounted junction box ( 2 no.) with terminal blocks enclosed for power cableconnection.J. Finishes: Factory finish shall be powder coated aluminiumForm shaft through plasterboard ceiling lined with duraline board on 12mm plywood.

EXECUTION

710 PROTECTION OF COMPONENTS

• General: Do not deliver to site components that cannot be installed immediately or placedin clean, dry, floored and covered storage.

• Stored components: Stacked on level bearers, separated with spacers to prevent damageby and to projecting ironmongery, beads, etc.



730 PRIMING/ SEALING• Wood surfaces inaccessible after installation: Primed or sealed as specified before fixing

components.

750 FIXING DOORSETS• Timing: After associated rooms have been made weathertight and the work of wet trades is

finished and dried out.

760 BUILDING IN

• General: Not permitted unless indicated on drawings.

780 DAMP PROOF COURSES IN PREPARED OPENINGS• Location: Correctly positioned in relation to door frames. Do not displace during fixing

operations.

800 FIXING OF LOOSE THRESHOLDS• Spacing of fixings: Maximum 150 mm from each end and at 600 mm maximum centres.

809 FIRE RESISTING/ SMOKE CONTROL DOORS/ DOORSETS

• Installation: By a firm currently registered under a third party accredited fire door installer scheme in accordance with instructions supplied with the product conformity certificate,test report or engineering assessment.

810 FIRE RESISTING SMOKE CONTROL DOORS/ DOORSETS• Gaps between frames and supporting construction: Filled as necessary in accordance with

requirements for certification and/ or door/ doorset manufacturer's instructions.

820A SEALANT• Manufacturer: contractor choice• Colour: Grey.• Accessories: anti-pick to client approval.

830 FIXING IRONMONGERY GENERALLY

• Fasteners: Supplied by ironmongery manufacturer.- Finish/ Corrosion resistance: To match ironmongery.

• Holes for components: No larger than required for satisfactory fit/ operation.

• Adjacent surfaces: Undamaged.

• Moving parts: Adjusted, lubricated and functioning correctly at completion.

840 FIXING IRONMONGERY TO FIRE RESISTING DOOR ASSEMBLIES• General: All items fixed in accordance with door leaf manufacturer's recommendations

ensuring that integrity of the assembly, as established by testing, is not compromised.• Holes for through fixings and components: Accurately cut.

- Clearances: Not more than 8 mm unless protected by intumescent paste or similar.• Lock/ Latch cases for fire doors requiring > 60 minutes integrity performance: Coated with

intumescent paint or paste before installation.

850 LOCATION OF HINGES

• Primary hinges: Where not specified otherwise, positioned with centre lines 250 mm fromtop and bottom of door leaf.

• Third hinge: Where specified, positioned with centre line 200 mm below centre line of top hinge .

• Hinges for fire resisting doors: Positioned in accordance with door leaf manufacturer'srecommendations.



860 INSTALLATION OF EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICES• Standard: Unless specified otherwise, install panic bolts/ latches in accordance with BS EN

1125.



CLIENT SPECIFIC MINIMUM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTTS

Door Types are identified on Room Data Sheets:General Notes:As doors and associated components form an integral part of the secure wardenvironment, it is critical that a coordinated approach to their overall design is applied.Consequently, it is recommended that all ward environment doors should be designed andmanufactured holistically. That is to say that all doors/frames/veneers/ironmongery/visionpanels should be designed, coordinated and installed within a factory environment by asingle manufacture, prior to installation on site. The complete unit should also demonstrateits ability to withstand deliberate and sustained attack, in accordance with the testingregimes set out in the Environmental Design Guide, Adult Medium Secure Services?,published by the Department of Health, 2011.Where this is not achievable, then a fully coordinated design will need to be established bythe various component manufactures and tested to the above referenced regimes, unlessexpressly defined by St Andrews.All internal doors to rooms with patient access should be outward opening into circulationareas, which will be suitably sized to accommodate this design requirement.

The design of corridors and room doors should ensure that they cannot be levered againstopen doors, corners, architraves, fixtures and fittings or door stops causing damage to thedoor, hinge or frame or making it impossible to close.

Type A Bespoke and non standards systems - main entrance doors. read in conjunctionwith the design Intent document prepared by P+HS Architects. Bespoke doors and associated frames and glazing systems will be limited to the externalperimeter of the building fabric, including front entrances, off ward and non clinical areas of the facility. The design and specifications of these units will be defined by the requirementsof the facility in conjunction with relevant statutory regulations and healthcare designguidance material.Compliance to relevant St. Andrews operational and design standards, including security,fire and maintenance, will also be required.

Type B - High risk areasThe door blank should be 54mm (min) thick, solid core with a timber veneer finish. The unitshould have 6mm hard wood lippings to the full extent of the door blank. The door shouldoutward opening with a minimum of 3 pairs of anti ligature stainless steel hinges.

The doorframe should be constructed of solid hard wood timber, to match the door blank(i.e. door sets). Frame to be securely fixed back to structural opening with resin anchor boltfixings, to all sides of the frame, at 150mm centers to a minimum run of 450mm to bothlocations. All mechanical fixings are to be plugged and pelleted.

Doorstops, set within the jamb, are to be securely fixed back to the frame with mechanicalfixings at 200mm centers to the full extent of the frame, plugged and pelleted. Thedoorstops should be a minimum dimension of 40mm x40mm, to reduce the risk of the door being forced open under sustained attack.

The head of the architrave should be chamfered to limit concealment of contraband or useas a 'grab hold' point.

The door and associated frame are to be fire rated in accordance with statutoryrequirements. All smoke and intumescent seals to be fitted to the frame behind the stop tomaximum lengths of 250mm with mechanical fixings.

Type C : Lower risk areas



The door blank should be 44mm (min) thick, solid core with a timber veneered finish. Theunit should have 6mm hard wood lipping?s to the full extent of the door blank. The door should be outward opening with a minimum of 2 pairs of anti ligature stainless steel hinges.

The doorframe should be constructed of solid hard wood timber, to match the door blank(i.e. door sets). Frame to be securely fixed back to structural opening with mechanicalfixings (e.g. anchor resin bolts) to both the head and foot of the frame, at 150mm centers toa minimum run of 450mm to both locations. All mechanical fixings are to be plugged andpelleted.

The door jamb should be constructed of solid hard wood timber, to match doorframe. Jambto be securely fixed back to the frame with mechanical fixings at 200mm centers to the fullextent of the frame plugged and pelleted. The jamb should be a minimum dimension of 40mm x 40mm.


The door and associated frame are to be fire rated in accordance with statutoryrequirements. All smoke and in-tumescent seals to be fitted to the frame to maximumlengths of 250mm with mechanical fixings.

Type D Lower risk areas with hygiene panels

The door blank should be 44mm (min) thick, solid core fully encapsulated within a hygieniclaminated finish. Door will typically be outward opening, unless expressly advisedotherwise. The door will be fitted with full length anti ligature stainless steel hinges.

The doorframe should be constructed to match the door blank (i.e. door sets). Frame to besecurely fixed back to structural opening with mechanical fixings (e.g. anchor resin bolts) toboth the head and foot of the frame, at 150mm centers to a minimum run of 450mm to bothlocations. All mechanical fixings are to be plugged and pelleted.

Doorstops, set within the jamb, are to be securely fixed back to the frame with mechanicalfixings at 200mm centers to the full extent of the frame, plugged and pelleted. Thedoorstops should be a minimum dimension of 40mm x 40mm, to reduce the risk of the door being forced open under sustained attack.

The door and associated frame are to be fire rated in accordance with statutoryrequirements. All smoke and in-tumescent seals to be fitted to the frame to maximumlengths of 250mm with mechanical fixings.

Type E - Low risk areas

Standard solid core door blank with either a timber laminate or paint grade finish. The unitshould lipped to the full extent of the door blank, with standard 1 and half pair hinges.

The doorframe should be constructed of solid hard, to match door (i.e. door sets). Frame tobe securely fixed back to structural opening, plugged and pelleted.

The door and associated frame to be fire rated in accordance with statutory requirements.

Type F High risk areas with hygiene panels

The door blank should be 54mm (min) thick, solid core, fully encapsulated within a hygienicveneer finish. Door will typically be outward opening, unless expressly advised otherwise.The door will be fitted with full length anti ligature stainless steel hinges.



The doorframe should be constructed of solid hard wood timber, to match the door blank(i.e. door sets). Frame to be securely fixed back to structural opening with mechanicalfixings (e.g. anchor resin bolts) to both the head and foot of the frame, at 150mm centers toa minimum run of 450mm to both locations. All mechanical fixings are to be plugged andpelleted.

Doorstops, set within the jamb, are to be securely fixed back to the frame with mechanicalfixings at 200mm centers to the full extent of the frame, plugged and pelleted. Thedoorstops should be a minimum dimension of 40mm x 40mm, to reduce the risk of the door being forced open under sustained attack.


The door and associated frame are to be fire rated in accordance with statutoryrequirements. All smoke and intumescent seals to be fitted to the frame to maximumlengths of 250mm with mechanical fixings.

Type G - Enhanced high risk areas (Seclusion suite).

Seclusion room door sets specification:Locks to the main access door and door from observation to the en-suite to be SurelockMcGill multi-point locking system as the Stafford Bridge Seclusion Room Door sets.Door from the seclusion room to be held closed using key operated deadlock operatedfrom within the en-suite and fitted with a fully encased lock-back facility and heavy dutycontinuous piano type in stainless steel 50.8 wide x full height of door en-suite door.The structural opening for all doors within the seclusion room suite should be 2100mmHigh x 1270mm Wide (door leaf 1100mm minimum)70mm rebated Ash frame with a 54mm laminated hardwood core door hung on S2HA6hinges with 2no S3SG hinge bolts.Door calibrated, with 2no 4mm mdf skins to each face clad in hygienic panel10mm exposed Ash lippings to all edges. Architraves provided as required.Frames and architraves to have a lacquered finish.Door are NOT required to be fire ratedSurelock Slimeline concealed 3 way auto-bolting, manual locking system, securing thedoor at the top and two horizontal positions.Bolts are locked in either thrown or retracted position via a key, which is retained in thecylinder when unlocked.The lock is suitable for an ASSA Euro-profile cylinder.Entry via special guarded handle, including security fixing screws.Exit no exit facility is to be provided.The mounting arrangement for the door frames should be capable of withstandingprolonged attack. Therefore a steel goalpost arrangement fully set in the floor and ceilingwith frame bolted to the goalpost using anti-vibration fittings, or similar arrangement, will be required. To provide additional strength at the base of the door fixings should be positionedat 150mm centers for the first 750mm thereafter at 300mm centers finishing with 150mm atthe head.The clear vision panel should not have an integral privacy blind, and should be constructedfrom 12mm minimum polycarbonate; 350mm x 150mm or similar approved.Frames and extension pieces to be screwed and pelleted.

Type H - External doors

External timbers flush doors to be 50mm thick with 6.5mm plywood facing to both sidesand 6mm hardwood lipping?s to all edges. Where glazing is required, these should besecured with hard wood timber beading, fixed with pin torx security screws and flush cupwashers. All fixing screws to be stainless steel pin torx security. Door frames to be



hardwood, pressure impregnated with preservative.

Type K - service ductsThe door blank should be 54mm (min) thick, solid core with a plywood faces for painting.The unit should have 6mm hardwood lippings to the full extent of the door blank. The door should outward opening with a minimum of 3 pairs of anti ligature stainless steel hinges.

The doorframe should be constructed of solid hard wood timber, for painting. Frame to besecurely fixed back to structural opening with mechanical fixings (e.g. anchor resin bolts) toboth the head and foot of the frame, at 150mm centers to a minimum run of 450mm to bothlocations. All mechanical fixings are to be plugged and pelleted.

Doorstops, set within the jamb, are to be securely fixed back to the frame with mechanicalfixings at 200mm centers to the full extent of the frame, plugged and pelleted. Thedoorstops should be a minimum dimension of 40mm x40mm, to reduce the risk of the door being forced open under sustained attack.


The door and associated frame are to be fire rated in accordance with statutoryrequirements. All smoke and intumescent seals to be fitted to the frame to maximumlengths of 250mm with mechanical fixings.

Glazing for fire doors to be clear (non wired) proprietory product to acheive the necessaryfire rating with min 10mm thick toughened glass. (to comply with current BuildingRegulations) with factory fitted beads, glazing for non-fire doors to be 10mm toughenedglass.

Observation UnitsGeneral Notes:Observation systems within door blanks must be mechanically fixed into place. The designof the unit must therefore reflect the design and specification of the door blank within whichit is to be installed.Glazing units should be constructed from a composite system made up from toughenedand laminated panes. The construction and specification of the composite panel mustclearly demonstrate the units? ability to with stand sustained deliberate attack. In addition,when the glazing system fails (e.g. the glass fractures) it should do so 'safely', that is to say there should be no exposed 'shards' of glass or material that could be used as a weapon.

Screens and doors requiring 30 minute fire integrity to be glazed with either 10mmPilkington PYROSHIELD Safety Clear or Pilkington PYRODUR Plus or similar approved,fixed strictly in accordance with manufacturer?s detail (Note: there are restrictionsregarding the glass size).

Screens requiring 60 minute integrity / 30 minute insulation to be glazed with 15mmPilkington PYROSTOP, or similar approved, fixed strictly in accordance withmanufacturer's detail (Note: there are restrictions regarding the glass size).

Observation type 1 - Bespoke and non standards systems - see design intent documentBespoke observation/vision panels will be required to specific specialist areas of the wardfacility. The design and specifications of these units will be defined by the requirements of the facility in conjunction with relevant statutory regulations and healthcare designguidance material.Compliance to relevant St. Andrews operational and design standards, including security,fire and maintenance, will also be required.

Observation 2



An adjustable vision panel, set within door blank, (e.g. Durulux observation unitspecification or equal and approved). The design of unit must reflect the design andspecification of the door blank within which it is to be 'factory' installed. The unit must besuitably robust to pass the testing levels incorporated in the ?Environmental Design Guide,Adult Medium Secure Services?, published by the Department of Health, 2011. Inaddition, the unit will require a fully framed secondary 10mm polycarbonate protection toeach side of the unit; in high risk areas.The vision panel will incorporate a modesty blind to be operable by staff held key to oneside of the unit, while an anti-ligature knob will allow patients to operate it from the oppositeside.The glazed unit and associated frame will be fire rated in accordance with statutoryrequirements, as necessary.

Fixings:Exposed fixings to be pin torx security fixings. Otherwise pelletted.



L30

Stairs/ ladders/ walkways/ handrails/ balustrades

L30 Stairs/ ladders/ walkways/ handrails/ balustrades


PRELIMINARY INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS




110 DESIGN• Building type of activity/ occupancy category to BS 6399-1: B (Office and work areas not

covered elsewhere).• Design standard: The following items have been designed to BS 5395, where applicable: F

ire escape stairs.- Inclusive design: In accordance with BS 8300.

• Completion of design: Finalize details to meet structural, safety and accessibilityrequirements/ recommendations of : BS 8300 and Building Regulations (E&W) ApprovedDocument M and BS 8300:2009; highlight any discrepancies and outcomes .

130 SITE DIMENSIONS

• Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions, record on shopdrawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.- Designated items: Handrails, balustrades and ladders .

COMPONENTS

250A METAL STAIRS ROOF ACCESS STAIR

• To BS 4592: Applicable.• Grades of metal: Carbon steel to BS EN 10025-2, grade S275JR.• Finish as delivered: Galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.

- Slip resistance value of integral tread water wet (minimum): Not applicable.- Slip resistance value of integral nosing water wet (minimum): Not applicable.- Colour of integral nosing: Not applicable.

• Workmanship: To section Z11.• Other requirements: Joints welded and ground smooth.

310A PROPRIETARY roof emergency escape hatchManufacturer: Bilco.- Product reference: E-50T or similar approved.

• Other requirements: fire rating 60mins.



410 STEEL LADDERS VERTICAL ESCAPE LADDER• Manufacturer: Bilco UK Ltd.

- Web: www.bilcouk.com.- Email: [email protected]. .

- Product reference: Fixed Vertical Ladder.• Standard: To BS 4211.

- Structural design: To BS 5950-1.• Safety hoops: Required.• Platforms: Hot dip galvanized Durbar pattern mild steel tread plate .• Finish as delivered: Galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.• Other requirements: Joints welded and ground smooth• Fixing: Bolted to concrete floor edges.

570A PURPOSE MADE HANDRAILS IN ALL STAIRS

• Component material, grade and finish as delivered:- Handrails: Hardwood (ASH)- lacquered.Profile: Pig's ear see 24 series drawings. Include backbaord as detailed to all patientaccess stairs as shown .Size: Nominal 100x100mm.

- Brackets: Not applicable.

• Sustainability: All timber products certified FSC 100% full chain of custody.

• Workmanship:- Joinery: To section Z10.- Metalwork: Not applicable.


• Other requirements: None.

• Fixing: Screw fixed and pelleted to concrete blockwork.

590A APPLIED STAIR NOSINGS• Manufacturer: Gradus.

- Web: www.gradusworld.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: ADM2 with Xtra-grip Plus Insert

• Channel: Single mill finished aluminium channel with slip-resistant PVC insert .- Profile: Rake Back.

• Insert:- Type: Xtra-grip Plus.- Colour: Raven.

• Side trim: as clause 592A.

592A STAIR TRIMS

• Manufacturer: Gradus.- Web: www.gradusworld.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: TA5 Side trim.

• Material: Aluminium.• Size: 32 x 19mm.• Fixing: Proprietary cartridge adhesive fix ? as per manufacturers instructions .

INSTALLATION

620 PRIMING/SEALING/PAINTING• Surfaces inaccessible after assembly/installation: Before fixing components, apply full

protective/decorative treatment/coating system.



630 CORROSION PROTECTION OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS• Components/ substrates/ fasteners of dissimilar materials: Isolate using washers/ sleeves

or other suitable means to separate materials to avoid corrosion and/ or staining.

640 INSTALLATION GENERALLY• Fasteners and methods of fixing: To section Z20.• Structural members: Do not modify, cut, notch or make holes in structural members, except

as indicated on drawings.• Temporary support: Do not use stairs, walkways or balustrades as temporary support or

strutting for other work.

• Applied finishes: Substrates to be even, dry, sound and free from contaminants. Makegood substrate surfaces and prepare/ prime as finish manufacturer?s recommendationbefore application.

670 INSTALLATION OF TREAD INSERTS/ NOSINGS

• Treads: Fully cured, sound and level.

• Fixing:- Location/ position: In accordance with BS 8300.- Fixings: As manufacturer's recommendations.Centres: 75 mm from ends and 225 to 300 mm centres.

COMPLETION

910 INSPECTION• Timing: Two weeks prior to date when Contractor expects work to be practically complete .• Period of notice (minimum): 5 working days.

920 DOCUMENTATION

• Contents:- Copies of structural design calculations/ test reports.- General product information.- Installation information.- Inspection and maintenance reports.

• Number of copies: Electronic pdf file issued via email or two paper copies.

• Submission: Two weeks prior to date when Contractor expects work to be practicallycomplete.



L40

General glazing

L40 General glazing






111 PREGLAZING• Preglazing of components: Permitted.• Prevention of displacement: Submit details of precautions to be taken to protect glazing

and compound/ seals during delivery and installation.• Defective/ displaced glazing/ compound/ seals: Reglaze components in situ.

140 MATERIAL SAMPLES• Representative samples of designated materials: Submit before cutting panes.

- Sample size (minimum): 150 x 150 mm.- Designated materials: all glazing types .


• Glazing generally: To BS 6262.

• Integrity: Glazing must be wind and watertight under all conditions with full allowance madefor deflections and other movements.

• Dimensional tolerances: Panes/ sheets to be within ? 2 mm of specified dimensions.

• Materials:- Compatibility: Glass/ plastics, surround materials, sealers, primers and paints/ clear finishes to be used together to be compatible. Avoid contact between glazing panes/units and alkaline materials such as cement and lime.

- Protection: Keep materials dry until fixed. Protect insulating glass units and plasticsglazing sheets from the sun and other heat sources.

152 PREPARATION• Surrounds, rebates, grooves and beads: Clean and prepare before installing glazing.

155 GLASS GENERALLY

• Standards: To BS 952 and relevant parts of:- BS EN 572 for basic soda lime silicate glass.- BS EN 1096 for coated glass.- BS EN 1748-1 for borosilicate glass.- BS EN 1748-2 for ceramic glass.- BS EN 1863 for heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass.- BS EN 12150 for thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass.- BS EN 12337 for chemically strengthened soda lime silicate glass.- BS EN 13024 for thermally toughened borosilicate safety glass.- BS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass and laminated safety glass.

• Panes/ sheets: Clean and free from obvious scratches, bubbles, cracks, rippling, dimplesand other defects.- Edges: Generally undamaged. Shells and chips not more than 2 mm deep andextending not more than 5 mm across the surface are acceptable if ground out.



165 HEAT SOAKING OF THERMALLY TOUGHENED GLASS• Standard: To BS EN 14179.

- Holding period (minimum): 8 hours.- Mean glass temperature: 290? ? 10?C.

• Certified evidence of treatment: Submit.• Designated locations: Structural glazing to external balustrades .

181 BEAD FIXING WITH SCREWS• Screw spacing: Regular at maximum 225 mm centres, and within 75 mm of each corner.

181A BEAD FIXING WITH SCREWS

• Screw spacing: Regular at maximum 225 mm centres, and within 75 mm of each corner.ALL SCREWS PELLETTED

TYPES OF GLAZING

210A GENERAL NOTES GLASS• See glazing stratgey drawngs for glazing performance requirements.

Specific proposals to be submitted by the contractor to meet project requirements, and for client approval.Door / window /curtain walling manufacturers to provide proposals for their systems and inaccordance with those specification sections..ALl bead fixing methods will be ant-tamper and anti-pick.

260A BEAD FIXED SINGLE GLAZING TO INTERNAL SCREENS

• Pane material: 10mm toughened safety glass as a minimum. see glazing strategy .

• Surround/ bead: Hardwood .- Bead location: Inside .- Bead fixing: screwed and pelletted .

• Glazing system: contractor choice

• Glazing installation:- Glass: Located centrally in surround using setting and location blocks.- Gaskets and beads: Installed as recommended by frame manufacturer.Gasket fit at corners: Tight, without gaps.



M10

Cement based levelling/ wearing screeds

M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing screeds


TYPES OF SCREED

130A PROPRIETARY QUICK DRYING LEVELLING SCREEDS TO HEATED SCREED AREAS.please note that the following is an example.The contractor is responsible for designingand co-ordinating a screed / undefloor heating system that is compatible and can beprovided with the necessary warranty. The thickness stated is a minimum and allowanceshould be made in the construction build up for deviations in level due to anticipatedcamber of structural slab.

• Substrate: Insulation on concrete slab .

• Screed manufacturer: Flowcrete UK Ltd or equal approved.- Product reference: Isocrete Standard K-Screed with Isocrete Isowarm Underfloor Heating System. (or equal and approved system proposed by contractor) .

• Screed construction: Floating, as clause 291 (including Isowarm undefloor heating systemlaid on 25 / 75mm insulation layer.) .- Reinforcement for crack control: Steel fabric, as clause 392.

• Thickness:- Minimum: 75 mm (Minimum 35mm cover over pipes).

• Mix:- Cement: As clause 302.- Aggregates: Standard as clause 305.- Coarse aggrement single size: Not required. (For screed thickness in excess of 75mm, aproportion of the sand is replaced by coarse aggregate, 5mm (or 6mm) single size).

- Proportions: To manufacturer's recommendations.• In situ crushing resistance (ISCR) category: A/B (3/4 mm maximum indentation).

- Mass of test weight: 4 kg.• Flatness/ Surface regularity class: SR2.• Finish: Trowelled, as clause 540.• Other requirements: 25 / 75mm insulation suitable to receive underfloor heating system.

Lay the screed in two layers, the bottom layer being a little wetter than usual to ensure fullcompaction around heating pipes. Separation joints should be formed against walls andcolumns by using strips of compressible material. Where a thin floor finish is to be installed,overaly with a suitable thin section smoothing underlayment..

Page 171 of 266 M10 Project Fitzroy


130B PROPRIETARY QUICK DRYING LEVELLING SCREEDS TO GENERAL UNHEATEDSCREED AREAS. Please note that the following is an example. The thickness stated is aminimum and allowance should be made in the construction build up for deviations in leveldue to anticipated camber of structural slab

• Substrate: insulation on concrete slab.• Screed manufacturer: Flowcrete UK Ltd or equal approved.

- Product reference: Isocrete Standard K-Screed.• Screed construction: Floating, as clause 290A laid on 25 / 75mm insulation layer .

- Reinforcement for crack control: Steel fabric, as clause 392.• Thickness:

- Minimum: 75 mm.• Mix:

- Cement: As clause 302.- Aggregates: Standard as clause 305.- Coarse aggrement single size: Not required. (For screed thickness in excess of 75mm, aproportion of the sand is replaced by coarse aggregate, 5mm (or 6mm) single size).

- Proportions: To manufacturer's recommendations.• In situ crushing resistance (ISCR) category: A/B (3/4 mm maximum indentation).

- Mass of test weight: 4 kg.

• Flatness/ Surface regularity class: SR2.

• Finish: Trowelled, as clause 540.- To receive: Varies see finishes schedules.

• Other requirements:25 / 75mm insulation.Where a thin floor finish is to be installed, overaly with a suitable thin section smoothingunderlayment.

NB Where showers occur substitute screed type for a compatible product capable of being laid to 50mm to allow grading of floor to falls..

130D PROPRIETARY QUICK DRYING LEVELLING SCREEDS To main plant room• Substrate: concrete slab / insulation on slab .• Screed manufacturer: Flowcrete UK Ltd.

- Product reference: Isocrete Heavy Duty K-Screed .• Screed construction: Floating, as clause 290/ 290A.

- Reinforcement for crack control: Steel fabric, as clause 392.• Thickness:

- Nominal: 75 mm+.- Minimum: 60 mm .

• Mix:- Cement: As clause 302.- Proportions: To manufacturer's recommendations.

• Flatness/ Surface regularity class: SR2.• Finish: Trowelled, as clause 540.

- To receive: floor paint / sealer.

GENERALLY/ PREPARATION

205 DESIGN LIFE OF SCREEDS

• Duration: 50 years .- Subject to reasonable wear and tear.

• Location: Ground floor .

• Condition of use: Subject to correct loading and traffic usage throughout duration.



210 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES• General:

- Suitable for specified levels and flatness/ regularity of finished surfaces. Consider permissible minimum and maximum thicknesses of screeds.

- Sound and free from significant cracks and gaps.• Concrete strength: In accordance with BS 8204-1, Table 2.• Cleanliness: Remove plaster, debris and dirt.• Moisture content: To suit screed type. New concrete slabs to receive fully or partially

bonded construction must be dried out by exposure to the air for minimum six weeks.

220 PROPRIETARY LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS

• General: Materials, mix proportions, mixing methods, minimum/ maximum thicknesses andworkmanship must be in accordance with recommendations of screed manufacturer.

• Standard: To BS 8204-3.

230 CONTROL SAMPLES

• General: Complete areas of finished work and obtain approval of appearance beforeproceeding.

• Screed type: As clause 130A.- Location/ Size: Workshop 03, including movement joints.

230A CONTROL SAMPLES• General: Complete areas of finished work and obtain approval of appearance before

proceeding.• Screed type: As clause 130B.

- Location/ Size: Workshop 03, including movement joints.

230B CONTROL SAMPLES

• General: Complete areas of finished work and obtain approval of appearance beforeproceeding.

• Screed type: As clause 130C.- Location/ Size: Workshop 03, including movement joints.

250 CONDUITS UNDER FLOATING SCREEDS• Haunching: Before laying insulation for floating screeds, haunch up in 1:4 cement:sand on

both sides of conduits.

251 CONDUITS CAST INTO OR UNDER SCREEDS• Reinforcement: Overlay with reinforcement selected from:

- 500 mm wide strip of steel fabric to BS 4483, reference D49, or - Welded mesh manufactured in rolls from mild steel wire minimum 1.5 mm diameter toBS 1052, mesh size 50 x 50 mm.

• Placing reinforcement: Mid depth between top of conduit and the screed surface.- Width of reinforcement (minimum): 300 mm.

• Screed cover over conduit (minimum): 25 mm.

255 PIPE DUCTS/ TRUNKING

• Preformed access ducts: Before laying screed, fix securely to substrates and levelaccurately in relation to finished floor surface.

270 PARTIALLY BONDED CONSTRUCTION• Preparation: Generally in accordance with BS 8204-1.• Substrate surface: Brushed finish with no surface laitance.

- Texture of surface: Suitable to accept screed and achieve a bond over complete area.• Bonding coat: Slurry, as clause 275.



275 CEMENT SLURRY BONDING• Slurry type: SBR polymer modified cement.• Application: Shortly before laying screed, thoroughly wash clean the surface and keep well

wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in cement slurry bonding coat of creamy consistency.

• Screeding: While slurry is still wet.

280 UNBONDED CONSTRUCTION• Separation: Lay screed over a suitable sheet dpm or a separating layer.

- Type: Polyethylene dpm.

• Installation of separating layer: Lay on clean substrate. Turn up for full depth of screed atabutments with walls, columns, etc. Lap 100 mm at joints.

290A FLOATING CONSTRUCTION

• Insulation:- Type: 75mm to ground floors 25mm to upper floors, suitable flooring grade insulation.eg KIngspan Kooltherm K3 or similar approved . .

- Installation: Lay with tight butt joints. Continue up at perimeter abutments for full depth of screed.

• Separating layer:- Type: Polyethylene sheet minimum 125 micrometres thick (500 gauge)..- Installation: Lay over insulation and turn up at perimeter abutments. Lap 100 mm atjoints.

• Note : Sheet DPM is also required, laid under the insulation -see details• Note : Refer to the general guidance notes on joints at the end of this specification.

291 FLOATING CONSTRUCTION WITH ISOWARM UNDERFLOOR HEATING• Insulation:

- Type: Isowarm 75 / 25 mm Tackerboard insulation. Grade to be confirmed. .- Installation: Lay with tight butt joints. Continue up at perimeter abutments for full depth of screed.

• Edge strips at perimeter abutments:- Type: Isowarm 8mm PE foam strips with PE skirt to all internal surfaces.

• Separating layer:- Type: Polyethylene sheet minimum 125 micrometres thick (500 gauge)..- Installation: Lay over insulation and turn up at perimeter abutments. Lap 100 mm atjoints.

• Note : Sheet DPM is also required, see details, this should be laid under the insulation.

• Note : Refer to the general guidance notes on joints at the end of this specification.

BATCHING/ MIXING

302 CEMENTS• Cement types: In accordance with BS 8204-1, clause 5.1.3.

305 AGGREGATES• Sand: To BS EN 13139.

- Grading limits: In accordance with BS 8204-1, Table B.1.

• Coarse aggregates for fine concrete levelling screeds:- Standard: To BS EN 12620.- Designation: 4/10.

• Lightweight aggregates: In accordance with BS 8204-1, Annex A.



310 BATCHING WITH DENSE AGGREGATES• Mix proportions: Specified by weight.• Batching: Select from:

- Batch by weight.- Batch by volume: Permitted on the basis of previously established weight:volumerelationships of the particular materials. Use accurate gauge boxes. Allow for bulking of damp sand.

330 MIXING• Water content: Minimum necessary to achieve full compaction, low enough to prevent

excessive water being brought to surface during compaction.

• Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency. Mixes other than no-fines must bemixed in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall drum type mixer.

• Consistency: Use while sufficiently plastic for full compaction.

• Ready-mixed retarded screed mortar: Use within working time and site temperaturesrecommended by manufacturer. Do not retemper.

332 SCREED ADDITIVE

• The screed is to include a proprietary additive complying with the following:• The screed system is to have a current Agr?ment certificate from the British Board of Agr?

ment.• The additive is to be a powder, of black colour to enable easy confirmation of its use.• The additive is to be factory blended and batched into individual sachets of accurate weight

to suit the size of screed batch.

335 IN SITU CRUSHING RESISTANCE (ISCR)• Standards and category: In accordance with BS 8204-1, table 4.

- Testing of bonded and unbonded screeds: To Annex D.- Testing of floating levelling screeds: To Annex E.

340 ADVERSE WEATHER

• Screeds surface temperature: Maintain above 5?C for a minimum of four days after laying.

• Hot weather: Prevent premature setting or drying out.

LAYING

345 LEVEL OF SCREED SURFACES• Permissible deviation: (allowing for thickness of coverings) ?7 mm from datum.

350 SCREEDING TO FALLS• Minimum screed cover: Maintain at the lowest point.

• Falls: Gradual and consistent.- Gradient (minimum): 1:60 to gully position .

351 SCREEDING TO RAMPS

• Screed cover: Maintain consistent screed depth to graduated substrate .

• Falls: Gradual and consistent.

355 FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY OF FLOOR SCREEDS• Standard: In accordance with BS 8204-1, Table 5.• Test: In accordance with BS 8204-1, Annex C.• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.



375 COMPACTION OF SCREEDS• General: Compact thoroughly over entire area.• Screeds over 50 mm thick: Lay in two layers of approximately equal thickness. Roughen

surface of compacted lower layer then immediately lay upper layer.

392 GENERAL REINFORCEMENT• Steel fabric: To BS 4483.

- Type: D49.• Installation: In accordance with BS 8204-1.

392A GENERAL REINFORCEMENT

• Steel fabric: To BS 4483.- Type: Isocrete PP Fibres.

• Installation: To be mixed with the screed at the dosage recommended by the manufacturer.

395A STRIP REINFORCEMENT• Location: Across daywork joints and over the support beams/walls of a precast concrete

floor. .• Type: To BS 4483, table 1: D49. .

- Width of strips: 500 mm .• Installation: Place between the two layers of screed and centre over joints. Lap ends

minimum 100mm.

405 JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS GENERALLY

• Laying screeds: Lay continuously using 'wet screeds' between strips or bays. Minimizedefined joints.

• Daywork joints: Form with vertical edge.

406A BAY JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS

• Screed type: As clause 130B.

• Bay sizes:- Area (maximum): 20 m?.- Length (maximum): 6 m.

• Location of bay joints: Coordinate with those required for substrate slab and floor covering.

406B BAY JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS• Screed type: Heated screed, as clause 130A.• Bay sizes:

- Area (maximum): 20 m?.- Length (maximum): 6 m.


406C BAY JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS

• Screed type: As clause 130C.

• Bay sizes:- Area (maximum): 20 m?.- Length (maximum): 6 m.


407 SCREEDS TO RECIEVE RIGID TILES• Where rigid tiles are laid in bays, a saw cut should be made through approximately half the

screed depth, coincident with the bay joints in the tiles.• The saw cut is to be made at the time the tiles are laid to ensure accurate positioning.• The depth of cut should not cut through the screed reinforcement (if present).



428 HEATED SCREEDS• Substrate slab: Irregularities not permitted.• Screed bays, movement joints and other joints: Coordinate with heating circuits.• Heating elements: Secure properly. Prevent displacement.• Screed laying: Compact thoroughly around heating elements. Do not damage them.

440 CRACK INDUCING GROOVES IN LEVELLING SCREEDS• Groove depth: At least half the depth of screed.• Cutting grooves: Straight, vertical and accurately positioned. Select from the following:

- Trowel cut as screed is laid.- Saw cut sufficiently early after laying to prevent random cracking.

460A STRIP MOVEMENT JOINTS FOR DOOR THRESHOLDS

• Manufacturer: Contractors choice.- Product reference: Contractors choice.- Size: Contractors choice.

• Installation: Set securely into screed to exact finished level of floor. Extend joints through tosubstrate.- Secure fixing to substrate: To manufacturer's recommendation.

460B STRIP MOVEMENT JOINTS FOR UPPER FLOORS• Manufacturer: Contractors choice.

- Product reference: Contractors choice.- Size: Contractors choice.


460C STRIP MOVEMENT JOINTS INTERVALS IN SCREED (SCREED RATIO) ASMANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS

• Manufacturer: Contractors choice.- Product reference: Contractors choice.- Size: Contractors choice.


476A METAL SECTION MOVEMENT JOINTS GROUND FLOOR• Manufacturer: Contractors choice.

- Product reference: Contractors choice.- Colour of insert: Manufacturer's standard colour range.

• Bedding: 1:3 cement:sand.• Installation: Centre over joint in substrate. Set to exact finished level of floor.

- Secure fixing to substrate: To manufacturer's standard.

476B METAL SECTION MOVEMENT JOINTS UPPER FLOORS

• Manufacturer: Contractors choice.- Product reference: Contractors choice.- Colour of insert: Manufacturer's standard colour range.

• Bedding: 1:3 cement:sand.

• Installation: Centre over joint in substrate. Set to exact finished level of floor.- Secure fixing to substrate: To manufacturer's standard.



FINISHING/CURING

510 FINISHING GENERALLY• Timing: Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to setting and

hardening of screed material.• Prohibited treatments to screed surfaces:

- Wetting to assist surface working.- Sprinkling cement.

520 WOOD FLOATED FINISH

• Finish: Slightly coarse, even texture with no ridges or steps.

530 SMOOTH FLOATED FINISH

• Finish: Even texture with no ridges or steps.

540 TROWELLED FINISH TO LEVELLING SCREEDS• Floating: To an even texture with no ridges or steps.• Trowelling: To a uniform, smooth but not polished surface, free from trowel marks and

other blemishes, and suitable to receive specified flooring material.

650A CURING• General: Prevent premature drying. Immediately after laying, protect surface from wind,

draughts and strong sunlight. As soon as screed has set sufficiently, closely cover withpolyethylene sheeting.

• Curing period (minimum): Keep polyethylene sheeting in position for a minimum of: 5 days.

• Drying after curing: Allow screeds to dry gradually. Do not subject screeds to artificialdrying conditions that will cause cracking or other shrinkage related problems.Do not heat screeds or the building artificially during the first 3 weeks after laying;thereafter raise temperature slowly.



710 FOLLOWING TRADES• Adequately protect screeds/toppings from damage and contamination by subsequent

building operations.

General guidance notes

Isocrete semi-dry screeds : requirements for joints (including heated screeds)

Isocrete semi-dry screeds should be laid in accordance with BS 8204-1 where variousclauses give general information on joints and cracks in screeds. It recommends thatscreeds are laid, as far as possible, without forming joints as cracks are easier to deal withcompared to potential curling at joints. It also recognises that screeds tend to crackrandomly as they dry and shrink. To minimise, but not eliminate this risk, stress relief jointsshould be created by either forming with a trowel during laying or saw cutting after hardening.

To assist with the detailing of joint locations the following information may be of assistance:

Movement joints or expansion joints in the base must be carried up through the screed andthe floor finish. This will normally be achieved by the inclusion of a proprietary aluminiumextrusion expansion joint.

Day joints will be required by the screed layer at the limits of each day?s work. The nextarea of screed will be butted up against the previously screeded area.

The position of day joints should be agreed with the designer, main contractor and screedcontractor in advance of the screeding. For unbonded and floating screeds, a strip of D49mesh should be laid across the line of the joint at mid height of the screed.

Bonded screeds may have construction joints and contraction joints in the base screededover without the need for a screed joint. It is nevertheless a good idea to position screedday joints, where convenient to do so, over the line of such construction joints andcontraction joints. However, if these substrate joints are subject to movement, they mayreflect through to the floor finish and a joint should be formed in the screed and floor finish.Similarly, joints should be considered along the lines of rigid support to any precast plankconstructions.

Bonded, unbonded and floating screeds should have joints formed transversely atapproximately 5 metre intervals along narrow corridors and at constrictions where highshrinkage stresses are likely to induce a crack, such as across doorways and corridor corners. These joints may be day joints or formed with a trowel cut through the wet screed.

Unbonded, floating screeds and floating screeds on underfloor heating must all beseparated from walls and columns. Joints should be formed across doorways, at corridor corners and at about 5 m intervals along corridors. For floating screeds, these joints andscreed edges are usually filled with a strip of compressible foam material or insulation. For unbonded screeds, the separating layer should be turned up at the screed edges, or if notpractical, insert a foam strip. Where thin vinyl skirting or similar precludes the use of a foamstrip, the screed can be cut off the wall with a trowel cut through the wet screed. Whererigid tiles are laid in bays, a saw cut should be made through approximately half the screeddepth (one-third depth for heated screeds), coincident with the bay joints in the tiles. Thesaw cut is to be made at the time the tiles are laid to ensure accurate positioning. Thedepth of cut should not sever any mesh reinforcement, if present.

Screeds on underfloor heating may require additional joints. A joint may be needed at the



interface of areas of screed on different heating circuits or between heated and unheatedareas. Different floor finishes have different joint requirements. Resin and vinyl needminimum joints (120 to 150 m2 bays) whilst ceramic/stone finished screeds should be laidin 40 m2 bays with maximum 8 m length and an aspect ratio of 2:1. Ceramic/stone finishesare often laid on a debonding mat to prevent screed movements inducing cracks in thefinish. The designer of the underfloor heating system should be consulted.



M20

Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast coatings

M20 Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast coatings


TYPES OF COATING




160A PROPRIETARY RENDER Sto Rend Flex Cote• Substrate: Concrete blockwork as section F10.

- Preparation: sealer as recommended by manufacturer , Stolevell Cote .• Manufacturer: Sto renders

Sto Ltd. Head Office2 Gordon AvenueHillington ParkGlasgowG52 4TGTel: 0141 892 8000Fax: 0141 404 [email protected].

• Undercoats:- Product reference: StoArmat Classic with Sto Glass Fibre mesh layer .- Thickness (excluding dubbing out and keys): As recommended by manufacturer.

• Final coat:- Product reference: Stolit K.- Thickness: As manufacturer's recommendations.- Finish: stippled.

• Accessories: all necessay accesseries, including movement joinyts, angle beads andbellcast bead at bottom..

220 MULTICOAT PROPRIETARY PLASTER generally

• Substrate: Concrete blockwork, as section F10.- Preparation: Bonding agent recommended by plaster manufacturer.

• Manufacturer: British Gypsum.• Undercoats:

- Product reference: Thistle Hardwall plaster .- Thickness (excluding dubbing out): 11mm.

• Final coat:- Product reference: Thistle Durafinish.- Thickness: 2mm.- Finish: Smooth.

• Accessories: Beads and stops .

280A GYPSUM PLASTER SKIM COAT ON PLASTERBOARD celings

• Plasterboard: 15mm Duraline .- Skim coat: Thistle Durafinish .

• Plaster: As Clause 280B.- Thickness: 2-5mm- Finish: Smooth.

• Accessories:- Plaster stop bead , angle beads and corner reinforcements, to client approval .



GENERAL

421 SCAFFOLDING• General: Prevent putlog holes and other breaks in coatings.

430 READY-TO-USE CEMENT GAUGED RENDER MORTARS• Time and temperature limitations: Use within limits prescribed by mortar manufacturer

- Retempering: Restore workability with water only within prescribed time limits.

497 COLD WEATHER

• General: Do not use frozen materials or apply coatings on frozen or frost bound substrates.

• External work: Avoid when air temperature is at or below 5?C and falling or below 3?C andrising. Maintain temperature of work above freezing until coatings have fully hardened.

• Internal work: Take precautions to enable internal coating work to proceed withoutdetriment when air temperature is below 3?C.

PREPARING SUBSTRATES

510 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES• Soundness: Free from loose areas and significant cracks and gaps.• Cutting, chasing, making good, fixing of conduits and services outlets and the like:

Completed.• Tolerances: Permitting specified flatness/ regularity of finished coatings.• Cleanliness: Free from dirt, dust, efflorescence and mould, and other contaminants

incompatible with coatings.

541 BONDING AGENT APPLICATION

• General: Apply evenly to substrate to achieve effective bond of plaster/ render coat.Protect adjacent joinery and other surfaces.

BACKINGS/ BEADS/ JOINTS

600 ADDITIONAL FRAMING SUPPORTS FOR BACKINGS• Framing: Accurately position and securely fix to give full support to fixtures, fittings and

service outlets.• Support board edges and perimeters: As recommended by board manufacturer to suit type

and performance of board.

612 JOINTS IN PLASTERBOARD BACKINGS• Ceilings:

- Bound edges: At right angles to supports and with ends staggered in adjacent rows.- Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.

• Partitions/ walls:- Vertical joints: Centre on studs. Stagger joints on opposite sides of studs. Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.

- Horizontal joints:Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers by at least 600 mm. Support edges of outer layer.

• Joint widths (maximum): 3 mm.

630 BEADS/ STOPS FOR INTERNAL USE Generally• Material: Galvanized steel to BS EN 13658-1.

636 BEADS/ STOPS FOR EXTERNAL USE render• Material: Stainless steel to BS EN 10088-1, grade 1.4301 .



638A METAL LATHING• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.• Material: steel mesh lathing where plaster finish background differs .

640 BEADS/ STOPS GENERALLY• Location: External angles and stop ends except where specified otherwise.• Corners: Neat mitres at return angles.• Fixing: Secure, using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line and level,

ensuring full contact of wings with substrate.- Beads/ stops for external render: Fix mechanically.

• Finishing: After coatings have been applied, remove surplus material while still wet, fromsurfaces of beads/ stops exposed to view.

646 CRACK CONTROL AT JUNCTIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR SOLID SUBSTRATES

• Locations: Where defined movement joints are not required. Where dissimilar solidsubstrate materials are in same plane and rigidly bonded or tied together.

• Crack control materials:- Isolating layer: Building paper to BS 1521.- Metal lathing: Internally: Galvanized steel plain expanded metal with spacers .

• Installation: Fix metal lathing over isolating layer. Stagger fixings along both edges of lathing.

• Width of installation over single junctions:- Isolating layer: 150 mm.- Lathing: 300 mm.

• Width of installation across face of dissimilar substrate material (column, beam, etc. withface width not greater than 450 mm):- Isolating layer: 25 mm (minimum) beyond junctions with adjacent substrate.- Lathing: 100 mm (minimum) beyond edges of isolating layer.

646A CRACK CONTROL - MOVEMENT OF MASONRY / DISSIMILAR BACKGROUNDSDuring detailed design stage the contractor will be responsible for the design of themovement joints and their surface treatment. The contractor will propose locations andmethods to the architect and structural engineer to review. All jointing methods to beapproved prior to installation.

659 PLASTERBOARD JOINTS

• Joints and angles (except where coincident with metal beads). Reinforce with continuouslengths of jointing tape.

673 PLASTERING OVER CONDUITS/ SERVICE CHASES• General: Prevent cracking over conduits and other services.• Services chased into substrate: Isolate from coating by covering with galvanized metal

lathing, fixed at staggered centres along both edges.

INTERNAL PLASTERING

710 APPLICATION GENERALLY

• Application of coatings: Firmly and in one continuous operation between angles and joints.Achieve good adhesion.

• Appearance of finished surfaces: Even and consistent. Free from rippling, hollows, ridges,cracks and crazing.- Accuracy: Finish to a true plane, to correct line and level, with angles and corners to aright angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals plumb and square.

• Drying out: Prevent excessively rapid or localized drying out.



715 FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.• Deviation of plaster surface: Measure from underside of a straight edge placed anywhere

on surface.- Permissible deviation (maximum) for plaster not less than 13 mm thick: 3 mm in anyconsecutive length of 1800 mm.

720 DUBBING OUT• General: Correct substrate inaccuracies.• New smooth dense concrete and similar surfaces: Dubbing out prohibited unless total

plaster thickness is within range recommended by plaster manufacturer.

• Thickness of any one coat (maximum): 10 mm.

• Mix: As undercoat.

• Application: Achieve firm bond. Allow each coat to set sufficiently before the next isapplied. Cross scratch surface of each coat.

725 UNDERCOATS GENERALLY

• General: Rule to an even surface. Cross scratch to provide a key for the next coat.

• Undercoats on metal lathing: Work well into interstices to obtain maximum key.• Undercoats gauged with Portland cement: Do not apply next coat until drying shrinkage is

substantially complete.

742 THIN COAT PLASTER• Preparation for plasters less than 2 mm thick: Fill holes, scratches and voids with finishing

plaster.

777 SMOOTH FINISH

• Appearance: A tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abrupt changes of level or trowel marks. Avoid water brush, excessive trowelling and over polishing.

EXTERNAL RENDERING

810 APPLICATION GENERALLY• Application of coatings: Firmly and in one continuous operation between angles and joints.

Achieve good adhesion.• Appearance of finished surfaces: Even and consistent. Free from rippling, hollows, ridges,

cracks and crazing.- Accuracy: Finish to a true plane, to correct line and level, with angles and corners to aright angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals plumb and square.

• Drying: Prevent excessively rapid or localized drying out.

820A DUBBING OUT FOR RENDERING

• General: Correct substrate inaccuracies.

• In accordance with Sto recommendations

840 UNDERCOATS GENERALLY

• General: Rule to an even surface. Comb to provide a key for the next coat. Do notpenetrate the coat.

• Undercoats on metal lathing: Work well into interstices to obtain maximum key.

856 FINAL COAT - PLAIN FLOATED FINISH• Finish: Even, open texture free from laitance.



880 CURING AND DRYING• General: Prevent premature setting and uneven drying of each coat.• Curing coatings: Keep each coat damp by covering with polyethylene sheet and/ or

spraying with water.- Curing period (minimum): As the render manufacturer's recommendations.- Final coat: Hang sheeting clear of the final coat.

• Drying: Allow each coat to dry thoroughly, with drying shrinkage substantially completebefore applying next coat.

• Protection: Protect from frost and rain.



M50

Rubber/ plastics/ cork/ lino/ carpet tiling/ sheeting

M50 Rubber/ plastics/ cork/ lino/ carpet tiling/ sheeting


GENERAL

90 VOC CONTENT

• All Vinyl/linoleum, Cork and Rubber, Carpet and laminated wood flooring materials must bemanufactured in accordance with BS EN 14041:2004.

• Emission levels of all flooring materials must tested against and meet the minimumstandards of Formaldehyde E1 in accordance with BS EN 717-1:2004. Manufacturer toverify that regulated preservatives are absent and of the minimum content.

• All flooring adhesives to be in accordance with BS EN 13999-1: 2007. Manufacturer toverify that carcinogenic or sensitising volatile substances are absent.

• Upon completion, the contractor shall provide copies of the manufacturer's productliterature confirming:- The standard(s) against which the product is tested.- The VOC emissions achieved.- The VOC emissions meet the required level.

95 SIMILAR EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS• Wherever products are specified by proprietary name and the phrase 'or equivalent' is not

included, it is to be deemed included.• Demonstration of equivalence is the responsibility of the sub-contractor/supplier.

TYPES OF COVERING

150A SHEETING Type 4 vinyl

• Location: Refer to architect's drawings 40 series.

• Base: Power floated concrete / screed / heated screed .- Preparation: As clause 430.

• Fabricated underlay: Not required.

• Flooring roll: Heterogeneous PVC to BS EN 13845BS EN 685 class 34/ 43.- Manufacturer: As Clause 150B

• Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): as manufacturersrecommendations.

• Seam welding: Hot welding with complimentary coloured rod as clause 650 & 680 .• Accessories: skirtings : as cleint's bespoke details - secure detail to patient areas including

Trespa skirting.• Finishing: As clause 820b.• Other requirements: As clause 880.

150B FLOORING ROLL - Vinyl type 4• Manufacturer: Altro Floors tel 01462 480480

product reference : Altro Wood SafetyThickness: 2.0 mm.

• Colour: Refer to finishes schedule.

• Seam welding: Hot welded with matching coloured rod.



150C SHEETING Type 6 vinyl• Location: Refer to architect's drawings 40 series.• Base: Power floated concrete / screed / heated screed.

- Preparation: As clause 430.• Fabricated underlay: Not required.• Flooring roll: Homogeneous PVC to BS EN 13845

BS EN 695 class 34/43.- Manufacturer: As Clause 150D

• Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): As recommended by flooringmanufacturer.

• Seam welding: Hot welding with complimentary coloured rod as clause 650 & 680 .• Accessories: Skirtings : coved skirting as client bespoke details, secure detail to patient

areas including Trespa fixed skirting. .• Finishing: As clause 820.• Other requirements: As clause 880.

150D HOMOGENEOUS PVC FLOOR COVERINGManufacturer: Altro Floors tel 01462 480480product reference : Altro WALKWAY 20Thickness: [2.0 mm].Colour: [Refer to finishes schedule tbc].Seam welding: [Hot welded with matching coloured rod].Colour: Refer to finishes schedule.

150I SHEETING type 9 sports floor• Location: Refer to architect's drawings.• Base: Power floated concrete.

- Preparation: As clause 430.• Fabricated underlay: tbc.• Flooring roll: POLYFLOR SPORTS FLOORING.

- Manufacturer: POLYFLOR.Product reference: -.

- BS EN 685 class: -.- Width: tbc.- Thickness: tbc.Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): -.

• Seam welding: -.

• Accessories: -.

• Finishing: -.

• Other requirements: -.

150X PVC-U SHEET CLADDING WITHIN ensuite showers and wet areas

• Manufacturer: Altro.- Web: www.altro.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Whiterock White

• Size: 3000 x 1220mm.Joints - welded

150Y PVC-U SHEET CLADDING SPLASHBACKS ABOVE WORKTOPS• Manufacturer: Altro.

- Web: www.altro.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Whiterock chameleon

• Size: 450mm high.



155A PVC SHEET FLOORING IN WET AREAS: flooring type 5• Location: see 40 series drawings.• Base: New concrete / screed / heated screed.

- Preparation: As clause 430.• Fabricated underlay: Not Required.• Flooring roll: Homogeneous PVC to BS EN 13553.

- Manufacturer: As clause 155B.• Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): Altrofix A19 plus.• Seam welding: Hot welding with complimentary coloured rod .• Accessories: Skirtings : to client's bespoke secure detail including 75 x 16mm Trespa

skirting fixed over coved vinyl. .• Finishing: None.• Other requirements: To be used in conjunction with PVC sheet wall covering as clause

155C.

155B HOMOGENEOUS FLOOR COVERING TYPE 5 WET AREAS

• Manufacturer: Altro.- Web: www.altro.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Altro Aquarius 2mm thick safety flooring:Colours Refer to finishes schedule.

155D PVC SHEET FLOORING IN SPECIAL WET AREAS flooring type 7 wet roomsLocation: [see 40 series drawings].Base: [New concrete / screed / heated screed].- Preparation: [As clause 430].Fabricated underlay: [Not Required].Flooring roll: Homogeneous PVC to BS EN 13553.

- Manufacturer: [As clause 155E].Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): [Altrofix A19 plus].Seam welding: [Hot welding with complimentary coloured rod ].Accessories: [Skirtings : to client's bespoke secure detail including 75 x 16mm Trespaskirting fixed over coved vinyl. ].Finishing: [None].Other requirements: [To be used in conjunction with PVC sheet wall covering as clause155C].

155E PVC SHEET FLOORING IN SPECIAL WET AREAS flooring type 7Manufacturer: Altro.- Web: www.altro.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Altro Marine 2mm thick safety flooring:Colours [Refer to finishes schedule].



170A CARPETING• Location: types 1 and 3 see 40 series drawings .• Base: concrete / screed.

Carpet:- Manufacturer: Gradus Carpets, Park Green, Macclesfield, Cheshire, SK11 7LZ.Tel: 01625 859000 Fax: 01625 850352Website: www.gradusworld.com Email: [email protected] reference: Gradus Genus.

- Type: Tufted Graphics.Surface Yarn: 100% Marquesa SDDimensions/backing: Broadloom 4.00mTotal Carpet Thickness: 8mmPrimary backing: 100% PolypropyleneColours: to be confirmedWarranties: 15 year wear warranty, 10 year anti-static warranty, 5 year stain & fadewarranty. Full warranty details available on request.Carpet adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): -.Installation: 4.00m Broadloom, recommended adhesive. F. Ball & Co. 01538 361633.Product F3All joints to be seam sealed using Gradus recommended seam sealer F. Ball & Co.01538 361633. Product F30All carpet should be laid in accordance with BS5325:2001 Installation of textilefloorcovering.For further installation advice, please contact Gradus Technical Services 01625 428922 .

170B CARPETING

• Location: Type 2 - see 40 series drawings for locations .• Base: concrete / screed.

- Manufacturer: : Gradus Carpets, Park Green, Macclesfield, Cheshire, SK11 7LZ.Tel: 01625 859000 Fax: 01625 850352Website: www.gradusworld.com Email: [email protected] reference: Gradus Adventurer.

- Type: Tufted Patterned Loop Pile Carpet .Construction: Tufted Patterned Loop Pile (1/13 gauge)Surface Yarn: 100% TDX Solution Dyed NylonDimensions/backing: Tile 500mm x 500mm Bitumen BackedPile Thickness: 2.8mmTotal Carpet Thickness: 6.2mmPrimary backing: Synthetic Non-WovenColours: tbcWarranties: 10 year wear warranty (Full details on requestCarpet adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): -.Installation: All carpet should be laid in accordance with BS5325:2001 Installation of textile floorcovering.For further installation advice, please contact Gradus Technical Services 01625 428922 .

190A CARPET TYPE 8 BARRIER MATTING

• Location: as shown on 40 series dwgs.

• Base: screed.

• Covering:- Manufacturer: Gradus.Product reference: boulevard 5000HD.

- Colour: TBC.

195 FLOOR FINISH MATERIALS SPECIFICATION• Minimum BRE 'Green Guide to Specification Online' rating: A.




210 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY• Base condition after preparation: Rigid, dry, sound, smooth and free from grease, dirt and

other contaminants.• Finished coverings: Accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securely bonded, smooth and free

from air bubbles, rippling, adhesive marks and stains.

220 SAMPLES• Covering samples: Before placing orders, submit representative sample of each type.

230 CONTROL SAMPLES

• General: Complete areas of finished work in approved locations as follows, and obtainapproval of appearance before proceeding: Bedroom .

250 LAYOUT - ROLL MATERIALS• Setting out of seams: Agree setting out for sheeting types M50/ 150 .

251 LAYOUT - SEAMS IN ROLL MATERIALS• Setting out: Minimise occurrences of seams and cross seams.• Cross seams: Not permitted in following locations: Not applicable.

270 EXTRA MATERIAL

• Provision of extra material: At completion, hand to Employer extra material of each type of covering to extent of to be agreed with client's maintenance team .

330 COMMENCEMENT• Required condition of works prior to laying materials:

- Building is weathertight and well dried out.- Wet trades have finished work.- Paintwork is finished and dry.- Conflicting overhead work is complete.- Floor service outlets, duct covers and other fixtures around which materials are to be cutare fixed.

• Notification: Submit not less than 48 hours before commencing laying.

340 CONDITIONING

• Prior to laying: Condition materials by unpacking and separating in spaces where they areto be laid. Maintain resilient flooring rolls in an upright position. Unroll carpet and keep flaton a supporting surface.

• Conditioning time and temperature (minimum): As recommended by manufacturer withtime extended by a factor of two for materials stored or transported at a temperature of lessthan 10?C immediately prior to laying.

350 ENVIRONMENT• Temperature and humidity: Before, during and after laying, maintain approximately at

levels which will prevail after building is occupied.• Ventilation: Before during and after laying, maintain adequate provision.

PREPARING BASES

410 NEW BASES

• Suitability of bases and conditions within any area: Commencement of laying of coveringswill be taken as acceptance of suitability.



430 NEW WET LAID BASES• Base drying aids: Not used for at least four days prior to moisture content testing.• Base moisture content test: Carry out in accordance with BS 5325, Annexe A or BS 8203,

Annexe A.- Locations for readings: In all corners, along edges, and at various points over area beingtested.

• Commencement of laying coverings: Not until all readings show 75% relative humidity or less.

430A NEW WET LAID BASES

• Should RH levels to new floors not be acheived , contractor to propose surface DPMcompatable with floor covering.

440 SUBSTRATES TO RECEIVE THIN COVERINGS

• Trowelled finishes: Uniform, smooth surface free from trowel marks and other blemishes.Abrade suitably to receive specified floor covering material.

460 SMOOTHING/ LEVELLING UNDERLAYMENT COMPOUND• Type: Protein free and compatible with floor covering systems and adhesives .• Manufacturer: Submit proposals.

- Product reference: Submit proposals.

LAYING COVERINGS

610 SETTING OUT TILES

• Method: Set out from centre of area/ room, so that wherever possible:- Tiles along opposite edges are of equal size.- Edge tiles are more than 50% of full tile width.

620 COLOUR CONSISTENCY

• Finished work in any one area/ room: Free from banding or patchiness.

640 ADHESIVE FIXING GENERALLY• Adhesive type: As specified, as recommended by covering/ underlay, manufacturer or as

approved.• Primer: Type and usage as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.• Application: As necessary to achieve good bond.• Finished surface: Free from trowel ridges, high spots caused by particles on the substrate,

and other irregularities.

650 SEAMS

• Patterns: Matched.

• Joints: Tight without gaps.

670 BORDERS/ AND FEATURE STRIPS IN SHEET MATERIAL• Curl: Not acceptable.• Corners: Mitre joints.

680 SEAM WELDING COVERINGS• Commencement: At least 24 hours after laying, or after adhesive has set.• Joints: Neat, smooth, strongly bonded, flush with finished surface.

720 DOORWAYS

• Joint location: On centre line of door leaf.



740A CONSTRUCTION JOINT COVERS• Manufacturer: Gradus.

- Web: www.gradusworld.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Construction Joint Covers

• Type: EJC 75.• Colour: tbc.

740B MISCELLANEOUS FLOOR TRIMS• Manufacturer: Gradus.

- Web: www.gradusworld.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Multi-purpose Transition Strips

• Type: ETR302.

750A STAIR NOSINGS

• Manufacturer: Gradus.- Web: www.gradusworld.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Traditional Aluminium A Stair Edging

• Channel:- Type: ADM2: Interior aluminium rake back stair edging, 2 mm gauge, 55 mm tread, 55 mriser, single channel .

- Finish: Mill .• Insert:

- Type: Interior.- Colour: Black, with contrasting nosings at top and bottom of each flight.

• Side trim: TA5B.

750B STAIR TRIMS

• Manufacturer: Gradus.- Web: www.gradusworld.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Stair Trim

• Type: TA5B/TAXT5B ? Interior aluminium side trim, 3.5 mm gauge, 32 mm high.

• Colour: not applicable .

760 STAIR COVERINGS - SEPARATE RISERS AND TREADS• Fixing: Accurately cut. Fit risers before treads.

770C SELF-COVED SKIRTINGS secure detail• Types: PVC.• Cove former: Forbo PR cove or similar approved.

- Securely bond to base and background using contact adhesive. Accurately mitre atcorners.

• Top edge trim: Trespa skirting see detail.- Securely bond to background using contact adhesive, with top edge straight and parallelwith floor. see detail for Trespa skirting fixed through coving. Top edge sealed with anti-pick mastic .

• Fixing:- Turn flooring material up wall, securely bond to cove former and background usingadhesive specified for fixing to base.

- Accurately mitre at corners.- All joints to be hot welded in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.



770D SELF COVED SKIRTING :STANDARD DETAILTypes: [PVC].Cove former: [Forbo PR cove or similar approved].- Securely bond to base and background using contact adhesive. Accurately mitre atcorners.Top edge trim: [TA6 Gradus metal capping].

- Securely bond to background using contact adhesive, with top edge straight and parallelwith floor. Fixing:

- Turn flooring material up wall, securely bond to cove former and background usingadhesive specified for fixing to base.

- Accurately mitre at corners.- All joints to be hot welded in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

780 TRAFFICKING AFTER LAYING

• Covering types: Generally.

• Traffic free period: Until adhesive is set.

COMPLETION

820B FINISHING PLASTICS FLOORING• Cleaning operations:

- Wash floor with water containing neutral (pH 6-9) detergent. If necessary, lightly scrubheavily soiled areas.

- Rinse with clean water, removing surplus to prevent damage to adhesive. Allow to dry.

861 SLIP RESISTANCE TESTING• Testing authority: A UKAS accredited laboratory.• Floor covering(s) to be tested: M50/ 150A.

• Test: To BS 7976.- Floor covering condition: Dry and wet.- Witnessing/ Certification: Arrange for tests to be witnessed/ certified by: Project Manager.

• Report: Submit.

880 WASTE

• Spare covering material: Retain suitable material for patching. On completion submitpieces for selection. Hand over selected pieces to Employer.



M60

Painting/clear finishing

M60 Painting/clear finishing





95 VOC CONTENT

• All decorative paints and varnishes must be manufactured in accordance with BS EN13300:2001 referred to the criteria of Decoratrive Paint Directive 2004/42/CE.

• Emission levels of all decorative paints and varnishes must be tested against and meet theminimum standards of VOC (organic solvent) content in accordance with BS EN ISO11890-2:2006.

• All decorative paints and varnishes must be fungal and algal resistant.• Upon completion, the contractor shall provide copies of the manufacturer's product

literature confirming:- The standard(s) against which the product is tested.- The VOC emissions achieved.- The VOC emissions meet the required level.

COATING SYSTEMS

110A MATT FINISH PAINT TO INTERNAL WALLS, CEILINGS GENERALLY

• Manufacturer:DULUX PAINTSAkzo NobelHead OfficeStrawinskylaan 25551077 ZZ AmsterdamNetherlandsJohnstones,Product reference: DULUX DIAMOND EGGSHELLSurface : new plastered surfaces.

• Colour: Refer to finishes schedule.Coats:One thinned coat as recommended for new plaster 2 x full coats.

110B EMULSION PAINT TO INTERNAL UNPLASTERED BLOCKWORK• Manufacturer:

DULUX PAINTSAkzo NobelHead OfficeStrawinskylaan 25551077 ZZ AmsterdamNetherlandsJohnstones,Product reference: DULUX DIAMOND EGGSHELLSurface : new plastered surfaces.Colour: [WHITE].Coats:Apply sealant2 x full coats.



160A DECORATIVE WOODSTAIN/ VARNISH/ PRESERVATIVE to hardwood skirtings• Manufacturer: Sikkens .

- Product reference: Cetol unitop .• Surfaces: hardwood skirtings .

- Preparation: sand and de-grease .• Initial coats: As recommended by manufacturer .

- Number of coats: 1 .• Finishing coats: - .

- Number of coats: 2 .

180 FLOOR COATING TO PLANT ROOM FLOORS

• Manufacturer: As clause 180A.- Product reference: As clause 180A.

• Surfaces: powerfloated concrete / floated screed.- Preparation: As clauses 400, 440.

• Initial coats: seal concrete surfaces with a thinned coat (by up to 10% by volume withwater). As recommended by manufacturer.- Number of coats: one.

• Finishing coats: acrylic resin.- Number of coats: two.- Slip resistance value - water wet (minimum): Not applicable.

180A ACRYLIC RESIN FLOOR PAINT• Manufacturer: Johnstones, a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings UK Ltd.

- Web: www.johnstonestrade.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Johnstone's Low Slip Concrete Floor Paint

• Colour: Dark Grey.

195 SPECIAL COATING To Areas requiring hygenic coating and wet areas

• Manufacturer: As clause 195A.- Product reference: As clause 195A.

• Surfaces: new plastered walls.- Preparation: As clauses 400, 440.

• Initial coats: As recommended by manufacturer.- Number of coats: one.

• Undercoats: As recommended by manufacturer.- Number of coats: one.

• Finishing coats: acrylic polymeric paint.- Number of coats: two.- Slip resistance value - water wet (minimum): Not applicable .

195A ACRYLIC POLYMERIC COATING• Manufacturer: Sika

- Web: www.liquidplastics.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Sikagard-203 W (Steridex)

• Colour: white.

195B SPECIAL COATING To seclusion areas

• Manufacturer: Bradite 2k.- Product reference: EW99 semi gloss .

•



GENERALLY

215 HANDLING AND STORAGE• Coating materials: Deliver in sealed containers, labelled clearly with brand name, type of

material and manufacturer's batch number.• Materials from more than one batch: Store separately. Allocate to distinct parts or areas of

the work.

220 COMPATIBILITY• Coating materials selected by contractor:

- Recommended by their manufacturers for the particular surface and conditions of exposure.

- Compatible with each other.- Compatible with and not inhibiting performance of preservative/fire retardantpretreatments.

240 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED

• Radiator valves and stop valves.

280 PROTECTION• 'Wet paint' signs and barriers: Provide where necessary to protect other operatives and

general public, and to prevent damage to freshly applied coatings.

300 CONTROL SAMPLES

• Sample areas of finished work: Carry out, including preparation, as follows:Types of coating LocationM60/ tbc . Sample Room .

• Approval of appearance: Obtain before commencement of general coating work.

320 INSPECTION BY COATING MANUFACTURERS

• General: Permit manufacturers to inspect work in progress and take samples of their materials from site if requested.



PREPARATION

400 PREPARATION GENERALLY• Standard: In accordance with BS 6150.• Suspected existing hazardous materials: Prepare risk assessments and method

statements covering operations, disposal of waste, containment and reoccupation, andobtain approval before commencing work.

• Preparation materials: Types recommended by their manufacturers and the coatingmanufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.

• Substrates: Sufficiently dry in depth to suit coating.• Efflorescence salts: Remove.• Dirt, grease and oil: Remove. Give notice if contamination of surfaces/ substrates has

occurred.• Surface irregularities: Remove.• Joints, cracks, holes and other depressions: Fill flush with surface, to provide smooth

finish.• Dust, particles and residues from preparation: Remove and dispose of safely.• Water based stoppers and fillers:

- Apply before priming unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer.- If applied after priming: Patch prime.

• Oil based stoppers and fillers: Apply after priming.

• Doors, opening windows and other moving parts:- Ease, if necessary, before coating.- Prime resulting bare areas.

471 PREPRIMED WOOD

• Areas of defective primer: Take back to bare wood and reprime.

481 UNCOATED WOOD• General: Provide smooth, even finish with arrises and moulding edges lightly rounded or

eased.• Heads of fasteners: Countersink sufficient to hold stoppers/fillers.• Resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting.

500 PREPRIMED STEEL

• Areas of defective primer, corrosion and loose scale: Take back to bare metal. Reprime assoon as possible.

511 GALVANIZED, SHERARDIZED AND ELECTROPLATED STEEL• White rust: Remove.• Pretreatment: Apply one of the following:

- 'T wash'/ mordant solution to blacken whole surface.- Etching primer recommended by coating system manufacturer.

521 UNCOATED STEEL - MANUAL CLEANING• Oil and grease: Remove.• Corrosion, loose scale, welding slag and spatter: Remove.• Residual rust: Treat with a proprietary removal solution.

• Primer: Apply as soon as possible.

560 UNCOATED CONCRETE

• Release agents: Remove.



580 UNCOATED PLASTER• Nibs, trowel marks and plaster splashes: Scrape off.• Overtrowelled ?polished? areas: Key lightly.

590 UNCOATED PLASTERBOARD• Depressions around fixings: Fill with stoppers/ fillers

622 ORGANIC GROWTHS

• Dead and loose growths and infected coatings: Scrape off and remove from site.

• Treatment biocide: Apply appropriate solution to growth areas and surrounding surfaces.

• Residual effect biocide: Apply appropriate solution to inhibit re-establishment of growths.

645 SEALING OF INTERNAL MOVEMENT JOINTS• General: To junctions of walls and ceilings with architraves, skirtings and other trims.• Sealant: Water based acrylic.

- Manufacturer: anti-pick sealant to contractors proposals.Product reference: to be confirmed .

- Preparation and application: As section Z22.

APPLICATION

711 COATING GENERALLY

• Application standard: In accordance with BS 6150, clause 9.

• Conditions: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality during application anddrying.

• Surfaces: Clean and dry at time of application.

• Thinning and intermixing of coatings: Not permitted unless recommended by manufacturer.

• Overpainting: Do not paint over intumescent strips or silicone mastics.

• Priming coats:- Thickness: To suit surface porosity.- Application: As soon as possible on same day as preparation is completed.

• Finish:- Even, smooth and of uniform colour.- Free from brush marks, sags, runs and other defects.- Cut in neatly.

• Doors, opening windows and other moving parts: Ease before coating and between coats.

720 PRIMING JOINERY• Preservative treated timber: Retreat cut surfaces with two flood coats of a suitable

preservative before priming.• End grain: Coat liberally allow to soak in, and recoat.

730 WORKSHOP COATING OF CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES

• General: Apply coatings to all surfaces of components.

760 VARNISHING WOOD

• First coat: Thin with plant oil based thinner.- Brush well in and lay off avoiding aeration.

• Subsequent coats: Rub down lightly along the grain between coats.

780 BEAD GLAZING TO COATED WOOD• Before glazing: Apply first two coats to rebates and beads.



800 GLAZING• Etched, sand blasted and ground glass: Treat or mask edges before coating to protect

from contamination by oily constituents of coating materials.

810 WATER REPELLENT• Application: Liberally flood surface, giving complete and even coverage.



M61

Intumescent coatings for fire protection of steelwork

M61 Intumescent coatings for fire protection of steelwork

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions

PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEMS




105 VOC CONTENT• All decorative paints and varnishes must be manufactured in accordance with BS EN

13300:2001 referred to the criteria of Decoratrive Paint Directive 2004/42/CE.• Emission levels of all decorative paints and varnishes must be tested against and meet the

minimum standards of VOC (organic solvent) content in accordance with BS EN ISO11890-2:2006.

• All decorative paints and varnishes must be fungal and algal resistant.• Upon completion, the contractor shall provide copies of the manufacturer's product

literature confirming:- The standard(s) against which the product is tested.- The VOC emissions achieved.- The VOC emissions meet the required level.

110A ON SITE COATING TO PRIMED STEEL GENERAL NOTESThe contractor may select their preferred paint system to acheive the required fireprotection to steelwork in accordance with engineers performance requirements.The clauses below provide examples of manufacturers specifications.

110B INTUMESCENT BASECOAT• Manufacturer: Nullifire - Part of Tremco illbruck Coatings Ltd.

- Web: www.nullifire.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Nullifire S707-60

• Fire resistance (to BS 476-21): 60 minutes.• Primer: S-624.• Topseal:

- Type: Not required.- Colour: Not applicable.



110C ON SITE COATING TO PRIMED STEEL INTERNALLYUse/ location: Internal element of structure.Fire resistance to BS 476-21: 60 minutes.Preparation and priming:- Ensure existing primer is compatible with intumescent coating and primed surface isclean, dry and free from any grease, dust and contaminants.

- Primer should be a minimum of 50 - 75 microns dft ensuring blast profile is fully covered.- Primer should be no more than 250 microns thick.Intumescent coat: As clause 110B.

- Dry film thickness: As recommended by manufacturer to achieve to required fire rating.Finish:

- Non-visible areas: Basic, as clause 440;- Visible areas: Normal decorative, as clause 450; and - Visible areas: High decorative, as clause 460. Top sealer coat: Type recommended by intumescent coating manufacturer.

- Dry film thickness: As recommended by manufacturer.- Colour: White, RAL 9010.Bolt head/ nut protection: As main steelwork.

115A ON SITE COATING TO GALVANIZED STEEL EXTERNALLY

• Use/ Location: External elements of structure.

• Fire resistance to BS 476-21: 60 minutes.

• Preparation: Degrease and clean thoroughly.

• Pretreatment: as recommended by manufacturer.

• Primer: Nullifire S620 high build primer, as recommended by intumescent coatingmanufacturer.

• Intumescent coat: As clause 115B.- Dry film thickness: As recommended by manufacturer to achieve to required fire rating.

• Finish:- Non-visible areas: Basic, as clause 440;- Visible areas: Normal decorative, as clause 450; and- Visible areas: High decorative, as clause 460 .

• Top sealer coat: Type recommended by intumescent coating manufacturer.- Dry film thickness: As recommended by manufacturer.- Colour: White, RAL 9010.

• Bolt head/ nut protection: As main steelwork.

115B INTUMESCENT BASECOAT

• Manufacturer: Nullifire - Part of Tremco illbruck Coatings Ltd.- Web: www.nullifire.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Nullifire S605

• Fire resistance (to BS 476-21): 60 minutes.

• Primer: S-620.

• Topseal:- Type: Nullifire TS-815.- Colour: RAL 9010, to be confirmed.


205 VALIDATION OF MATERIALS• Project specific evaluation of intumescent coating materials:

- Standard: To BS 8202-2, clause 4.- Test results: Submit on request.



210 WORKING PROCEDURES• Standard: To BS 8202-2.• Give notice: Before commencing surface preparation and coating application.• Quality control: Record project specific procedures for surface preparation and coating

application.

215 WORKING CONDITIONS• General: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality during coating application

and drying.• Surfaces to be coated: Clean and dry at time of coating application.

220 APPLICATOR'S PERSONNEL

• Operatives: Trained/ experienced in anticorrosive and intumescent coatings.

• Evidence of training/ experience: Submit on request.

250 SPRAYED COATING APPLICATION• Spray drift: Minimize.• Masking: Protect designated adjacent surfaces.

- Designated surfaces: Fair faced brickwork .

260 CONTROL SAMPLES• General: Carry out sample areas of finished work as follows:

One column and two adjoining beams.

• Approval of appearance: Obtain before commencement of general coating application.

270 INSPECTION

• Permit intumescent coating manufacturer to:- Inspect work in progress.- Inspect quality control records.- Take dry film thickness and other measurements.- Take samples of coating products.

• Intumescent coating manufacturer's inspection reports: Submit without delay.

280 OFF SITE COATED STEEL• Handling and erection: Use methods and devices designed to minimise damage to

intumescent coatings.

PREPARATION OF SURFACES

315 NEW STEEL - BLAST CLEANING

• Preparation: Remove oil and grease.

• Blast cleaning:- Atmospheric condition: Dry.- Abrasive: Suitable type and size, free from fines, moisture and oil.- Finish: To BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade SA2?, with an average profile of approximately 75 micrometres.

- Abrasive residues and moisture: Remove.

• Primer: Apply as soon as possible after cleaning and before gingering or blackeningappears.



APPLICATION OF COATINGS

410 INTUMESCENT DRY FILM THICKNESS (DFT)• Required dft: Determine for every steel member to give specified period of fire resistance.

Use intumescent coating manufacturer's current published loading tables.- Special sections and partial fire exposure conditions: Obtain required dft in writing frommanufacturer.

• Schedule and drawings: Submit at least two weeks before starting work.- Schedule content: Member sizes, weights/thicknesses, loading conditions, etc. showing,for each variant, the exposed perimeter/ sectional area (Hp/A) ratio and required dft.

- Drawing content: Steelwork drawings marked in colour to show required dft for eachmember.

420 MEASUREMENT OF INTUMESCENT DFT

• Primer dft: Determine average dft (for deduction from total dft after application of intumescent).

• Intumescent dft: Determine at:- 500 mm centres along each coated plane of universal sections (8 planes), andrectangular hollow sections (4 planes).

- 125 mm centres along coated circular hollow sections, spread evenly aroundcircumference.

• Acceptance standard:- Average intumescent dft: Not less than required dft (exclusive of primer and top sealer).- Local intumescent dft: Not less than 80% of required dft. Areas greater than 100 mmequivalent diameter with a dft of less than 80% of required dft must be brought up tothickness.

440 BASIC FINISH• Definition: Reasonably smooth and even. Orange peel, other texture, minor runs and

similar minor defects are acceptable.

450 NORMAL DECORATIVE FINISH

• Definition: Good standard of cosmetic finish generally, when viewed from a distance of 5 mor more. Minor orange peel or other texture is acceptable.

460 HIGH DECORATIVE FINISH

• Definition: High standard of evenness, smoothness and gloss when viewed from aminimum distance of 2 m.

490 TOP SEALER COAT• Application: To achieve dft recommended by manufacturer and to give an even, solid,

opaque appearance, free from runs, sags and other visual defects.

520 COMPLETION OF OFF SITE COATED STEEL

• Exposed unprotected areas, including fixings: Following erection of steelwork, applyintumescent coating locally.

• Unscheduled additional connections to erected steelwork: Remove and reinstateintumescent coating locally.

530 RECORDS OF COATED STEEL• On completion of intumescent coating work, submit:

- Accurate surface preparation and coating application records.- Fire resistance certificates.- Intumescent coating manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance and overcoating.



N10

General fixtures/ furnishings/ equipment

N10 General fixtures/ furnishings/ equipment


PRODUCTS

BREEAM

This project is being assessed under BREEAM 2008 and all major building materialsincluding timber, timber based panels and metals should be responsibly sourced inaccordance with the requirements of Mat 5 and as such material suppliers must be able toprovide certification for the chain of custody and BES6001 : 2008 or EMS certificatenumbers.

110A FIXED FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT GENERALLY -Please read this section in conjunction with the FF&E schedule. Certain items are specifiedbelow, however standard items are specified in the FF&E schedule.See schedule for quantitiesNote that all locked cupboards to have a universal key across the site.

110B PURPOSE MADE bedroom and dayspace furniture

• Manufacturer: to approval

Bespoke fitted furniture including:

Bed unitsWardrobe unitsFitted storage unit to games roomFitted storage and TV unit to day spaces

Material to be Trespa Athlon 16mm or equal approved

See P+Hs sketch details for preparation of budget costing. See FF&E schedule for quantities and locations.


• Metalwork materials and workmanship: As section Z11.• Other requirements: all fixings methods and accessories to be anti-ligature.

130A FITTED CUPBOARDS AND WORKTOPS - PATIENT AREAS• Item: modular cupboards to service user areas.• Design and installation: To BS EN 14056.• Manufacturer: to approval.

- Product reference: Trespa Athlon solid grade laminate.• Dimensions: see FF&e schedule.• Worktops:

- Material: solid grade laminate 25mm thick.- Finish/ Colour: tbc.- Exposed edges: chamfered.

• Pedestal units:- Material: solid grade laminate 16mm.- Finish/ Colour: tbc.- Exposed edges: polished bevelled.

• Accessories/ Other requirements: anti-ligature handles and locks to all doors .

Page 209 of 266 N10 Project Fitzroy


145A VANITY AND WASHROOM FURNITURE IPS units• Item: IPS units .• Manufacturer: to approval .

- Product reference: boards to be 13mm Trespa Athlon or similar approved.• Dimensions: see IPS DRAWINGS.• - Finish/ Colour: to be advised.

- Edges: bevelled.• Doors/ Drawers/ Shelves:

- Material: 13mm solid grade laminate.Supports: IPS support system to be contractor choice.

• Other requirements: fixings and accessories for cupbaord units to be anti-ligature. read inconjunction with IPS drawingsFinal details of Ips assemblies to be approved by Architect .

160 SHELVING SYSTEM Spur adjustable

• Manufacturer: Spur or equal approved.- Product reference: Spur heavy duty brackets and spur uprights, .

• Shelves:- Material: 18mm lainate faced MDF with plastic edge strips. Formica plain colours or similar approved. .

- Finish/ Colour: Formica .

• Other components: book ends to all free ends. Free ends of shleves to be chamfered at 45dgerees. .

200A WORKTOPS fitted benching for offices only• Manufacturer: to approval.

Material: Formica laminate faced particleboard or MDF 40mm think with balancing veneer Main facing laminate Formica elegant Oak or equal approved.

• Dimensiion: see 70 series drawings and fittings schedule.• Exposed edges: post formed bullnose.• Support: PPC steel cantilever legs 30mm square.• Other requirements: service holes 1 per m.

200B FITTED UNITS AND WORKTOPS STANDARD CONTRACT KITCHEN RANGE to kitchenareas, see fittings schedule

• Manufacturer: Howden or equal approvedRange : Greenwich or equal approvedWorktop : standrard 40mm double bullnosed post formed 600mm worktop, in smoothlaminate.

Additional notes:Handles from standard range.Include for all necessary trims / packers and cornices

200C FITTED UNITS AND WORKTOPS CLINICAL AREAS HTM 71 units for clinical areas• Manufacturer: AMS wardroom or equal approved HTM approved manufacturer .

Units to be constructed to HTM 71 standard modular system complete with plastic insertsto receive trays etc.Doors to be faced with standard plain coloured laminate with matching laminate lippings.Exposed carcasses to match door facing colour.Plinths and end panels to match doorsWorktops to be 40mm double bullnosed postformed with upstand to rear edge, faced withstandard plain coloured laminateAll cupboards to be lockable.



200D WORKTOPS to control room, education reception, and staff bases in wards• Manufacturer: approved manufacturer.• Material: 40mm mdf / particleboard, with oak veneer inlay and 40 x 30mm solid oak

lipping.Balancing veneer to unseen sides. .• Dimensions: to suit area. NB curved to control room .• Exposed edges: Solid wood.• Support: ppc steel cantilevered legs.• Other requirements: -.

240A BLINDS blackout where shown on fitting schedule

• Manufacturer: Volvino Ltd 1-3 Duke StreetNorthamptonNorthamptonshireNN1 3BE .Type: blackout roller blind in track system fitted into window reveal .

• Material: washable .- Finish/ Colour: tbc.

• Operation: manual.

• Accessories/ Other requirements: anti-ligature fittings.

240B BLINDS vertical• Manufacturer: to approval.

- Product reference: tbc.• Type: verticla stacking type.• Material: washable pvc with antibacterial coating .• Operation: manual.• Accessories/ Other requirements: antiligature track SAA. Cords not permitted.

EXECUTION

710 MOISTURE CONTENT OF WOOD AND WOOD BASED BOARDS

• Temperature and humidity: During delivery, storage, fixing and to handover maintainconditions to suit specified moisture contents of timber components.

• Testing: When instructed, test components with approved moisture meter tomanufacturer's recommendations.

760 SEALANT BEDDING AND POINTING

• Application: As section Z22.• Bedding: of all inset elements.• Pointing: of all junctions.

760A SEALANT BEDDING AND POINTING• Application: As section Z22. Mastic to service user areas to be anti-pick. Client preferred

product CT1• Bedding: of all inset elements.• Pointing: of all junctions.

770 TRIMS

• Lengths: Wherever possible, unjointed between angles or ends of runs.

• Running joints: Where unavoidable, obtain approval of location and method of jointing.

• Angle joints: Mitred.



COMPLETION

910 GENERAL• Doors and drawers: Accurately aligned, not binding. Adjusted to ensure smooth operation.• Ironmongery: Checked, adjusted and lubricated to ensure correct functioning.

920 APPLIANCES• Test: Ensure that all functions and features work correctly.• Documentation: Submit guarantees, instruction manuals, etc.



N13

Sanitary appliances and fittings

N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings


PRODUCTS

300A COMPONENTS GENERALLY See separate document detailing sanitarywarecomponents. Please note that the sanitaryware performance requirements for the scehmeare very specialised and therefore any proposlas to substitute manufacturers must beapproved by the client.

EXECUTION

610 INSTALLATION GENERALLY• Assembly and fixing: Surfaces designed to falls to drain as intended.• Fasteners: Nonferrous or stainless steel.• Supply and discharge pipework: Fix before appliances.• Fixing: Fix appliances securely to structure. Do not support on pipework.• Jointing and bedding compounds: Recommended by manufacturers of appliances,

accessories and pipes being jointed or bedded.• Appliances: Do not use. Do not stand on appliances.• On completion: Components and accessories working correctly with no leaks.• Labels and stickers: Remove.

613 COMPATIBILITY OF COMPONENTS

• General: Each sanitary assembly must consist of functionally compatible components,preferably obtained from a single manufacturer.- Exceptions: Water supply fittings, wastes and traps.

620 NOGGINGS AND BEARERS• Noggings, bearers, etc. to support sanitary appliances and fittings: Position accurately. Fix

securely.

630 TILED BACKGROUNDS OTHER THAN SPLASHBACKS• Timing: Complete before fixing appliances.• Fixing appliances: Do not overstress tiles.

650 INSTALLING WC PANS

• Floor mounted pans: Screw fix and fit cover caps over screw heads. Do not use mortar or other beddings.

• Seat and cover: Stable when raised.

670 INSTALLING CISTERNS• Cistern operating components: Obtain from cistern manufacturer.

- Float operated valve: Matched to pressure of water supply.• Overflow pipe: Fixed to falls and located to give visible warning of discharge.

- Location: Agreed, where not shown on drawings.

710 INSTALLING TAPS• Fixing: Secure against twisting.• Seal with appliance: Watertight.

• Positioning: Hot tap to left of cold tap as viewed by user of appliance.



720 INSTALLING WASTES AND OVERFLOWS• Bedding: Waterproof jointing compound.• Fixing: With resilient washer between appliance and backnut.

755 SEALANT BEDDING AND POINTING• Bedding: Bed sinks to top of worktops. .• Pointing: to approval with CT1 mastic for patient areas .



P10

Sundry insulation/ proofing work

P10 Sundry insulation/ proofing work

SUNDRY INSULATION/ PROOFING WORK





TYPES OF INSULATION

140A INSULATION FITTED BETWEEN RAFTERS• Manufacturer: As clause 140B.• Installation requirements:

- General: Insulation to be friction fitted between rafters with no gaps.- Joints: Butted, no gaps.- Fasteners: Used where necessary to retain insulation and/ or prevent slumping.- Vapour control facing (if specified): Fit insulation with facing on warm side. Staple overlap (if provided) to underside of rafters; tape joints between adjacent overlaps usingvapour impermeable adhesive tape.

- Air space above insulation: Not restricted.- Eaves ventilation: Unobstructed.

140B INSULATION FITTED AT RAFTER LEVEL

• Manufacturer: Kingspan Insulation Ltd.- Web: www.kingspaninsulation.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Kooltherm? K7 Pitched Roof Board

• Insulation thickness: 100 mm.

149A INSULATION FIXED ABOVE RAFTERS• Manufacturer: As clause 149B.• Installation requirements:

- Fixing: Secure to top of rafters, with facing (if provided) on warm side.- Fixing centres: 300 mm.- Joints: Butt or overlap as recommended by insulation manufacturer, with no gaps. Sealwith vapour impermeable adhesive tape.

- Air space above insulation: Not restricted.- Eaves ventilation: Unobstructed.

149B INSULATION ABOVE RAFTERS

• Manufacturer: Kingspan Insulation Ltd.- Web: www.kingspaninsulation.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Kooltherm? K7 Pitched Roof Board

• Insulation thickness: 100 mm.

Page 217 of 266 P10 Project Fitzroy


410A FLEXIBLE CAVITY BARRIERS• Manufacturer: As clause 410B.• Material: Wired mineral wool mats.• Fire resistance rating: To BS 476-20, 30/15 integrity/ insulation .• Installation requirements:

- Spacing: Installed in voids so the maximum unobstructed dimension in any direction is 20 m.

- Fixing: Secure at perimeters and joints with no gaps, to provide a complete barrier tosmoke and flame.

410B FIRE BARRIERS

• Manufacturer: Rockwool Ltd.- Web: www.rockwool.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Rockwool Cavity Barrier

• Material: Wired mineral wool.

• Form: Single layer of 50 mm Fire Barrier .

• Base fixing: Draped freely and turned back across ceiling.

420A SLEEVED MINERAL WOOL SMALL CAVITY BARRIERS• Manufacturer: As Clause 420B.• Installation requirements:

- Fasteners: Staples at maximum 150 mm centres.- Vertical barriers: Fixed by both flanges. - Horizontal barriers: Fixed by upper flange only.- Joints and intersections: Butted, with barriers compressed along full length to givecomplete seal.

420B CAVITY BARRIERS

• Manufacturer: Rockwool Ltd.- Web: www.rockwool.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Rockwool TCB Cavity Barrier

• Length: 1200 mm.

• To suit cavity width: 101 ? 110 mm.

430 WIRED MINERAL WOOL SMALL CAVITY BARRIERS

• Material: Wire reinforced mineral wool minimum 50 mm thick.• Fire resistance rating: To BS 476-20, 30/15 integrity/ insulation .• Installation requirements:

- Fasteners: Staples at maximum 150 mm centres. Fold cavity barrier if necessary toensure a tight fit.

- Joints and intersections: Butted, no gaps.



P12

Fire stopping systems

P12 Fire stopping systems


SIMILAR EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS• Wherever products are specified by proprietary name and the phrase 'or equivalent' is not

included, it is to be deemed included.• Demonstration of equivalence is the responsibility of the sub-contractor/supplier.

GENERAL

130 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO INDIVIDUAL SERVICES PENETRATIONS TOCOMBUSTIBLE PIPES PASSING THROUGH COMPARTMENT WALLS AND FLOORS

• Fire resistance: As clause 240.

• Penetration seal: Pipe collar - surface mounted intumescent as clause 380A.- Size: Not applicable.

• Capping sealant: Not required.- Colour: Not applicable.

130A FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO INDIVIDUAL SERVICES PENETRATIONS TO NON-COMBUSTIBLE PIPES PASSING THROUGH COMPARTMENT WALLS AND FLOORS

• Fire resistance: As clause 240.• Penetration seal: Intumescent foam as clause 335A.

- Size: Not applicable.• Capping sealant: Fire resisting silicone as clause 390A.

- Colour: Not applicable.

140 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO MULTIPLE SERVICES PENETRATIONS TO DUCTS ANDCABLE TRAYS PASSING THROUGH COMPARTMENT WALLS

• Fire resistance: As clause 240A.

• Bulkhead barrier:- Material: Mineral wool intumescent coated rigid batts as clause 360A.Thickness: 50 mm.Number of layers: One.

- Framing: Not required.- Finish: Not applicable.

• Capping sealant: Fire resisting silicone as clause 390A.- Colour: White .

140A FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO MULTIPLE SERVICES PENETRATIONS TO DUCTS ANDCABLE TRAYS PASSING THROUGH SUB-COMPARTMENT WALLS

• Fire resistance: As clause 240B.• Bulkhead barrier:

- Material: Mineral wool intumescent coated rigid batts as clause 360A.Thickness: 50 mm.Number of layers: One.

- Framing: Not required.- Finish: Not applicable.

• Capping sealant: Fire resisting silicone as clause 390A.- Colour: White .



160 LINEAR GAP SEALING TOPS OF INTERNAL MASONRY FIRE RESISTANT WALLS• Fire resistance: As clause 240.• Gap width or height (nominal): 50mm.• Gap filler: Fire stop laminate as clause 330A.• Capping sealant: Not required.

- Colour: Grey.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210A DESIGN

• Design: Complete the design of the fire stopping system in accordance with manufacturer?s recommendations. Design assistance and site support to be provided by chosen supplier by sendinga technical specialist/representative to site to assist in design, specification and training.

• Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations, engineering judgementswhere required and manufacturer?s literature indicating fire performance appropriate to applications, durability, air and smoke tightness performance and where required acousticperformance.

240 FIRE PERFORMANCE OF COMPARTMENT FLOORS• Resistance to fire: To BS 476-20 and -22, 60 minutes integrity and insulation .• Reaction to fire: In accordance with Building Regulations, Class 0 .• Smoke resistance:

- Air leakage rate (maximum): 5 m?/m??hr.

240A FIRE PERFORMANCE COMPARTMENT WALLS• Resistance to fire: To BS 476-20 and -22, 60 minutes integrity and insulation .• Reaction to fire: In accordance with Building Regulations, Class 0 .• Smoke resistance:

- Air leakage rate (maximum): 5 m?/m??hr.

240B FIRE PERFORMANCE OF SUB-COMPARTMENT WALLS

• Resistance to fire: To BS 476-20 and -22, 30 minutes integrity and insulation .

• Reaction to fire: In accordance with Building Regulations, Class 0 .

• Smoke resistance:- Air leakage rate (maximum): 5 m?/m??hr.

260 DESIGN LIFE• Effective design life: 30 years.

PRODUCTS

305 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION

• Certification: For products specified generically, submit evidence of compliance with thespecification.

• Acceptable evidence:- LPCB /FM approvals,- Test reports and/or assessments by NAMAS approved laboratories. Tests to berepresentative of end use application.- Test reports /assessments by approved laboratories from EU member states. Tests to berepresentative of end use application.- Engineering judgements by manufacturer to be under the terms of the Passive FireProtection Federation ?Guide to Undertaking assessments in lieu of Fire Tests .



330A FLEXIBLE INTUMESCENT STRIP• Manufacturer: Nullifire - Part of Tremco illbruck Coatings Ltd.

- Web: www.nullifire.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Nullifire J3000

• Type: D.

335A INTUMESCENT FOAM• Manufacturer: Hilti (Gt Britain) Ltd.

- Web: www.hilti.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: CP 620

• Colour: Red.

340A INTUMESCENT MORTAR

• Manufacturer: Hilti (Gt Britain) Ltd.- Web: www.hilti.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: CP 636

• Colour: Grey.• Plastic pipe seals: Not required.

350A INTUMESCENT PUTTY• Manufacturer: Hilti (Gt Britain) Ltd.

- Web: www.hilti.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: CP 617 Intumescent acoustic putty pad

• Size: to suit back-box.• Colour: Red.

360A MINERAL WOOL RIGID BATTS

• Manufacturer: Hilti (Gt Britain) Ltd.- Web: www.hilti.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: CP 670

• Flexi coating: CP 670-C .

• Sealant: CP 606.

• Plastic pipe seals: Not required.• Colour: White.

380A PIPE COLLAR – SURFACE MOUNTED INTUMESCENT• Manufacturer: Hilti (Gt Britain) Ltd.

- Web: www.hilti.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: CP 643N

• Size: 110mm and 160mm.

385A SEALANT BACKING MATERIAL

• Manufacturer: Hilti (Gt Britain) Ltd.- Web: www.hilti.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: CF 125-50



390A SEALANT - FIRE RESISTING SILICONE• Manufacturer: Hilti (Gt Britain) Ltd.

- Web: www.hilti.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: CP 601S

• Colour: White.

395A SEALANT - ONE-PART FIRE RESISTING ACRYLIC• Manufacturer: Hilti (Gt Britain) Ltd.

- Web: www.hilti.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: CP 606

• Colour: White.

EXECUTION

620A WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

• Standard: Installation by LPCB or FIRAS accredited contractors with a minimum of 3 yearsexperience. Evidence of accreditation to be presented to Main contractor and architectbefore workcommences. Firestop Contractor shall also be able to show that they have undergoneInstallation training from the manufacturer of the products & systems used.

• Gaps: All gaps and imperfections of fit between building elements and services to providefire resistance and resist the passage of smoke. All to be in accordance withmanufacturer?s written instructions.

• Labelling: All firestopped service penetrations to be labelled with a unique referencenumber to aid traceability and must indicate date of installation, date inspected and nameof installer.

• Recording of penetration seals: installer to provide records of locations of all Firestop sealsand all necessary data for completion of health and safety file.

• Adjacent surfaces: Prevent overrun of sealant or mortar on to finished surfaces.

650 INSTALLING FIRE STOP LAMINATE

• Fitting of strips: Compress strips and fit into gap so that, as they decompress, the stripswedge themselves in the void.

• Shrink wrapping: Not applicable .

• Joints:- Ends of strips: Fit intumescent 'end piece' at both ends of run of fire stop laminate.- Joints between strips: Fit two intumescent 'end pieces' at each butt joint.

660 APPLYING INTUMESCENT FOAM• New joints: Remove builder's debris, mortar droppings, grease, and other contaminants.• Old joints: Clean and remove existing sealant from each joint.• Priming: Lightly moisten substrate with water.• Application: Fill joint to approximately half its depth, and allow foam to expand to face of

joint. • Trimming: Trim excess foam to give a neat, flush appearance.

670 APPLYING INTUMESCENT MORTAR

• Sequence: Install mortar after services are permanently installed.

• Loose dust and combustible materials: Remove from the opening.

• Shuttering: Install suitable shuttering panels to the faces of the opening.

• Temperature: Do not apply mortar when it could be damaged by frost.

• Powder:water ratio: 3:1 for trowel grade by volume.

• Mortar cure: Do not disturb mortar before final set has taken place.

• Shuttering: Remove after mortar has cured.



690 APPLYING INTUMESCENT PUTTY• Sequence: Install putty after services are permanently installed.• Loose dust and combustible materials: Remove from the opening.

710 INSTALLING MINERAL WOOL BATTS• Installing batts: Fit tight into void between the penetrating services and the surrounding

construction to form a solid bulkhead.- Brackets: Not applicable.Bracket fixing: Not applicable.

• Face of batts: Flush with the surface of wall, floor or soffit.

• Joints between batts: Close butt joints, bed together with Hilti CP 606 Firestop Sealant .

• Gaps between services and bulkhead: Seal with fire resisting sealant.

730 FIXING PIPE COLLARS

• Collar fixing: Self-tapping screws.

• Gap around collar: Seal with intumescent foam.

• Length of wraps: Project 50mm from each side of the element.

740 INSERTING SEALANT BACKING MATERIAL• Preparation: Removed debris from service penetration.• Installation: Insert joint filler to full depth of joint leaving sufficient depth to apply sealant .

745 APPLYING SEALANTS GENERALLY

• Application: As section Z22.

750 APPLYING CAPPING SEALANT

• Preparation: De-grease using cleaner recommended by sealant manufacturer .

• Priming: Primer recommended by sealant manufacturer.

• Depth of sealant: 10 mm.

• Temperature: Do not apply water based sealants when they could be damaged by frost.

COMPLETION

910A CLEANING• Masking tapes: all forms of masking and surface protection to be removed.• Cleaning: Clean off splashes and droppings. Wipe down finishes.• Waste: Off cuts, empty cartridges and general waste from firestopping operations to be

disposed of in accordance with site requirements.

920A INSPECTION

• Notice for inspection (minimum): 5 working days.

• Inspection body: firestopping installer to facilitate inspection by accreditation body (FIRASor LPCB) during and on completion of firestopping works.



P20

Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ sundry items

P20 Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ sundry items

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions




110 SOFTWOOD SKIRTINGS GENERALLY

• Quality of wood and fixing: To BS 1186-3.- Species: European whitewood.- Class: CSH.

• Moisture content at time of fixing: 10-14%.• Preservative treatment: Water-based microemulsion as section Z12, service life 30 years.• Fire rating: Not applicable.• Profile: Pencil rounded.

- Finished size: 19 x 100 mm.• Finish as delivered: Prepared and primed, as section M60.• Fixing: Plugged, screwed and pelleted at 450mm centres.

120 HARDWOOD ARCHITRAVES TO INTERNAL DOORS AND SCREENS

• Quality of wood and fixing: To BS 1186-3.- Species: Ash.- Class: 1.

• Moisture content at time of fixing: 9 -13%.

• Preservative treatment: Water-based microemulsion as section Z12, service life 60 years.

• Fire rating: Class 0 as defined in Building Regulations .

• Profile: Pencil rounded edges.- Finished size: 19 x 45 mm.

• Finish as delivered: Sikkens cetol clear satin laquer or equal approved.

• Fixing: Plugged, screwed and pelleted at 300mm centres.

120A HARDWOOD SKIRTINGS GENERALLY• Quality of wood and fixing: To BS 1186-3.

- Species: Ash.- Class: 1.

• Moisture content at time of fixing: 9 -13%.• Preservative treatment: Water-based microemulsion as section Z12, service life 60 years.• Fire rating: Class 0 as defined in Building Regulations .• Profile: Pencil rounded edges.

- Finished size: 19 x 100 mm.• Finish as delivered: Sikkens cetol or equal approved clear satin laquer.• Fixing: Plugged, screwed and pelleted at 300mm centres.



120C HARDWOODWINDOW BOARDS• Quality of wood and fixing: To BS 1186-3.

- Species: Ash.- Class: 1.

• Moisture content at time of fixing: 9 -13%.• Preservative treatment: Water-based microemulsion as section Z12, service life 60 years.• Fire rating: Class 0 as defined in Building Regulations .• Profile: Pencil rounded edges.

- Finished size: Minimum 19mm thick, for width refer to architect's drawings.• Finish as delivered: sikkens cetol clear satin laquer or equal approved .• Fixing: Plugged, screwed and pelleted at 300mm centres.• Other requirements: anti-pick sealant between adjacent materials.

170D PROPRIETARY WALL PROTECTION to FM areas

• Manufacturer: C/S acrovyn.www.c-sgroup.com .- Product reference: acrovyn 4000 sheet.- Accessories :Corner guards to match:- Inner bumper: acrovyn- Retainer: Continuous aluminium.height 1000mm

• Colour: tbc.

EXECUTION

510 INSTALLATION GENERALLY• Joinery workmanship: As section Z10.• Metal workmanship: As section Z11.• Methods of fixing and fasteners: As section Z20 where not specified.• Straight runs: To be in one piece, or in long lengths with as few joints as possible.• Running joints: Location and method of forming to be agreed where not detailed.• Joints at angles: Mitre, unless shown otherwise.• Position and level: To be agreed where not detailed.



Q40

Fencing

Q40 Fencing


FENCING SYSTEMS

126A OPEN MESH STEEL PANEL SECURITY FENCING see dwg 68 -15 dwg for locations

• Manufacturer: Jacksons Fencing. or equal approved- Web: www.jacksons-security.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Securi-Mesh FencingFence comprising 358 mesh with SHS posts set in concrete base, (design by engineer).Alternative wall top mounting see dwg for details.Bottom of full height fences to be mounted within concrete plinth detail ,as shown onarchitects drawings.

• Height: 5200mm or 2200mm where over wall.

• Gates:- Size: Double gates, 2440 mm high.- Type: Swing.- Operation: Manual.- Control: secure key.

• Finish/ Colour:- Fencing: standard RAL tbc.- Gates: standard RAL tbc.

• Other requirements: secure / anti-climb details - see dwg.

126B STEEL PANEL SECURITY FENCING see 68-15 dwgs for locations• Manufacturer: Britplas.

- Product reference: Safevent fence.

• Standard: To BS 1722-14, category 4.

• Height: 5200mm.

• Mesh and wire: 358 mesh to one face and perforated metal panel to inner face withimagery up to 3m.

• Posts: galvanised SHS with powder coated finish.

• Fence panels set between brick piers - panel width 1.8m. MUGA fence to be standradpanel width.

• Method of setting posts: In concrete foundations to comply with the design loadingrequirements specified by BS 1722-14 for this category of fence.

• Bottom of fencing: Concrete base detail as architacets drawings.

• Accessories: None.

• Conformity: Submit manufacturer's and installer's certificates, to BS 1722-14.

Page 229 of 266 Q40 Project Fitzroy


310A CLOSE BOARDED FENCING to courtyard fire escape areas including matching gate.• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.

- Product reference: Submit proposals.• Standard: This is a bespoke fence design comprising a high quality plain board both sides

of a steel post support. Boards to be smooth and free from knot holes..• Height: 5200mm.• Wood: Contractor's choice.

- Treatment: To provide a 30 year service life· .- Finish: Submit proposals.

• Boards/ rails: 150x25mm tanalised vertical boards on tanalised timber rails fixed to miansteel supports .

• Posts: steel to engineers design.• Centres of posts (maximum): as required by engineer.• Method of setting posts: concrete foundation to engineers design.• Accessories: insect mesh backing to one side under boards. provide closing piece to top of

fence. Gate to be included to appear fluch on courtyard side with no potential hand / footholds..

• Conformity: Submit manufacturer's and installer's certificates, to BS 1722-5.

350A STEEL PALISADE FENCING to front boundary to meet existing boundary fence

• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.- Product reference: Submit proposals.

• Standard: To BS 1722-12, type GP18 .

• Height: 1900mm.

• Pales: to match existing fence at front boundary.

• Centres of posts (maximum): 2.75 m.

• Method of setting posts:- Holes: Contractor's choice.- Embedded length: 925mm.- Completely filled to ground level with concrete.

• Bottom of fencing: as existign detail..• Accessories: single personnel gate to cycle path .• Conformity: Submit manufacturer's and installer's certificates, to BS 1722-12.

570A GATES rear Yard access and refuse yard, active courtyard connecting gates.• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.

- Product reference: Submit proposals.Steel framed high security gate clad in solid metal facings both sides powder coatedfinish. Gate and frame to be designed to close off all gaps to prevent unauthorisedaccess or hand and foot holds. Gates must not be climbably from either side.

• Sizes: 4200 high x 3385 mm wide; 2100h x 1800w, 2100x 1000mm.

• Posts: steel structure designed by structural engineer .

• Finish as delivered: Powder coated to BS 1722-16.

• Fittings: automatic system to exernal gates only, operable internally and externally. safteywarning devices and entry bollard with speach unit. Contractor to submit full proposals.refuse gate and courtyard gates to be manually operated with secure lock .- Finish: Polyester powder coated, as section Z31 .

• Method of fixing: engineer to deisgn foundations to steel support posts. .



570B GATES to cycle storage• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.

- Product reference: Submit proposals. Gate to comprise 40 x 40mm box section framewith 15mm vertical bars at 100mm centres.

• Sizes: 2400 x 1800mm.• Posts: 100x50mm rectangular galvanised steel posts with fixings at 150mm centres built

into brickwork reveals..• Finish as delivered: Powder coated to BS 1722-16.• Fittings: continuous hinges, secure shrouded lock case built into gate meeting stiles.

Continuous plate stops at top of gate and on slave leaf meeting stile. 2 no Shoot bolts toslave leaf. .- Finish: Powder coated to BS 1722-16.

• Method of fixing: Contractor's choice.• Accessories: Additional mesh - litter proof netting to be agreed .

580A WROUGHT IRON gates to main entranceComprising 1no main double gate and 2 x single personnel gates to be of decortaivedeisng to be agreed with client and of a similar type to the existing entrance gates to thesite from Billing Road

• Standard: Traditional blacksmith's methods.- Documentation: Submit certification of training and experience.- Membership: The British Artist Blacksmiths Association.

• Samples: Submit on request an executed piece of work carried out by the proposedblacksmith.

• Materials: Best quality true wrought iron.- Steel or other substitutes: Not permitted.- Consistency: Tough, ductile and fibrous in character and of even texture.- Submit: Invoices or certificate of authenticity to confirm provenance, on request.

• Workmanship:- Ornamental work: Carefully forged, hand wrought and incised where required to producethe design and effect desired.

- Free ornament: Forged from substantial iron and forge welded where connected to other ironwork.

- Accuracy: Substantially framed together and closely fitted.- Cast parts: Not permitted other than as indicated on the approved design drawings.

• Electric welding: Not permitted.• Joints: Neatly tenoned and riveted or forge welded.

- Heads of tenons and rivets: Countersunk.• Method of fixing: As blacksmith's recommendations.• Treatment: black paint finish to blacksmith specification.• Accessories: to be agreed in final design.

EXECUTION

710 INSTALLATION GENERALLY

• Set out and erect:- Alignment: Straight lines or smoothly flowing curves.- Tops of posts: Following profile of the ground.- Setting posts: Rigid, plumb and to specified depth, or greater where necessary to ensureadequate support.

- Fixings: All components securely fixed.



715 COMPETENCE• Operatives: Contractors must employ competent operatives.• Qualifications: Submit certification of training.

- NHSS Sector Scheme 2A sub categories: (d).- NHSS Sector Scheme 2C sub categories: Not required.

720 SETTING POSTS IN CONCRETE• Standard: To BS 8500-2.• Mix: Designated concrete not less than GEN1 or Standard prescribed concrete not less

than ST2.

• Alternative mix for small quantities: 50 kg Portland cement to 150 kg fine aggregate to 250kg 20 mm nominal maximum size coarse aggregate, medium workability.

• Admixtures: Do not use.

• Holes: Excavate neatly and with vertical sides.

• Filling: Position post/ strut and fill hole with concrete to not less than the specified depth,well rammed as filling proceeds and consolidated.

• Backfilling of holes not completely filled with concrete: Excavated material, well rammedand consolidated.

730 EXPOSED CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS• Filling: Compact until air bubbles cease to appear on the upper surface.• Finishing: Weathered to shed water and trowelled smooth.

770 SITE CUTTING OF WOOD• General: Kept to a minimum.• Below or near ground level: Cutting prohibited.• Treatment of surfaces exposed by minor cutting and drilling: Two flood coats of solution

recommended for the purpose by main treatment solution manufacturer.

780 MAKING GOOD GALVANIZED SURFACES

• Treatment of minor damage (including on fasteners and fittings): Low melting point zincalloy repair rods or powders made for this purpose, or at least two coats of zinc-rich paintto BS 4652.

• Thickness: Apply sufficient material to provide a zinc coating at least equal in thickness tothe original layer.

COMPLETION

910 CLEANING• General: Leave the works in a clean, tidy condition.• Surfaces: Clean immediately before handover.

920 FIXINGS

• All components: Tighten.- Timing: Before handover.

930 GATES

• Hinges, latches and closers: Adjust to provide smooth operation. Lubricate wherenecessary.- Timing: Before handover.



R10

Rainwater drainage systems

R10 Rainwater drainage systems


GENERAL

110 GRAVITY RAINWATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM

• Rainwater outlets: Proprietary.

• Gutters: Aluminium.

• Pipework: Aluminium.

• Below ground drainage: SEE SEPARATE SPECIFICATION.

• Disposal: SEE ENGINEERS DESIGN.

• Controls: Not applicable.

• Accessories: ANTI CLIMB SYSTEM SEE 311.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210 DESIGN• Design: Complete the design of the rainwater drainage system.• Standard: To BS EN 12056-3, clauses 3-7 and National Annexes.• Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and manufacturers'

literature.

221 COLLECTION AND DISTRIBUTION OF RAINWATER

• General: Complete, and without leakage or noise nuisance.

PRODUCTS

311A ALUMINIUM GUTTERS to high level eaves to slate roof

• Standard: Agrément certified.• Manufacturer: Alumasc or equal approved.

- Product reference: Aqualine .• Profile: Box.• Nominal size: 120 x 80mm.• Finish: powder coated.• Colour: tbc.• Brackets: Strap type.

- Fixings: Stainless steel screws.

370A ALUMINIUM DOWNPIPES

• Standard: Agrément certified.

• Manufacturer: Alumasc.- Product reference: Guardian down pipe system.

• Section: Round.

• Nominal size: 111 x 138.

• Finish powder coated.

• Colour: tbc.

• Brackets: anti vandal fully concealed to all areas .- Fixings: Stainless steel screws.Accessories: hopper heads prupoose made aluminium powder coated .

Page 234 of 266 R10 Project Fitzroy


425A PVC-U PIPEWORK - FOR INTERNAL RAINWATER SYSTEMS• Standard: To BS EN 1329-1 or BS 4514, Kitemark certified.• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.

- Product reference: Submit proposals.• Recycled content: Contractor's choice.• Nominal size: 100mm.• Colour: n/a.• Brackets: PVC-U clips, black.

- Fixings: Stainless steel screws.• Accessories: Intumescent collars as section P12.

450 INSULATION TO INTERNAL PIPELINES

• Material: Preformed flexible mineral fibre split tube.

• Thermal conductivity (maximum): 0.045 W/m·K.

• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.- Product reference: Submit proposals.

• Recycled content: Contractor's choice.

• Thickness: 50 mm.

• Fire performance: Class 1 spread of flame when tested to BS 476-7 or Class CL to BS EN13501-1.

EXECUTION

600 PREPARATION• Work to be completed before commencing work specified in this section:

- Below ground drainage. Alternatively, make temporary arrangements for dispersal of rainwater without damage or disfigurement of the building fabric and surroundings.

- Painting of surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible.

605 INSTALLATION GENERALLY

• Electrolytic corrosion: Avoid contact between dissimilar metals where corrosion may occur.

• Plastics and galvanized steel pipes: Do not bend.

• Allowance for thermal and building movement: Provide and maintain clearance as fixingand jointing proceeds.

• Protection:- Fit purpose made temporary caps to prevent ingress of debris.- Fit access covers, cleaning eyes and blanking plates as the work proceeds.

615 SETTING OUT EAVES GUTTERS - TO FALLS• Setting out: To true line and even gradient to prevent ponding or backfall. Position high

points of gutters as close as practical to the roof and low points not more than 50 mmbelow the roof.

• Outlets: Align with connections to below ground drainage.

616 SETTING OUT EAVES GUTTERS - LEVEL• Setting out: Level and as close as practical to the roof.• Outlets: Aligned with connections to below ground drainage.



635 FIXING PIPEWORK• Pipework: Fix securely, plumb and/ or true to line.• Branches and low gradient sections: Fix with uniform and adequate falls to drain efficiently.• Externally socketed pipes and fittings: Fix with sockets facing upstream.• Additional supports: Provide as necessary to support junctions and changes in direction.• Vertical pipes:

- Provide a loadbearing support at least at every storey level.- Tighten fixings as work proceeds so that every storey is self supporting.- Wedge joints in unsealed metal pipes to prevent rattling.

• Wall and floor penetrations: Isolate pipework from structure.- Pipe sleeves: As section P31.- Masking plates: Fix at penetrations if visible in the finished work.

• Expansion joint pipe sockets: Fix rigidly to buildings. Elsewhere, provide brackets andfixings that allow pipes to slide.

640A FIXING VERTICAL PIPEWORK

• Bracket fixings: Bolted into masonry with resin anchor fixings .

• Distance between bracket fixing centres (maximum): 300mm.

650 JOINTING PIPEWORK AND GUTTERS• General: Joint with materials and fittings that will make effective and durable connections.• Jointing differing pipework and gutter systems: Use adaptors intended for the purpose.• Cut ends of pipes and gutters: Clean and square. Remove burrs and swarf. Chamfer pipe

ends before inserting into ring seal sockets.• Jointing or mating surfaces: Clean and, where necessary, lubricate immediately before

assembly.• Junctions: Form with fittings intended for the purpose.• Jointing material: Strike off flush. Do not allow it to project into bore of pipes and fittings.• Surplus flux, solvent jointing materials and cement: Remove.

655 JOINTING INTERNAL PIPEWORK

• Jointing: contractor proposals.

660 JOINTING EXTERNAL PIPEWORK

• Jointing: manufacturers recommendations.

675 CUTTING COATED PIPEWORK AND GUTTERS• Cutting: Recoat bare metal.

680 FIXING INSULATION TO INTERNAL PIPELINES AND GUTTERS• Fixing: Secure and neat. Provide continuity at supports and leave no gaps. Fix split pipe

insulation with the split on 'blind' side of pipeline.- Method: Waterproof adhesive.

• Timing: Do not fit insulation until completion of pipe airtightness or leakage testing.

685 IDENTIFICATION OF INTERNAL RAINWATER PIPEWORK

• Standard: In accordance with Water Regulations Advisory Scheme (WRAS) Informationand guidance note 9-02-05 and BS 8515.

690 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY - PIPEWORK• Joints in metal pipes with flexible couplings: Clips (or suitable standard pipe couplings)

supplied for earth bonding by pipework manufacturer to ensure electrical continuity.



695 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY - GUTTERS• Joints in metal gutters: Purpose made links supplied by the gutter manufacturer to ensure

electrical continuity.

700 ACCESS FOR TESTING AND MAINTENANCE• General: Install pipework and gutters with adequate clearance to permit testing, cleaning

and maintenance, including painting where necessary.• Access fittings and rodding eyes: Position so that they are not obstructed.

COMPLETION

900 TESTING GENERALLY

• Dates for testing: Give notice.- Period of notice (minimum): 1 week.

• Preparation:- Pipework: Complete, securely fixed, free from defects, obstruction and debris beforetesting.

• Testing:- Supply clean water, assistance and apparatus.- Do not use smoke to trace leaks.

• Records: Submit a record of tests.

905 INTERNAL PIPEWORK TEST - ENGLAND, WALES, IRELAND AND NORTHERNIRELAND

• Preparation: Temporarily seal open ends of pipework with plugs.• Test apparatus: Connect a 'U' tube water gauge and air pump to pipework via a plug.• Testing: Pump air into pipework until gauge registers 38 mm.• Required performance:

- Allow a period for temperature stabilization, after which the pressure of 38 mm is to bemaintained without loss for at least 3 minutes.

910 GUTTER TEST

• Preparation: Temporarily block all outlets.

• Testing: Fill gutters to overflow level and after 5 minutes closely inspect for leakage.

915 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS• General: At completion, submit printed instructions recommending procedures for

maintenance of the rainwater installation, including full details of recommended inspection,cleaning and repair procedures.

920 IMMEDIATELY BEFORE HANDOVER

• Construction rubbish, debris, swarf, temporary caps and fine dust which may enter therainwater system: Remove. Do not sweep or flush into the rainwater system.

• Access covers, rodding eyes, outlet gratings and the like: Secure complete with fixings.



Z10

Purpose made joinery

Z10 Purpose made joinery


110 FABRICATION

• Standard: To BS 1186-2.

• Sections: Accurate in profile and length, and free from twist and bowing. Formed out of solid unless shown otherwise.- Machined surfaces: Smooth and free from tearing, wooliness, chip bruising and other machining defects.

• Joints: Tight and close fitting.

• Assembled components: Rigid. Free from distortion.

• Screws: Provide pilot holes.- Screws of 8 gauge (4 mm diameter) or more and screws into hardwood: Provideclearance holes.

- Countersink screws: Heads sunk at least 2 mm below surfaces visible in completedwork.

• Adhesives: Compatible with wood preservatives applied and end uses of timber.

120 CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF TIMBER• General: Dimensions on drawings are finished sizes.• Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes:

- Softwood sections: To BS EN 1313-1:-Clause 6 for sawn sections.

- Hardwood sections: To BS EN 1313-2:-Clause 6 for sawn sections.Clause NA.3 for further processed sections.

130 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD

• Cutting and machining: Completed as far as possible before treatment.

• Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways, thicknessed, planed,ploughed, etc.

• Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and/ or drilling: Treat as recommended by maintreatment solution manufacturer.

140 MOISTURE CONTENT• Wood and wood based products: Maintained within range specified for the component

during manufacture and storage.

210 LAMINATED PLASTICS VENEERED BOARDS/ PANELS

• Fabrication: To British Laminated Plastics Fabricators Association Ltd (BLF) fabricatingstandards.

• Balancing veneer: From decorative veneer manufacturer and of similar composition.Applied to reverse side of core material.

• Finished components: Free from defects, including bow, twist, scratches, chipping, cracks,pimpling, indentations, glue marks, staining and variations in colour and pattern.

• Joints visible in completed work: Tight butted, true and flush.

Page 239 of 266 Z10 Project Fitzroy


220 WOOD VENEERED BOARDS/ PANELS• Core material and veneers: Conditioned before bonding.• Setting out: Veneer features and grain pattern aligned regularly and symmetrically unless

instructed otherwise.• Balancing veneer: Applied to reverse side of core material.

- Moisture and temperature movement characteristics: As facing veneer.• Veneer edges: Tight butted and flush, with no gaps. • Tolerance of veneer thickness (maximum): ? 0.5 mm.• Finished components: Free from defects, including bow, twist, scratches, chipping, splits,

blebs, indentations, glue marks and staining.• Surface finish: Fine, smooth, free from sanding marks.

250 FINISHING

• Surfaces: Smooth, even and suitable to receive finishes.- Arrises: Eased unless shown otherwise on drawings.

• End grain in external components: Sealed with primer or sealer as section M60 andallowed to dry before assembly.



Z11

Purpose made metalwork

Z11 Purpose made metalwork


310 MATERIALS GENERALLY

• Grades of metals, section dimensions and properties: To appropriate British Standards.When not specified, select grades and sections appropriate for the purpose.

• Prefinished metal: May be used if methods of fabrication do not damage or alter appearance of finish, and finish is adequately protected.

• Fasteners: To appropriate British Standards and, unless specified otherwise, of samemetal as component being fastened, with matching coating or finish.

320 STEEL LONG AND FLAT PRODUCTS• Hot rolled structural steels (excluding structural hollow sections and tubes): To BS EN

10025-1.• Fine grain steels, including special steels: To BS EN 10025-3 and -4.• Steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance: To BS EN 10025-5.

330 STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP• Plates and wide flats, high yield strength steel: To BS EN 10025-6.

340 HOT ROLLED STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP

• Flat products, high yield strength for cold forming: To BS EN 10149-1, -2 and -3.

• Carbon steel sheet and strip for cold forming: To BS EN 10111.

• Narrow strip, formable steel and steel for general engineering purposes: To BS 1449-1.8and BS 1449-1.14.

350 COLD ROLLED STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP• Steel sections: To BS EN 10162.• Flat products, high yield strength micro-alloyed steels for cold forming: To BS EN 10268.• Carbon steel flat products for cold forming: To BS EN 10130 and BS EN 10131.• Uncoated carbon steel narrow strip for cold forming: To BS EN 10139 and BS EN 10140.• Narrow strip steel for general engineering purposes: To BS EN 10132-1, -2, and -3.• Carbon steel flat products for vitreous enamelling: To BS EN 10209.

360 COATED STEEL FLAT PRODUCTS

• Hot dip zinc coated carbon steel sheet and strip for cold forming: To BS EN 10346 and BSEN 10143.

• Hot dip zinc coated structural steel sheet and strip: To BS EN 10143 and BS EN 10346.

• Hot dip zinc-aluminium (za) coated sheet and strip: To BS EN 10346.

• Hot dip aluminium-zinc (az) coated sheet and strip: To BS EN 10346.

• Organic coated flat products: To BS EN 10169.

370 STEEL STRUCTURAL HOLLOW SECTIONS (SHS)• Non alloy and fine grain steels, hot finished: To BS EN 10210-1 and -2.• Non-alloy and fine grain steels, cold formed welded: To BS EN 10219-2.• Weather resistant steels, hot finished: To BS 7668.



380 OTHER STEEL SECTIONS• Equal flange tees: To BS EN 10055.• Equal and unequal angles: To BS EN 10056-1 and -2.• Wire, carbon steel for general engineering purposes: To BS 1052.• Wire and wire products, general: To BS EN 10218-2.• Tubes:

- Seamless circular: To BS EN 10297-1.- Seamless cold drawn: To BS EN 10305-1.- Welded and cold sized square and rectangular: To BS EN 10305-5.- Welded circular: To BS EN 10296-1.- Welded cold drawn: To BS EN 10305-2.- Welded cold sized: To BS EN 10305-3.

400 STAINLESS STEEL PRODUCTS

• Chemical composition and physical properties: To BS EN 10088-1.

• Sheet, strip and plate: To BS EN 10088-2.

• Semi-finished products bars, rods and sections: To BS EN 10088-3.

• Wire: To BS EN 1088-3.

• Tubes:- Welded circular: To BS EN 10296-2.- Seamless circular: To BS EN 10297-2.

410 ALUMINIUM ALLOY PRODUCTS• Designations:

- Designation system, chemical composition and forms: To BS EN 573-1, -2, -3 and -5.- Temper designations: To BS EN 515.

• Sheet, strip and plate: To BS EN 485-1 to -4.• Cold drawn rods, bars and tubes: To BS EN 754-1 and -2.• Extruded rods, bars, tubes and profiles: To BS EN 755-1 and -2.• Drawn wire: To BS EN 1301-1, -2 and -3.• Rivet, bolt and screw stock: To BS 1473.• Structural sections: To BS 1161.

420 COPPER ALLOY PRODUCTS

• Sheet, strip, plate and circles for general purposes: To BS EN 1652.

• Sheet and strip for building purposes: To BS EN 1172.

• Rods: To BS EN 12163.

• Profiles and rectangular bars: To BS EN 12167.

• Wire: To BS EN 12166.

• Tubes: To BS EN 12449.

FABRICATION

515 FABRICATION GENERALLY• Contact between dissimilar metals in components: Avoid.• Finished components: Rigid and free from distortion, cracks, burrs and sharp arrises.

- Moving parts: Free moving without binding.• Corner junctions of identical sections: Mitre.

520 COLD FORMED WORK

• Profiles: Accurate, with straight arrises.



525 ADHESIVE BONDING• Preparation of surfaces of metals to receive adhesives:

- Degrease.- Abrade mechanically or chemically etch.- Prime: To suit adhesive.

• Adhesive bond: Form under pressure.

527 WELDING STAINLESS STEEL COMPONENTS.• Welding procedures:

- Method and standard: TIG welding to BS EN 1011-3.- Welding Procedure Specification (WPS): Not required.

• Preparation:- Joint preparation: Clean thoroughly.- Surfaces of materials that will be self-finished and visible in the completed work: protectfrom weld splatter.

• Jointing:- Joints: Fully bond parent and filler metal throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity or cracks.

- Dissimilar metals: Welding not permitted.- Strength requirements: Welds to achieve design loads.- Heat straightening: Not permitted.- Complex assemblies: Agree priority for welding members to minimize distortion causedby subsequent welds.

- Tack welds: Use only for temporary attachment.- Jigs: Provide to support and restrain members during welding.- Filler plates: Obtain approval.- Lap joints: Minimum 5 x metal thickness or 25 mm, whichever is greater.- Weld terminations: Clean and sound.

530 STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION• Guillotining or punching: Do not use for metal thicknesses greater that 10 mm.• Thermal cutting:

- Carbonation in the heat affected zone: Remove, after cutting.• Bending:

- Plates or bars: Cold bending radius not less than material thickness.- Tubes: Cold bending radius not less than 2 x tube diameter.

• Welding: In addition to general welding requirements:- Protect adjacent surfaces from weld spatter.- Pickle all welds before post fabrication treatments.

• Protection: Provide protection to fabricated components during transit and on site.

555 BRAZING

• Standard: To BS EN 14324.

• Testing:- Destructive testing: To BS EN 12797.- Nondestructive testing: To BS EN 12799.

FINISHING

710 FINISHING WELDED AND BRAZED JOINTS VISIBLE IN COMPLETE WORK• Standard: To BS EN ISO 8501-3.

- Preparation grade: P1.• Butt joints: Smooth, and flush with adjacent surfaces.• Fillet joints: Neat.• Grinding: Grind smooth where indicated on drawings.



745 PREPARATION FOR APPLICATION OF COATINGS• General: Complete fabrication, and drill fixing holes before applying coatings.• Paint, grease, flux, rust, burrs and sharp arrises: Remove.

750 LIQUID ORGANIC COATING FOR ALUMINIUM ALLOY COMPONENTS• Standard: To BS 4842.

760 ZINC AND CADMIUM PLATING OF IRON AND STEEL SURFACES

• Zinc plating: To BS EN ISO 2081.

• Cadmium plating: To BS EN ISO 2082.

770 CHROMIUM PLATING• Standard: To BS EN ISO 1456.

780 GALVANIZING• Standard: To BS EN ISO 1461.• Preparation:

- Vent and drain holes: Provide in accordance with BS EN ISO 14713-1 and -2. Seal after sections have been drained and cooled.

- Components subjected to cold working stresses: Heat treat to relieve stresses beforegalvanizing.

- Welding slag: Remove.- Component cleaning: To BS EN ISO 8501-3.- Grade: St 2.

790 VITREOUS ENAMELLING

• Standard: To BS EN ISO 28722.

• Substrate metal: Steel to BS EN 10209.

COMPLETION

910 DOCUMENTATION• Submit:

- Manufacturer's maintenance instructions.- Guarantees, warranties, test certificates, record schedules and log books.

920 COMPLETION

• Protection: Remove.

• Cleaning and maintenance: Carry out in accordance with procedures detailed infabricators' guarantees.



Z12

Preservative/ fire retardant treatment

Z12 Preservative/ fire retardant treatment


110 TREATMENT APPLICATION

• Timing: After cutting and machining timber, and before assembling components.

• Processor: Licensed by manufacturer of specified treatment solution.- Operatives: Must have completed the WPA training scheme .

• Certification: For each batch of timber provide a certificate of assurance that treatment hasbeen carried out as specified.

120 COMMODITY SPECIFICATIONS• Standard: Current edition of the Wood Protection Association (WPA) publication 'Industrial

wood preservation specification and practice'.

130 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT SOLUTION STRENGTHS/ TREATMENT CYCLES• General: Select to achieve specified service life and to suit treatability of specified wood

species.

165A WATER-BASED MICROEMULSION PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

• Manufacturer: Arch Timber Protection Ltd, part of the Lonza Group.- Web: www.archtp.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: TANALISED E pressure treated timber

• Application category:- Standard: To BS EN 335-1Use class: 2.

- Application: Double vacuum + low pressure impregnation.

• Moisture content of wood:- At time of treatment: As specified for the timber/ component at time of fixing.- After treatment: Timber to be surface dry before use.

165B WATER-BASED MICROEMULSION PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT• Manufacturer: Arch Timber Protection Ltd, part of the Lonza Group.

- Web: www.archtp.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: TANALISED Extra pressure treated timber

• Application category:- Standard: To BS EN 335-1Use class: 4.

- Application: Double vacuum + low pressure impregnation.




165C PRESERVED TIMBER• Manufacturer: Arch Timber Protection Ltd, part of the Lonza Group.

- Web: www.archtp.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: TANALISED CLEAR- Application: Double vacuum + low pressure impregnation.


180 RECYCLED TIMBER CONTAINING CREOSOTE OR CHROMIUM/ ARSENIC BASEDPRESERVATIVE

• Usage: Not allowed.

210 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT

• Solution type: Humidity resistant.- Manufacturer: Wheldon Road, Castleford, West Yorkshire WF10 2JT

Tel: +44 (0)1977 714000Fax: +44 (0)1977 714001Email: [email protected]: www.archtp.com.

Product reference: DRICON?.- Application: Vacuum + pressure impregnation.

• Moisture content of wood:- At time of treatment: As specified for the timber/ component at time of fixing.- After treatment: Timber to be redried slowly at temperatures not exceeding 65?C tominimize distortion and degradation.

610 MAKING GOOD TO PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT ON SITE

• Preservative solution: Compatible with off-site treatment.

• Application: In accordance with preservative manufacturer's recommendations.

620 MAKING GOOD TO FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT ON SITE

• Fire retardant: Compatible with off-site treatment.

• Application: In accordance with fire retardant manufacturer's recommendations.



Z20

Fixings and adhesives

Z20 Fixings and adhesives


PRODUCTS

310 FASTENERS GENERALLY

• Materials: To have:- Bimetallic corrosion resistance appropriate to items being fixed.- Atmospheric corrosion resistance appropriate to fixing location.

• Appearance: Submit samples on request.

320 PACKINGS• Materials: Noncompressible, corrosion proof.• Area of packings: Sufficient to transfer loads.

330 NAILED TIMBER FASTENERS• Nails:

- Steel: To BS 1202-1 or BS EN 10230-1.- Copper: To BS EN 1202-2.- Aluminium: To BS 1202-3.

340 MASONRY FIXINGS

• Light duty: Plugs and screws.

• Heavy duty: Expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

350 PLUGS• Type: Proprietary types to suit substrate, loads to be supported and conditions expected in

use.

360 ANCHORS• Types:

- Expansion: For use in substrate strong enough to resist forces generated by expansionof anchor.

- Adhesive or chemical:For use in substrate where expansion of anchor would fracture substrate.For use in irregular substrate where expansion anchors cannot transfer load on anchor.

- Cavity: For use where the anchor is retained by toggles of the plug locking onto theinside face of the cavity.

370 WOOD SCREWS• Type:

- Wood screws (traditional pattern).Standard: To BS 1210.- Wood screws.Pattern: Parallel, fully threaded shank or twin thread types.

• Washers and screw cups: Where required are to be of same material as screw.

380 MISCELLANEOUS SCREWS• Type: To suit the fixing requirement of the components and substrate.

- Pattern: Self-tapping, metallic drive screws, or power driven screws.

• Washers and screw cups: Where required to be of same material as screw.



390 ADHESIVES GENERALLY• Standards:

- Hot-setting phenolic and aminoplastic: To BS 1203.- Thermosetting wood adhesives: To BS EN 12765.- Thermoplastic adhesives: To BS EN 204.

410 POWDER ACTUATED FIXING SYSTEMS• Types of fastener, accessories and consumables: As recommended by tool manufacturer.

EXECUTION

610 FIXING GENERALLY

• Integrity of supported components: Select types, sizes, quantities and spacings of fixings,fasteners and packings to retain supported components without distortion or loss of support.

• Components, substrates, fixings and fasteners of dissimilar metals: Isolate with washers/sleeves to avoid bimetallic corrosion.

• Appearance: Fixings to be in straight lines at regular centres.

620 FIXING THROUGH FINISHES• Penetration of fasteners and plugs into substrate: To achieve a secure fixing.

630 FIXING PACKINGS

• Function: To take up tolerances and prevent distortion of materials and components.

• Limits: Do not use packings beyond thicknesses recommended by fixings and fastenersmanufacturer.

• Locations: Not within zones to be filled with sealant.

640 FIXING CRAMPS

• Cramp positions: Maximum 150 mm from each end of frame sections and at 600 mmmaximum centres.

• Fasteners: Fix cramps to frames with screws of same material as cramps.• Fixings in masonry work: Fully bed in mortar.

650 NAILED TIMBER FIXING• Penetration: Drive fully in without splitting or crushing timber.• Surfaces visible in completed work: Punch nail heads below wrot surfaces.• Nailed timber joints: Two nails per joint (minimum), opposed skew driven.

660 SCREW FIXING

• Finished level of countersunk screw heads:- Exposed: Flush with timber surface.- Concealed (holes filled or stopped): Sink minimum 2 mm below surface.

670 PELLETED COUNTERSUNK SCREW FIXING• Finished level of countersunk screw heads: Minimum 6 mm below timber surface.• Pellets: Cut from matching timber, match grain and glue in to full depth of hole.• Finished level of pellets: Flush with surface.

680 PLUGGED COUNTERSUNK SCREW FIXING• Finished level of countersunk screw heads: Minimum 6 mm below timber surface.• Plugs: Glue in to full depth of hole.

• Finished level of plugs: Projecting above surface.



690 USING POWDER ACTUATED FIXING SYSTEMS• Powder actuated fixing tools: To BS 4078-2 and Kitemark certified.• Operatives: Trained and certified as competent by tool manufacturer.

700 APPLYING ADHESIVES• Surfaces: Clean. Adjust regularity and texture to suit bonding and gap filling characteristics

of adhesive.• Support and clamping during setting: Provide as necessary. Do not mark surfaces of or

distort components being fixed.• Finished adhesive joints: Fully bonded. Free of surplus adhesive.



Z21

Mortars

Z21 Mortars


CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS

110 CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR MIXES

• Specification: Proportions and additional requirements for mortar materials are specifiedelsewhere.

120 SAND FOR SITE MADE CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS• Standard: To BS EN 13139.• Grading: 0/2 (FP or MP).

- Fines content where the proportion of sand in a mortar mix is specified as a range (e.g.1:1: 5-6):Lower proportion of sand: Use category 3 fines.Higher proportion of sand: Use category 2 fines.

• Sand for facework mortar: Maintain consistent colour and texture. Obtain from one source.

131 READY-MIXED LIME:SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS• Standard: To BS EN 998-2.

• Lime: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1.- Type: CL 90S.

• Pigments for coloured mortars: To BS EN 12878.

135 SITE MADE LIME:SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS

• Permitted use: Where a special colour is not required and in lieu of factory made ready-mixed material.

• Lime: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1.- Type: CL 90S.

• Mixing: Thoroughly mix lime with sand, in the dry state. Add water and mix again. Allow tostand, without drying out, for at least 16 hours before using.

160 CEMENTS FOR MORTARS• Cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.

- Types: Portland cement, CEM I.Portland limestone cement, CEM ll/A-L or CEM ll/A-LL.

Portland slag cement, CEM II/B-S. Portland fly ash cement, CEM II/B-V.

- Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5.

• White cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.- Type: Portland cement, CEM I.- Strength class: 52.5.

• Sulfate resisting Portland cement:- Types: To BS 4027 and Kitemarked.

To BS EN 197-1 fly ash cement, CEM ll/B-V and CE marked.- Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5.

• Masonry cement: To BS EN 413-1 and CE marked.- Class: MC 12.5.



180 ADMIXTURES FOR SITE MADE CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS• Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-3 and compatible with other mortar

constituents.• Other admixtures: Submit proposals.• Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride, ethylene glycol and any admixture containing

calcium chloride.

190 RETARDED READY TO USE CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR• Standard: To BS EN 998-2.• Lime for cement:lime:sand mortars: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1.

- Type: CL 90S.

• Pigments for coloured mortars: To BS EN 12878.

• Time and temperature limitations: Use within limits prescribed by mortar manufacturer.- Retempering: Restore workability with water only within prescribed time limits.

200 STORAGE OF CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR MATERIALS

• Sands and aggregates: Keep different types/ grades in separate stockpiles on hard, clean,free-draining bases.

• Factory made ready-mixed lime:sand/ ready to use retarded mortars: Keep in coveredcontainers to prevent drying out or wetting.

• Bagged cement/ hydrated lime: Store off the ground in dry conditions.

210 MAKING CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS• Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets.

- Mix proportions: Based on dry sand. Allow for bulking of damp sand.• Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency, free from lumps.

- Mortars containing air entraining admixtures: Mix mechanically. Do not overmix.• Working time (maximum): Two hours at normal temperatures.• Contamination: Prevent intermixing with other materials.



Z22

Sealants

Z22 Sealants


PRODUCTS

310 JOINTS MOVEMENT JOINTS IN MASONRY PANELS

• Primer, backing strip, bond breaker: Types recommended by sealant manufacturer.

EXECUTION

610 SUITABILITY OF JOINTS• Presealing checks:

- Joint dimensions: Within limits specified for the sealant.- Substrate quality: Surfaces regular, undamaged and stable.

• Joints not fit to receive sealant: Submit proposals for rectification.

620 PREPARING JOINTS• Surfaces to which sealant must adhere:

- Remove temporary coatings, tapes, loosely adhering material, dust, oil, grease, surfacewater and contaminants that may affect bond.

- Clean using materials and methods recommended by sealant manufacturer.

• Vulnerable surfaces adjacent to joints: Mask to prevent staining or smearing with primer or sealant.

• Backing strip and/ or bond breaker installation: Insert into joint to correct depth, withoutstretching or twisting, leaving no gaps.

• Protection: Keep joints clean and protect from damage until sealant is applied.

630 APPLYING SEALANTS

• Substrate: Dry (unless recommended otherwise) and unaffected by frost, ice or snow.• Environmental conditions: Do not dry or raise temperature of joints by heating.• Sealant application: Fill joints completely and neatly, ensuring firm adhesion to substrates.• Sealant profiles:

- Butt and lap joints: Slightly concave.- Fillet joints: Flat or slightly convex.

• Protection: Protect finished joints from contamination or damage until sealant has cured.



Z31

Powder coatings

Z31 Powder coatings


120A POWDER COATING MATERIALS

• Manufacturer: Obtain from one only of the following: As clause 120A.

• Selected manufacturer: Submit details before commencement of powder coating including:- Name and contact details.- Details of accreditation schemes.- Technical data of product including current Agr?ment certificates.

120B POWDER MANUFACTURER• Manufacturer: DuPont Powder Coatings UK Ltd.

- Web: www.coatingsolutions.dupont.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Alesta

210 WORKING PROCEDURES• Comply with the follow following standards.

- Aluminium components: To BS 6496 or BS EN 12206-1.- Steel components: To BS EN 13438.- Safety standards: To British Coatings Federation 'Code of safe practice - Application of thermosetting powder coatings by electrostatic spraying'.

220 POWDER COATING APPLICATORS

• Applicator requirements:- Approved by powder coating manufacturer.- Currently certified to BS EN ISO 9001.- Comply with quality procedures, guarantee conditions, standards and tests required bypowder coating manufacturer.

- Applicator to use only one plant.- Selected applicator: Submit details before commencement of powder coating including:Name and contact details.Details of accreditation schemes.

225 GUARANTEES• Powder coating manufacturer and applicator guarantees:

- Submit sample copies before commencement of powder coating.- Submit signed project specific copies on completion of work.

230 CONTROL SAMPLES

• Sequence: Prior to ordering materials for the works, obtain approval of appearance for:- Powder coated samples: Of various grades and forms of background metal to be used,showing any colour, texture and gloss variation.

- Fabrication samples: Showing joint assembly, how powder coating is affected and how any cut metal edges are finished and protected.

• Samples to include the following information:- Product reference.- Colour.- Reference number.- Name.- Gloss level.



235 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AT PLANT• Requirement: Contractors/ suppliers of the following designated components must

commission an approved Independent Inspection Authority to carry out acceptanceinspections to confirm that powder coating application complies with this specification.- Designated components: Curtain walling framing and cover caps, as section H11 .

• Acceptance inspections: Carry out for each variation of colour and finish of eachcomponent work package at applicator's plant prior to any fabrication of units, inaccordance with the following:- Where three of more production runs are required for application of coatings, not lessthan three acceptance inspections must be carried out in accordance with BS 6001-1,general inspection level 2, with an acceptance quality limit of 1%.

- Where less than three production runs are required for application of coatings, oneacceptance inspection must be carried out in accordance with BS 6001-2, with a limitingquality of 5% where the probability of acceptance is 10%.

• Components failing inspection: Reprocess or replace and reinspect.• Inspection reports: Independent Inspection Authority must submit copies.

240 QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM

• Requirement: Powder and coating application to the following designated components is tobe tested and approved in accordance with the Qualicoat system.- Designated components: All..

250 COMPONENT DESIGN• Condition of components to be powder coated:

- To comply with relevant recommendations of BS 4479-1, -3, and -4.- Of suitable size to fit plant capacity.- Of suitable thickness to withstand oven curing.

310 PRETREATMENT OF ALUMINIUM COMPONENTS

• Condition of components to be pretreated:- Free from corrosion and damage.- All welding and jointing completed and finish off as specified.- Free from impurities including soil, grease, oil.- Suitable for and compatible with the pretreatment process.

• Conversion coating requirements:- Chromate system: To BS 6496 or BS EN 12206-1.- Chromate-free system: To BS EN 12206-1. Submit details before using.

• Rinsing requirements: Use demineralized water. Drain and dry.

320 PRETREATMENT OF STEEL COMPONENTS• Condition of components to be pretreated:

- Free from corrosion and damage.- All welding and jointing completed and finish off as specified.- Free from impurities including soil, grease, oil.- Suitable for and compatible with the pretreatment process.

• Conversion coating requirements: To BS EN 13438.• Rinsing requirements: Use demineralized water. Drain and dry.

430 EXTENT OF POWDER COATINGS

• Application: To visible component surfaces, and concealed surfaces requiring protection.Coated surfaces will be deemed 'significant surfaces' for relevant BS 6496 or BS EN 13438performance requirements.



435 APPLICATION OF POWDER COATINGS• Surfaces to receive powder coatings: Free from dust or powder deposits.• Powder colours: Obtain from one batch of one manufacturer.• Commencement of powder coating: To be continuous from pretreatment.• Jig points: Not visible on coated components.• Curing: Controlled to attain metal temperatures and hold periods recommended by powder

coating manufacturer.• Stripping and recoating of components: Only acceptable by prior agreement of powder

coating manufacturer. Stripping, pretreatment and powder coating are to be in accordancewith manufacturer's requirements.

• Overcoating of components: Not acceptable.

440 PERFORMANCE AND APPEARANCE OF POWDER COATINGS

• For aluminium components:- Standard: To BS 6496 or BS EN 12206-1.

• For steel components:- Standard: To BS EN 13438.

• Visual inspection after powder coating: Significant surface viewing distances to be as specified in the relevant Standard, unless specified otherwise.

• Colour and gloss levels: To conform with approved samples.

450 ALUMINIUM ALLOY FABRICATIONS• Units may be assembled:

- Before powder coating.- From components powder coated after cutting to size.- Where approved, from components powder coated before cutting to size.

• Exposure of uncoated background metal: Not acceptable.• Assembly sealants: Compatible with powder coatings. Obtain approval of colour if sealants

are visible after fabrication.

460 STEEL FABRICATIONS

• Unit assembly: Wherever practical, before powder coating.

• Exposure of uncoated background metal: Not acceptable.

• Assembly sealants: Compatible with powder coatings. Obtain approval of colour if sealantsare visible after fabrication.

470 FIXINGS

• Exposed metal fixings: Powder coat together with components, or coat with matchingrepair paint system applied in accordance with the powder coating manufacturer?srecommendations.

480 DAMAGED COMPONENTS - REPAIR/ REPLACEMENT• Before delivery to site: Check all components for damage to powder coatings. Replace

damaged components.• Site damage: Submit proposals for repair or replacement.



510 PROTECTION• Powder coated surfaces of components: Protect from damage during handling and

installation, or by subsequent site operations.• Protective coverings: Must be:

- Resistant to weather conditions.- Partially removable to suit building in and access to fixing points.

• Protective tapes in contact with powder coatings: Must be:- Low tack, self adhesive and light in colour.- Applied and removed in accordance with tape and powder coating manufacturers'recommendations. Do not use solvents to remove residues as these are detrimental tothe coating.

• Inspection of protection: Carry out monthly. Promptly repair any deterioration or deficiency.

535 DOCUMENTATION

• Submit the following information for each batch of powder coated components:- Supplier.- Trade name.- Colour.- Type of powder.- Method of application.- Batch and reference number.- Statutory requirements.- Test certificates.- Maintenance instructions.

540 COMPLETION• Protection: Remove.• Cleaning and maintenance of powder coatings: Carry out in accordance with procedures

detailed in powder coating manufacturer and applicator guarantees.



Z33

Anodizing

Z33 Anodizing


110 ANODIC COATING• Anodizer: Select one only of the following: to be confirmed.• Selected anodizer: Submit details before commencement of anodizing, including:

- Name and contact details.- Details of accreditation schemes.- Technical data of product including current Agr?ment certificates.

210 WORKING PROCEDURES

• Standard: To BS 3987 for anodic coatings on wrought aluminium.

220 ANODIZER REQUIREMENTS• Processing:

- Approved: By the Aluminium Finishing Association.- Certified: To BS EN ISO 9001.- Anodizing plant: Each anodizer to use only one plant.

230 GUARANTEES

• Anodizer guarantees: Submit sample copies before commencement of anodizing.

• Project specific guarantees: Submit signed copies on completion of work.

• Guarantees to cover:- Life expectancy.- Colour: Opacity and consistency.- Texture: Gloss, satin or matt.- Quality of coating.

240 CONTROL SAMPLES• Sequence: Prior to ordering materials for the works, obtain approval of appearance for:

- Anodic coated samples: Showing colour and texture variation.- Fabrication samples: Showing joint assembly, how anodic coating is affected and how cut metal edges are finished and protected.

250 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AT PLANT• Requirement: Contractors/ suppliers of the following designated components must

commission an approved Independent Inspection Authority to carry out acceptanceinspections to confirm that anodic coating application complies with this specification.- Designated components: expanded metal screens.

• Acceptance inspections: Carry out for each variation of colour and finish of eachcomponent work package at anodizer's plant prior to any fabrication of units, in accordancewith the following: - Where three of more production runs are required for application of coatings, not lessthan three acceptance inspections must be carried out in accordance with BS 6001-1,general inspection level 2, with an acceptance quality limit of 1%.

- Where less than three production runs are required for application of coatings, oneacceptance inspection must be carried out in accordance with BS 6001-2, with a limitingquality of 5% where the probability of acceptance is 10%.

• Components failing inspection: Reprocess or replace and reinspect.

• Inspection reports: Independent Inspection Authority must submit copies.



255 QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM• Requirement: Powder and coating application to the following designated components is to

be tested and approved in accordance with the Qualanod system.- Designated components: expanded metal screens.

270 COMPONENT DESIGN• Condition of components to be anodized:

- To comply with relevant recommendations of BS 4479-1, and -5.- Of suitable size to fit plant capacity.

310 PRETREATMENT

• Condition of components to be anodized:- Free from corrosion and damage.- Suitable for and compatible with the pretreatment and anodizing process.

• Process: In accordance with the specification requirements for the finish.

410 EXTENT OF ANODIC COATINGS• Application: To visible component surfaces, and concealed surfaces requiring protection.

Coated surfaces will be deemed ?significant surfaces? for relevant BS 3987 performancerequirements.

420 APPLICATION OF ANODIC COATINGS

• Surfaces to receive anodic coatings: Clean.

• Commencement of anodic coating: To be continuous from pretreatment.

• Jig points: To be agreed. Not on visible areas of anodic coated components.

• Use of touch-up paint: Not acceptable.

430 PERFORMANCE AND APPEARANCE OF ANODIC COATINGS

• Standard: To BS 3987.

• Visual inspection after anodizing: Significant surfaces to be free from visible coating/ defects when viewed from a distance of not less than 5 m for external and 3 m for internalapplications.

440 FABRICATION• Units may be assembled:

- Before anodizing, providing sufficient drainage holes are included in components to fullydrain components.

- From components anodized after cutting to size.- Where approved, from components anodized before cutting to size.- Exposure of uncoated background metal: Not acceptable.- Assembly sealants: Compatible with anodic coatings. Obtain approval of colour if sealants are visible after fabrication.

450 DAMAGED COMPONENTS - REPAIR/ REPLACEMENT

• Before delivery to site: Check all components for damage to anodic coatings. Replacedamaged components.

• Site damage: Submit proposals for repair or replacement.



510 PROTECTION• Anodic coated surfaces of components: Protect from damage during handling and

installation, or by subsequent site operations.• Protective coverings: Must be:

- Resistant to weather conditions.- Partially removable to suit building in and access to fixing points.

• Protective tapes in contact with anodizing to be:- Low tack, self adhesive and light in colour.- Applied and removed in accordance with tape and anodizers recommendations.

• Inspection of protection: Carry out weekly. Promptly repair any deterioration or deficiency.

530 DOCUMENTATION

• Submit the following information for each batch of anodic coated components:- Supplier.- Trade name.- Colour (if required).- Batch and reference number.- Statutory requirements.

540 COMPLETION• Protection: Remove.• Cleaning and maintenance of anodic coatings: Carry out in accordance with procedures

detailed in anodizer's guarantees.

